JP2021132794A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase game interest.SOLUTION: A game machine includes performance control means (performance control device 300) that controls a performance of a game, and display means (display device 41) that can display information on the game. The performance control means can suggest first information and second information different from the first information, depending on the display mode of a predetermined performance displayed on the display means, and can execute suggestion of a shift to a first game state or suggestion of a shift to a second game state different from the first game state, depending on the display mode of start memory display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 113

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) displayed on the display means provided in the game area based on the fact that the game ball wins a prize at the start port provided in the game area (starting prize). It is possible to store up to a predetermined number of start-up memories, which is the right to execute a variable display game. Then, the variable display game is executed based on the stored start memory, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened is set. Further, the start memory can be preliminarily determined before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory, and the display means can execute a look-ahead effect of notifying the player of the determination result (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ..

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-180269

However, what is notified by the effect displayed on the display means is only the possibility of a special result, and the effect is monotonous, and the interest of the game cannot be sufficiently improved. An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result.
A production control means that controls the production of the game,
Equipped with a display means that can display information about the game,
The effect control means
Depending on the display mode of the predetermined effect displayed on the display means, the suggestion of the transition to the first gaming state and the suggestion of the transition to the second gaming state different from the first gaming state can be executed. It is characterized by being.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an enlarged explanatory view which shows the detail of a batch display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution rate of the result of a special figure variation display game, the distribution rate of a big hit symbol, the distribution rate of a small hit symbol, and the distribution rate of a symbol per support. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a variation selection table group. It is a figure explaining the support number in the case where the support hit is derived during the normal electric support. It is a figure explaining the support number in the case where the support hit is derived during the normal electric support. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 1 fluctuation start process and a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit determination process and the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the support hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the effect mode information check process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process in a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the support operation setting process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1 and the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the main process of an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure which shows an example of the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed as the special effect performed in the variable display game in which the result is "per support". It is a figure which shows an example of the additional effect performed after the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining an example of production. It is a figure explaining an example of production. It is a figure explaining an example of production. It is a figure explaining the change of visibility in an example of a production. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of the support hit determination, and is the figure which shows an example of the fractionation rate. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of the support hit determination, and is the flowchart explaining the special figure start port switch common processing. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of the support hit determination, and is the flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of the support hit determination, and is the flowchart explaining the support hit determination process. It is a figure explaining the modification 3 of the support hit determination, and is the figure which shows the fractionation rate. It is a figure explaining the modification 3 of the support hit determination, and is the flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification 3 of the support hit determination, and is the flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification 3 of the support hit determination, and is the flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification 4 of the support hit determination, and is the figure which shows the fractionation rate. It is a figure explaining the modification 4 of the support hit determination, and is the flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification 4 of the support hit determination, and is the flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure explaining other modification 11 and is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a figure explaining the other modified example 11, and is the figure which shows the fractionation rate. It is a figure explaining other modification 11 and is the flowchart explaining the specific area switch monitoring process. It is a figure explaining other modification 11 and is the flowchart explaining the small hit residual sphere processing. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a front view of the game board of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the fractionation rate in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the gaming state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the modification of the support number of times notification effect. It is a figure explaining the modification of the support number of times notification effect. It is a figure explaining the modification of the support number of times notification effect. It is a figure explaining the modification of the support number of times notification effect. It is a figure explaining the modification of the decoration identification information (large design). It is a figure explaining the modification of the decoration identification information (large design). It is a figure explaining the modification of the decoration identification information (large design). It is a figure explaining the modification of the decoration identification information (large design). It is a front view of the game board of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation of the special variation winning apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the gaming machine equipped with the ceiling function. It is a flowchart explaining the process of displaying a special figure in a gaming machine equipped with a ceiling function. It is a flowchart explaining the process of displaying a special figure in a gaming machine equipped with a ceiling function. It is a flowchart explaining the normal probability fluctuation number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the support operation setting process in the gaming machine equipped with the ceiling function. It is a figure explaining an example of a ceiling suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a ceiling suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a ceiling suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a ceiling suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a ceiling suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the counting method in the gaming machine equipped with the ceiling function. It is a figure explaining an example of a ceiling suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a ceiling suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a ceiling suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a ceiling suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a ceiling suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a ceiling suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect suggesting the probability setting value. It is a figure which shows the back side of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the game control device. It is a figure which shows the game control board. It is a figure which shows a part of a board box. It is a figure which shows the game control board housed in the board box. It is a figure explaining the visibility around the CPU. It is a figure explaining the visibility around the CPU and the figure explaining the modification.

<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 3) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

The glass frame 15 is provided with a display plate 350 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 at a position behind the cover glass 14. The display board 350 can see through the game board 30 and can display a predetermined display. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is composed of a light guide plate in which an image emerges by introducing light from a side end, but may be composed of a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device.
When a predetermined display is not displayed on the display board 350, it is transparent so as not to interfere with the visibility of the game board 30 behind. Then, when a predetermined display is displayed on the display board 350, the visibility of the rear game board 30 is reduced at the predetermined display portion. In this state, the rear game board 30 may be visible through a predetermined display, or the rear game board 30 may be invisible due to the predetermined display.

A model name display unit 16 for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10 is provided on the upper portion of the glass frame 15.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the glass frame 15, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back surface side of the game machine 10 are provided. An outlet 22 and the like for the upper plate ball to flow out are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a (see FIG. 6) for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, the effect button 25 also has a built-in drive source for vibrating the effect button 25. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a vibration function that gives a predetermined notification by vibrating the effect button 25. The effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) to a protruding state (a state in which the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is above the normal state). You may.

At the lower part of the front frame 12, a lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

Further, to the right of the effect button 25, there is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card is ejected from the card unit of the ball lending machine. Return button (discharge button) 27b to operate, balance indicator (balance display) 27c to display the balance of the prepaid card, upper plate operation lever to operate to let the game ball in the upper plate 21 flow down to the lower plate 23 27d, a mobile terminal holder 28 and the like for placing a mobile terminal such as a smartphone owned by the player are provided. Further, on the left side of the effect button 25, a volume adjusting button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device launches the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. do. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the cross key 29, the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 3). It can be performed.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. The game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a hitting ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the start winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the starting winning opening 36.
Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can operate between the position of the upper part of the center case 40 and the position indicated by the dotted line, which is the position on the center side of the display device 41 with respect to this position.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 5) provided in the general winning opening 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5).
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (not shown), and the movable member always holds a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the game ball is easily flowed into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 5) as a driving device (game). It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person.

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes by advancing and retreating (sliding) in the front-rear direction by the normal variable winning device 37c. The movable member of 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side by the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, or the ordinary electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in an inverted "C" shape.
Further, the normal variable winning device 37 enables the winning of the game ball even when the movable member is closed, and the game ball may be less likely to be won in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, the game ball is not accepted or easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper large winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving back and forth (sliding) the opening / closing member (not shown). The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5).

Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), a specific area where game balls can flow in is provided, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 5) is provided so as to change the inflow probability of the game balls into the specific area. ) Is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 5) capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous for the player can be obtained. It occurs (in the present embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the end of the special gaming state). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38.

Further, inside the upper prize opening, a residual ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 5) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area is provided. ing. The number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 38a provided inside the upper large winning opening (the number of game balls flowing into the upper large winning opening), and detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e. By matching the number of game balls (the number of game balls discharged from the upper prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize opening have been discharged, and basically until this confirmation is completed. Is not open to the new top prize opening.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a second special variable winning can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower prize opening) 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower large winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving (sliding) the opening / closing member (not shown) in the front-rear direction. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5).

The game area 32 below the start winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning opening or the like. Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4A, for example, the batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure variation display unit) 51 (A0 to A7) and a special figure 2 variation for a special figure 1 variation display game. Special figure 2 display (2nd special figure variation display unit) 52 (B0 to B7) for display game and special figure 1 hold display 53 (C0, C1) for notification of start memory number of special figure 1 variation display game ) And a special figure 2 hold display 54 (C2, C3) for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, the batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 55 (D0 to D3) that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times that the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed) and a gaming state that displays the gaming state of the gaming machine 10. It is provided with a display unit 56 (C6, C7, D7). The first game state display unit 56a (C6), which notifies the player of the left-handed (normal) and right-handed hitting methods (the hitting method corresponding to the game state), is displayed on the game state display unit 56. The second game state display unit 56b (C7), which notifies that the time is shortened (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated), notifies that the jackpot probability state is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. A third game state display unit 56c (D7) is provided.
Further, the batch display device 50 includes a normal map display 57 (D4 to D6) for the normal map variation display game and a normal map hold display 58 (C4, C5) for notifying the start storage number of the normal map variation display game. I have.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), the variation symbol numbers are alternately changed. The LED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit (LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are off) and the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are lit (LED lamps A0, A2, A2). By alternately switching between A4 and A6 (the lights are off), it is displayed that the fluctuation is in progress. The switching cycle is set to, for example, 60 msec. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "off", the result mode of the off (for example, LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A1 is turned on. ~ A7 is turned off), and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode (special result mode) of the hit is at least one of the result modes other than the missed result mode (for example, LED lamps A0 to A7). The game result is displayed in the mode (a mode in which the three are turned on). The special figure 1 display 51 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 2 variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (c), the variation symbol numbers are alternately changed. The LED lamps B0, B2, B4, B6 are lit (LED lamps B1, B3, B5, B7 are off) and the LED lamps B1, B3, B5, B7 are lit (LED lamps B0, B2, B2). By alternately switching between B4 and B6 (the lights are off), it is displayed that the fluctuation is in progress. The switching cycle is set to, for example, 60 msec. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "off", the result mode of the off (for example, LED lamp B0 is turned on and LED lamp B1 is turned on. ~ B7 is turned off), and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode (special result mode) of the hit is at least one of the result modes other than the missed result mode (for example, LED lamps B0 to B7). The game result is displayed in the mode (a mode in which the three are turned on). The special figure 2 display 52 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

The special figure 1 hold indicator 53 determines the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, for example, FIG. As shown in (d), the display is performed by turning off, turning on, and blinking a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C0 and C1). The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 128 msec.
The special figure 2 hold indicator 54 shows, for example, the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37, which is a fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52. As shown in 4 (d), the display is performed by turning off, turning on, and blinking a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C2 and C3). The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 128 msec.

The round display unit 55 turns off all the LEDs (LED lamps D0 to D3) when not in the special game state, and in the special game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (e), depending on the result. The LED is turned on according to the number of rounds selected. The round display unit 55 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

As shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, the first game state display unit 56a turns off the LED when the left-handed hit is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed hit (during normal hit). , When the right-handed is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed (when right-handed), the LED is turned on.
As shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, the second game state display unit 56b turns on the LED when the time is shortened, and turns off the LED when the time is not shortened.
As shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, the third game state display unit 56c turns on the LED when it is in a high probability state when the power is turned on, and turns off the LED when it is not in a high probability state.

In the normal map variation display game on the normal map display 57, during the variable display of the normal map variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (g), the variation symbol numbers are alternately changed to turn on the LED lamp D5. It is displayed that the LED lamps D4 and D6 are in a fluctuating state by alternately switching between the lighting state and the lighting state of the LED lamps D4 and D6. The switching cycle is set to, for example, 60 msec. Then, when the result is "hit", one of the plurality of LEDs (for example, LED lamp D4) is turned on to indicate that the result is "hit", and when the result is "missing", one of the plurality of LEDs is turned on. One of them (for example, LED lamps D5 and D6) is turned on to indicate that the lamp is out of alignment.
The normal figure hold indicator 58 determines the number of undigested balls (the number of normal figure start storage = the number of hold) among the number of passing balls of the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display 57, for example, FIG. As shown in (h), the display is performed by turning off, turning on, and blinking a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C4 and C5).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply unit having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a voltage of DC32V. It has a 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. It includes a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a means for retaining the memory of game information. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a special symbol symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game ( Random number generation to generate variation pattern random numbers for determining various reach and variation display game execution time in non-reach variation display, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general clock variation display game, etc. It is provided with a circuit and a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of a random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37. The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and the gate switch in the general drawing start gate 34. 34a, the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e arranged in the first special variable winning device 38, and all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game. An interface chip that is connected to the out-ball detection switch 32a to detect, inputs a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches, and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. (Proximity I / F) 121 is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the sensor and proximity switch are illegally shorted, the sensor and switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wires are cut and floated. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. Will be done. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on a front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal of a vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the gaming machine 10, and a gaming machine. The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of 10 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become.

Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 for detecting the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the state of not being turned to the second position. In some cases, it turns off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values that give special results in the special figure variation display game are assigned, and operate these operation units. As a result, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result is assigned in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values, "setting 1" to "setting 6", are prepared.

When selecting the probability setting value, the probability setting value is set by turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. The probability setting value change mode is set, and the probability setting value can be changed by operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability setting value change mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the probability set value information while the operation related to the probability set value is being performed (during the probability set value change mode and the probability set value confirmation mode), and other than that. In, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed.

Further, by turning on the power of the gaming machine while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability setting value is set to the performance display device. It is displayed in 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed. The probability setting value confirmation mode is set. The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability set value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124, 126 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61, the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a second large winning opening solenoid (large) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. The operation data of the winning port solenoid 2) 39b, the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38, and the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37 are output and are currently selected. This port is for outputting the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the stochastic set value.
Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. It is output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135. The external information signal supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 to the external device such as the management device is sent to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d to output and a fifth driver 138e to generate and output a drive signal by receiving the display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 are provided. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. DC5V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as the power supply voltage to the fifth driver 138e so that the performance display device 153 operating at 5V can be driven.
Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. No.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate. The switch 34a is provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil is used. Has been done. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is used to display images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 of the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 are a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for this is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). It is provided in the frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and the game board 30 (including the center case 40) that drive and control the frame decoration device having the provided LED (light emitting diode) (for example, the frame decoration device 18 including the display board 350). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided on the glass frame 15, and an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the above and the like and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting a state and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC-DC for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) for driving and controlling the lamp, motor, etc. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a hit (special result). When the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

The big hit is a special result (first special result) with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game is performed by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from the hit ball launcher toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or the game area flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32. It is discharged from 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches a game ball into the left gaming area (so-called left-handed) to move the starting winning opening 36 or the starting winning opening 36 to the left. It is possible to aim for a prize in the arranged general prize opening 35, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning It is possible to aim for a prize in the device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable winning device 39.

A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start memories is an upper limit number (for example, 4) based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), the number of normal figure start memories is added (+1) and one normal figure start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The number of stored numbers of the winnings for starting the normal drawing is displayed on the general drawing holding display 58 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory of starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, as a process of executing the normal map variation display game, the game control device 100 presets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns on the normal map display 57 provided in the batch display device 50 over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed. It should be noted that the normal figure display 57 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the figures in a predetermined time variation, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. It may be configured.

When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern, which is a special result mode, is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display 57, and the normal variable winning device 37 is operated by operating the normal electric solenoid 37c. Control is performed to open the device for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display 57 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the deviation.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). In addition to storing, the second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the special symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The random number value is stored in the RAM 111C as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the number of stored start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 53 and the special figure 2 hold display 54 for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and is displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 display 52 (1st variation display device) is based on the second start memory. The special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). Then, when both the first start memory and the second start memory are stored, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is based on the first start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area), and the special figure 1 variable display game ( The execution control of the first special figure variation display game) is performed, and the special figure 2 variation is based on the second start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning area). It serves as an execution control means for controlling the execution of the display game (second special figure variation display game). Then, the execution control means transfers the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory from the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory in a state where the first start memory and the second start memory are stored. Is also configured to be executed with priority.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the variable display, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). It becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 serves as a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, after the end of the big hit game state (first special game state), the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and the probability of hitting is high). It is possible to control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the game can proceed by (with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure variation in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on the display device 41. The display game is now running. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 changes the decoration identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It serves as a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the distribution rate in this embodiment.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, for example, there are four types of results of the special figure variation display game: a big hit, a small hit, and a support hit. Then, for the jackpot, for example, as shown in FIG. 7B, the probability variation A jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol (result mode of the jackpot), and the probability variation A jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. There are three types: B jackpot and normal jackpot where the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, for the small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 7 (c), the small hit A symbol is stopped and displayed as the small hit symbol (result mode of the small hit), and the small hit B symbol is stopped and displayed. There are two types of small hits B. Further, for the support hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 7 (d), the support hit symbol A and the support hit B symbol are stopped and displayed as the support hit symbol (result mode of the support hit). There are three types: B per support and C per support where the C symbol per support is stopped and displayed. In addition, the support hit is neither a big hit nor a small hit, and it can be said that it is a kind of miss (results other than special results).

Probability change means that there is a high possibility that a game ball will flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and a high probability state (probability change state) is likely to occur after the end of the special game state. It is shown that the possibility that the game ball flows in is low and it is difficult to reach the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific region (probability variation operation region). If the game ball does not flow in, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game ball flows into a specific area, the high probability state occurs.

In the special game state (big hit game state) based on the derivation of the probability variation A jackpot and the probability variation B jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened in a specific round and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened. conduct. The long opening with V is an opening mode in which the game ball is likely to flow into a specific region (probability variation operating region). Then, in a round other than the specific round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and V-less opening is performed.
In the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) based on the derivation of the normal jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the specific region (probability variation operating region) is opened in the specific round, and the short opening with V is performed. The short opening with V is an opening mode in which there is a possibility that the game ball may flow into a specific region (probability variation operating region), which is lower than the long opening with V. Then, in a round other than the specific round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and V-less opening is performed.
In the special gaming state (small hit gaming state) based on the derivation of the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.

FIG. 7A is an example of the fractionation rate of the result of the special figure variation display game. In the present embodiment, the distribution rate of the result of the special figure variation display game is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
Further, in FIG. 7A, the jackpot distribution rate is the same when the probability setting value is "setting 1", when it is "setting 2", and when it is "setting 3". However, it may be different. Further, in FIG. 7A, the jackpot distribution rate is the same when the probability setting value is “setting 4”, when it is “setting 5”, and when it is “setting 6”. However, it may be different. Further, for example, the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 1" and the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 2" are set to the first distribution rate (for example, low probability: 219/65536, high probability: 2190/65536). Then, the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 3" and the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 4" are set to the second distribution rate (for example, low probability: 262/65536, high probability: 2620/65536). The jackpot distribution rate in "setting 5" and the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 6" may be set as the third distribution rate (for example, low probability: 291/65536, high probability: 2910/65536).

Further, in FIG. 7A, the small hit distribution rate is the same regardless of the probability set value, but may be different. Further, in FIG. 7A, the small hit distribution rate is the same regardless of the probability state (whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state) of the special figure variation display game, but is different. You may be.
Further, in FIG. 7A, the fraction per support is the same regardless of the probability set value, but may be different.
That is, in the present embodiment, only the winning probability of the big hit is changed by changing the probability setting value, and the probabilities of the small hit and the support are not changed.
Further, in FIG. 7A, the support hit can be won only in the low probability state, but it may be possible to win even in the high probability state. In this case, the case where the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the low probability state may be higher than the case where the probability state is the high probability state, and the case where the probability state is low and the case where the probability state is high. It may be the same, or it may be lower in the low probability state than in the high probability state.

FIG. 7B is an example of a jackpot type distribution rate. In FIG. 7B, the distribution rate of the jackpot type is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Further, in FIG. 7B, the distribution rate of the jackpot type is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.
FIG. 7C is an example of a small hit type distribution rate. In FIG. 7 (c), the fractionation rate of the small hit type is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Further, in FIG. 7C, the fractionation rate of the small hit type is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.

FIG. 7D is an example of the parts per support type. In FIG. 7D, the parts per support type are the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.
Further, in FIG. 7 (d), the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 1 is higher than the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 2, but it is per support in Special Figure 1. The distribution rate of C may be the same as the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 2, or may be lower than the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 2. Further, in FIG. 7D, the distribution rate of A per support in Special FIG. 1 and the distribution rate of B per support in Special FIG. 1 are the same, but may be different. Further, in FIG. 7D, the distribution rate of A per support in Special FIG. 2 and the distribution rate of B per support in Special FIG. 2 are the same, but may be different. In addition, the distribution rate of the types per support when it is possible to win per support even in the high probability state may be the same as or different from that in the low probability state.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
First, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a game state transition in the present embodiment.
The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST14, a first specific gaming state ST11, a second specific gaming state ST12, and a third specific gaming state ST13. In addition to this, there are a first special gaming state (big hit gaming state) based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special gaming state (small hit gaming state) based on the second special result (small hit). However, it is omitted here.

In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result (big hit) to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, and the game. The main starting area, which is the starting area to be mainly aimed at in the state, the main variable special map, which is the type of the special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a left-handed hit can be aimed at winning a prize in the starting winning opening 36, and a right-handed hit can be aimed at winning a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Further, each game state is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly played, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to proceed mainly with the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so as to proceed. In this specification, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST14, the special figure probability is a low probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game or normal Figure Fluctuation display There is no time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. In addition, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation.

The first specific game state ST11 is a state in which the special figure probability is high, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure changing display game. There is no time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a latent mode. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation.

The second specific game state ST12 is a state in which the special figure probability is high, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is Fuden support, it will be possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.
The third specific game state ST13 is the same as the second specific game state ST12 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

Of these four gaming states, the normal gaming state ST14 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The third specific game state ST13 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST14 because it has a general electric support, and the first specific game state ST11 is a high probability state and therefore the normal game state ST14 and the third. This is a state more advantageous to the player than the specific game state ST13. The second specific game state ST12 is a high-probability state and has a general electric support, so that it is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST14, the first specific game state ST11, and the third specific game state ST13.

The transition of the game state is performed by the end of the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result (big hit), the derivation per support, and the digestion of the specified number of games. Therefore, the gaming state does not shift due to the end of the second special gaming state based on the derivation of the second special result (small hit).
Basically, if the special result that triggered the start of the special game state is a normal jackpot that is set to a low probability state after the end of the special game state, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST13, and the special Of the probability variation jackpots that are set to the high probability state after the end of the gaming state, if the probability variation A jackpot is the probability variation A jackpot, the process shifts to the second specific game state ST12, and if the probability variation B jackpot is the probability variation B jackpot, the process shifts to the first specific game state ST11. ..

Specifically, when the probability variation A jackpot is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game and the special gaming state is entered, and V is passed in the special gaming state (the specific area of the first special variation winning device 38 (probability variation operation area). ) When the game ball flows in and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), the process shifts to the second specific game state ST12 after the end of the special game state. In addition, as a result of the special figure variation display game, the probability variation B jackpot is derived and the game is in the special gaming state, and when V is passed in the special gaming state (the game is played in the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38). When the ball flows in and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), the game shifts to the first specific game state ST11 after the end of the special game state. In addition, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a normal jackpot is derived and a special game state is set, and when V is not passed in the special game state (a game ball in a specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38). If the game does not flow in), the game shifts to the third specific game state ST13 after the end of the special game state. Since the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST13 have the same chance mode as the effect mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the mode has changed.

It should be noted that the number of STs (for example, 2000 times), which is the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high probability state, is set, and the special figure variation display game is executed from the end of the special game state in the first specific game state ST11. When the number of times reaches the ST number of times, the game may shift to the normal game state ST14.
Further, the number of STs (for example, 2000 times), which is the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high probability state, is set, and the special figure variation display game is executed from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST12. When the number of times reaches the ST number of times, the game may shift to the normal game state ST14 (or the third specific game state ST13).

When a normal jackpot is derived and the game shifts to the third specific game state ST13, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times, and the third specific game state ST13 is executed. When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving the big hit or the support hit in the specific game state ST13, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times the jackpot is normally supported is set to "100 times". The number of times the jackpot is normally supported is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the probability variation jackpot A is derived and the game shifts to the second specific game state ST12, it is possible to stay in the second specific game state ST12 until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving the big hit in the second specific game state ST12, the game shifts to the first specific game state ST11. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support for the probability variation A jackpot is set to "1000 times". The number of times the probabilistic A jackpot is supported is not limited to "1000 times" and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be "until the next jackpot".

Further, as described above, the transition of the gaming state is also performed by the derivation per support.
Specifically, in the normal game state ST14 and the third specific game state ST13, when a support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the third specific game state is performed after the end of the special figure variation display game. Move to ST13. That is, the transition (transition) of the gaming state when the probabilistic jackpot or the normal jackpot is derived goes through the special gaming state, whereas the transition (transition) of the gaming state when the support hit is derived is special. Does not go through the game state.

When A per support is derived and shifts to the third specific game state ST13, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 20 times. Therefore, when the special figure variation display game is executed 20 times without deriving the big hit or the support hit in the third specific game state ST13, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. That is, in this embodiment, the number of times A is supported per support is set to "20 times". The number of times A is supported per support is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when B per support is derived and shifts to the third specific game state ST13, the player stays in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving the big hit or the support hit in the third specific game state ST13, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. That is, in this embodiment, the number of times B is supported per support is set to "100 times". The number of times B is supported per support is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when C per support is derived and shifts to the third specific game state ST13, the player stays in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving the big hit or the support hit in the third specific game state ST13, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support of C per support is set to "1000 times". The number of times C is supported per support is not limited to "1000 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the effect (display device 41, etc.) to be executed during the chance mode is used depending on whether the mode is changed to the chance mode via the special gaming state or the chance mode is changed without going through the special gaming state. Production by display, production by sound using speakers 19a, 19b, etc., production by light using frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc., production by movable members using board production device 44, frame production device, etc. , At least one of the variation pattern selection modes) can be made different. That is, the effect mode to be executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation A jackpot) and the effect to be executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the support hit (support hits A to C). Since it is possible to make it different from the effect mode, depending on the effect mode of the effect executed during the chance mode, whether the chance mode is generated based on the derivation of the jackpot or the one generated based on the derivation of the support. Can be suggested.

FIG. 9 shows an example of a variation pattern selection mode in the third specific gaming state ST13.
As shown in FIG. 9A, the present embodiment has fluctuation selection table groups A to D as fluctuation selection table groups in which selectable fluctuation patterns are defined. These variation selection table groups have different types of variation patterns and selection ratios that can be selected. As a result, the tendency of the execution mode of the special figure variation display game differs depending on the variation selection table group used.

The type of the variation selection table group to be used can be changed when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the third specific game state ST13 reaches a specified number of times (20 times, 100 times in this case).
The fluctuation pattern scenario that defines the change process of this fluctuation selection table group is different for each type of chance mode. That is, the variation pattern scenario selected differs depending on whether the derived result is usually a big hit or A to C per support.

In the case of chance mode A, which is a chance mode corresponding to A per support, a variation pattern scenario using the variation selection table group A is selected for the 0th to 20th special figure variation display games.
In the case of chance mode B, which is a chance mode corresponding to B per support, the variation selection table group A is used for the 0th to 20th special figure variation display games, and the 21st to 100th special figure variation display games are used. A variation pattern scenario using the variation selection table group B is selected.

In the case of chance mode C, which is a chance mode corresponding to C per support, the variation selection table group A is used for the 0th to 20th special figure variation display games, and the 21st to 100th special figure variation display games are used. The variation selection table group B is used, and a variation pattern scenario using the variation selection table group C is selected for the 101st to 1000th special figure variation display games.
In the case of chance mode D, which is a chance mode corresponding to a normal jackpot, the variation selection table group A is used for the 0th to 20th special figure variation display games, and the variation is performed for the 21st to 100th special figure variation display games. A variation pattern scenario that uses the selection table group D is selected.

By doing so, even in the same third specific game state ST13, the execution mode of the special figure variation display game is different due to the difference in the variation pattern scenario, and the execution mode of the special figure variation display game is changed. Born and able to improve the interest of games. In particular, both the support hit B and the normal jackpot are in the third specific game state ST13 over the period in which the special figure fluctuation display game is executed 100 times, but since the fluctuation pattern scenarios are different, the games have different tastes. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The selection of the variable selection table group is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily.
Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, one of a plurality of types of chance modes corresponding to each of the support hits A to C and the normal jackpot may be selected.
In this example, a fluctuation pattern scenario using a fluctuation selection table unique to each of A to C per support and a normal jackpot is included, and it is also possible to infer the type of chance mode from the fluctuation pattern.
For example, it can be inferred that the chance mode A2 is the chance mode A because the unique variation selection table group D is used, and the chance mode B2 uses the unique variation selection table groups E and F. It becomes possible to infer that it is B. Further, it can be inferred that the chance mode C2 is the chance mode C because the unique fluctuation selection table groups G and H are used, and the unique fluctuation selection table groups J and K are used in the chance mode D2. It is possible to guess that it is chance mode D,
By doing so, the game becomes more diverse, and it is possible to have the pleasure of guessing the type of chance mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the timing at which the variation selection table group can be changed in the variation pattern scenario is the 20th and 100th special figures from the start of the third specific game state ST13, which is a delimiter in which the third specific game state ST13 may end. The case where the variable display game is executed is not limited to this, and can be set at any timing.
Further, the change timing of the variable selection table group may be different for each chance mode.

In addition, instead of determining all the variable selection table groups to be used at the start of the chance mode, the variable selection table group to be used next can be selected from a plurality of types at a timing when the variable selection table group can be changed. Is also good.
Further, instead of the predetermined timing, a lottery for changing the variable selection table group may be performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed, and the lottery may be changed when the lottery is won.
Further, although the third specific gaming state ST13 has been described with reference to FIG. 9, the variation selection table group can be sequentially changed in the other gaming states as well.

In the present embodiment, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the normal electric support), that is, when the support hit is derived in the third specific game state ST13, the number of support times is reset and a new support hit is derived. Reset the number of support times corresponding to each support.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 10A, in the third specific game state ST13, which has shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is “B per support”, the support hits at the 10th rotation. When A is derived, the remaining number of times of support is changed from 90 times to 20 times.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the third specific game state ST13 shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is “B per support”, A per support is derived at the 90th rotation. If so, the remaining number of supports will be changed from 10 to 20.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode is changed in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 10A, when the remaining number of times of support is changed from 90 times to 20 times, the effect mode changes from chance mode B (chance mode corresponding to B per support) to chance mode. Switch to A (chance mode corresponding to A per support). Further, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 10B, when the remaining number of times of support is changed from 10 times to 20 times, the effect mode is switched from the chance mode B to the chance mode A. Along with this, the fluctuation pattern scenario is also switched, and the fluctuation selection table group is also reset according to the switched fluctuation pattern scenario.

When a support hit is newly derived in the third specific game state ST13, a fluctuation pattern scenario different from the fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the derived support hit may be set.
For example, a specific fluctuation pattern scenario different from the fluctuation pattern scenario that can be selected when the support hit is derived in the normal game state ST14 may be set. In this specific variation pattern scenario, a variation pattern scenario that selects a specific variation selection table group different from the variation selection table group that can be selected when a support hit is derived in the normal game state ST14 is set. Is also good. By doing so, the fluctuation selection table group is changed when the support hit is derived for the first time in one continuous third specific game state ST13, but it changes when the support hit is derived after that. It is possible to impress that the selection table group is maintained and the continuous third specific game state ST13 is integrated by deriving the support per support a plurality of times.

In addition, it is not necessary to change the production mode in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. Specifically, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 10, chance mode B may be continued even after the remaining number of times of support is changed to 20 times.
Further, it is possible to allow only the rank up of the effect mode and not to switch the effect mode to lower the rank. Specifically, for example, when the support hit derived after the support hit B is the support hit C, the production mode is switched from the chance mode B to the chance mode C (chance mode corresponding to the support hit C). , As shown in FIG. 10, when the support hit derived after the support hit B is the support hit A, switching the production mode from the chance mode B to the chance mode A lowers the rank, so the remaining number of support times. The chance mode B may be continued (or switched to a chance mode different from the chance mode A or the chance mode B) even after the change is made.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during Fuden support), the support count corresponding to the new support hit may be added to the remaining support count.
Specifically, for example, as shown in the left figure of FIG. 11A, in the third specific game state ST13, which has shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is “B per support”, the tenth rotation. When A is derived per support, the remaining number of support times is changed from 90 times to 110 times (= 90 times + 20 times), and the result is, for example, as shown in the right figure of FIG. 11 (a). In the third specific game state ST13, which has shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game of "B per support", if A per support is derived at the 90th rotation, the remaining number of support times is 10 to 30 times. It may be changed to times (= 10 times + 20 times).

In this case, an upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) is set for the number of times of support, and if the sum of the remaining number of times of support and the number of times of support corresponding to a new support exceeds the upper limit number of times, the remaining number of times of support is set. It may be changed to the upper limit number of times. Further, in this case, the effect mode may or may not be changed in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 11A, when the remaining number of times of support is changed, the effect mode may be switched from the chance mode B to another chance mode, or the remaining number of times of support is changed. After that, chance mode B may be continued. Further, it is possible to allow only the rank up of the effect mode and not to switch the effect mode to lower the rank.

Alternatively, when a support hit is derived during the chance mode (during Fuden support), the remaining number of supports is compared with the number of supports corresponding to a new support hit, which is more advantageous (advantageous for the player). One) may be adopted. Specifically, for example, as shown in the left figure of FIG. 11B, in the third specific game state ST13, which has shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is “B per support”, the tenth rotation. When A per support is derived, the number of times of support corresponding to a new support is 20 times, which is less than the number of times of support remaining (90 times), so the remaining number of times of support is not changed, for example. As shown in the right figure of FIG. 11B, in the third specific game state ST13 shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is “B per support”, A per support is derived at the 90th rotation. In that case, the number of support times corresponding to a new support is 20 times, which is larger than the remaining number of support times (10 times), so the remaining number of support times should be changed from 10 times to 20 times. Is also good.

In this case, the effect mode may or may not be changed in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. That is, for example, in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 11B, when the remaining number of times of support is changed, the effect mode may be switched from the chance mode B to another chance mode, or the remaining number of times of support may be switched. The chance mode B may be continued even after the change is made. Further, it is possible to allow only the rank up of the effect mode and not to switch the effect mode to lower the rank.

In the present embodiment, the effect performed during the execution of the support hit game (special figure variation display game whose result is "support hit") is a special effect (described later) such as a battle effect.
It should be noted that the control shown in FIG. 11B is performed with the gaming machine 10 having a configuration in which the larger of the remaining number of times of support and the number of times of support corresponding to a new support hit (the one that is advantageous to the player) is adopted. In the gaming machine 10), a special effect is performed only during the execution of the support hit game in which the number of times of support is adopted (for example, the special figure variation display game in which the result in the right figure of FIG. 11 (b) is “support hit A”). Even if the special effect is not performed during the execution of the support hit game in which the support count is not adopted (for example, the special figure variation display game in which the result in the left figure of FIG. 11B is "support hit A"). good.
Since the variation pattern per support selected when the result is "per support" is a variation pattern considering executing a special effect during the game per support, the special effect is executed during the game per support. If this is not the case, it is advisable to make adjustments by lengthening the temporary stop display time of the game result as compared with the case of executing the special effect.

Further, in the example shown in the left figure of FIG. 11B, the support hit symbol (here, the support hit symbol A symbol) is stopped and displayed as a result of the support hit game in which the support count is not adopted. Not limited. For example, as a result of the support hit game in which the support count is not adopted, the out-of-support symbol may be stopped and displayed instead of the support hit symbol. In the gaming machine 10 having a configuration in which the larger number of the remaining number of supports and the number of supports corresponding to the new support hit (the one that is advantageous to the player) is adopted, the effect control device 300 is transmitted from the game control device 100. Based on the command, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the game control device 100 does not adopt the support number corresponding to the new support. Specifically, the effect control device 300 reduces the time for notifying the number of times of support based on the decorative special figure command for notifying the stop symbol on the display device 41 and the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of support). It is determined that the game control device 100 has determined not to adopt the support number corresponding to the new support hit when it is different from the support number based on the variation number command. Then, when it is determined that the game control device 100 does not adopt the support number corresponding to the new support hit, as a result of the support hit game, the symbol designated by the decorative special figure command (the new support hit). The out-of-order symbol may be stopped and displayed instead of the corresponding symbol per support).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the support per support derived during the chance mode (during normal power support) is the support per A, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, A per support may be derived during the chance mode, B per support may be derived during the chance mode, and C per support may be derived during the chance mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern per support selected when the result is "per support" is the SP reach among the variation patterns selected when the result is "big hit" or "missing". Is the same as the fluctuation pattern in which. That is, SP reach is generated in the support hit game. Further, in the present embodiment, if the result is a special figure variation display game other than "per support" and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is a variation pattern in which SP reach occurs, the special figure variation display game is used. It is possible to execute special effects (described later) such as battle effects even while the figure variation display game is being executed.
It should be noted that special effects such as battle effects (described later) may be executed even during execution of the special figure variation display game in which SP reach does not occur. In addition, special effects such as battle effects (described later) may be dedicated to the support hit game, and may not be executed during the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "big hit" or "missing". ..

In addition, the fluctuation pattern per support may be the same as the fluctuation pattern in which SP reach does not occur among the fluctuation patterns selected when the result is "big hit" or "missing", or is dedicated to the game per support. It may be a fluctuation pattern of.
For example, when not in the chance mode, a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the support hit game is selected, and when in the chance mode, a fluctuation pattern that is also used as a special figure fluctuation display game other than the support hit game (for example, the result is Of the fluctuation patterns selected when "big hit" or "missing" occurs, the fluctuation pattern in which SP reach occurs) is selected so that the dedicated fluctuation pattern has a longer fluctuation time than the dual-purpose fluctuation pattern. May be set as a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the fluctuation time of the game per support executed when not in chance mode is longer than the fluctuation time of the game per support executed when in chance mode, so that it is executed when not in chance mode. During the fluctuation time of the game per support, it is possible to reliably execute the mode selection and effect explanation related to the chance mode (third specific game state ST13), and the effect (fanfare effect) executed at the start of the chance mode. Etc.) can be connected.

Alternatively, the stop display time of the game per support may be longer than the stop display time of the special figure variation display game other than the game per support. As a result, during the stop display time of the game per support, it is possible to reliably execute the mode selection and the effect explanation related to the chance mode, so that the effect (fanfare effect, etc.) executed at the start of the chance mode Can have a connection.

Alternatively, as the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game after shifting to the chance mode, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time may be selected. Specifically, for example, when the result of the first special figure fluctuation display game is "missing" after shifting to the chance mode, the result is "missing" as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game. Among the fluctuation patterns selected in the case, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time, or a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the first special figure fluctuation display game may be selected by shifting to the chance mode. As a result, at the start of the chance mode, it is possible to reliably execute the mode selection, the effect explanation, and the like related to the chance mode. Further, as a result, it becomes possible to store the second start memory by the time when the chance mode is set and the first special figure variation display game is completed. Since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variable display game with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, the chance mode is set and the first special figure variable display game ends. By generating the second start memory by the time, it becomes possible to execute the main variation (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first special figure variation display game, and the game is advantageous to the player. Can proceed.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 14 performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instruction from the game control device 100 that forms the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the legitimacy determination) that is not subject to the legitimacy determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power of the gaming machine is supplied. Wait for it to be blocked.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is any. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when a power failure has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is given to the read-write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step). X11), output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer. A process (step X14) of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, the RAM error flag is set (step X15). Here, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y), the power failure inspection in the RWM. It is determined whether the value of the area 2 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), the checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of are matched (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), the RAM error flag is cleared (step X20) because there is no abnormality in the RAM, and the process proceeds to step X21.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), the step. Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21). Then, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the effect control board (effect control) issues a command for notifying the game control device 100 that the game control device 100 is abnormal. It is transmitted to the device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the main abnormality error notification command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, if the power of the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed, the operation of the gaming control device 100 is stopped, so the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). After that, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

Further, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM error flag is set (step X27). Then, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), the probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. Based on receiving the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and the speakers 19a and 19b. Notifies that the probability setting value is being changed by outputting voice from the user.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. After that, the processes of steps X29 and X30 are performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (Tep X22; N and step X23). In N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, when the setting key switch 152 is not in the ON state (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step X43; N), that is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step X41 and the power failure occurs. Performs processing when it recovers normally.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step X43; Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

When the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), the probability setting checking flag is set (step X36). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X37). Based on receiving the command during the probability setting confirmation, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and speakers 19a and 19b. Notifies that the probability setting value is being confirmed by outputting the voice by.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 msec or more, the value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process in the probability setting value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information editing of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, when the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. NS. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, since it is necessary to output a security signal for at least 50 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on), but the state read in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) (current state). Judge based on. When it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and if no power failure has occurred (step X34; N), step X33 is performed. Return, and if a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting changing flag is set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 12 and 13) after the power failure is restored. It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for disabling interrupts (step X38) is performed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms) from the process of enabling interrupts (step X32) to the process of disabling interrupts (steps X38 and X55). .. In the timer interrupt process, the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability set value, is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). Based on receiving the notification end command, the effect control device 300 ends the execution notification (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed). ..

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Performs a power failure recovery process (step X41) that saves an initial value at the time of power failure recovery in an area to be initialized (for example, a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring). The probability setting checking flag is cleared in this step X41.
After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of model designation commands, probability setting information commands, special figure 1 hold number commands, special figure 2 hold number commands, probability information commands, effect count information commands, screen designation commands, and the like. Send a command. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress, the command is waiting for a customer. Send the command of the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted depending on the model.

On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability set value (work area (1 byte area of the probability set value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and accessory ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in this step X44. In step X44, the stack area and the unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, and a RAM initialization command (waiting for customers). Along with displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command, a support count information command, etc., which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with normal power support, are also transmitted.

Next, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the hit symbol of the special figure is determined. After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of a symbol random number and a random number for determining the hit of a normal figure (hit random number) (step X48), an interrupt is permitted (step X49). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the special symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the special symbol random number and hit random number are the same as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the periodic CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing). Further, in the special symbol random number and the hit random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the special symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.
In this embodiment, since a random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the normal figure is not provided, there is only one type of hit symbol of the normal figure, but a hit symbol random number is provided and the hit symbol of the normal figure is provided. May be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number update process in step X50, a process for disabling interrupts (step X51) is performed, and a performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process is performed. Return to (step X50). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X50) (step X49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step X50, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value is set in both cases. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. There is an advantage that it is converted.

On the other hand, when a power failure occurs (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X61). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.
Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, in the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 14 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and when the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y). , The probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are based on the output data set in various processes. , Lever solenoid 38f, Fuden solenoid 37c) and other actuators are subjected to output processing (step X105) for driving control and the like. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step X106), the random number update process 1 (step X107), and the random number update process 2 (step X108) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. In the random number update process 1 (step X107), the initial value (start value) of the special symbol random number and the hit random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process, is updated. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, setting the prize ball, the front frame and the glass The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109) for opening the frame and monitoring errors such as illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) in the first special variable winning device 38 is The number of game balls that have flowed into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 38a) is exceeded. If an abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. Then, when an abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the special figure game process (step X112) for processing the special figure variation display game and the normal figure game process (step) for performing the process related to the normal figure variation display game. X114) is performed, and a segment LED editing process (step X115) is performed, which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives the segment LED for displaying the display of the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. conduct.

Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X116) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and a process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. Radio fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) that checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine if there is any abnormality, and determines whether abnormal discharge has occurred. Perform the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119). Further, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display device 153 are performed, and timer interrupt processing is completed. do.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and special features based on the winning are obtained. Figure Fluctuation display A game result pre-judgment is performed to predetermine a game result based on a prize at a stage before the start of the game.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, monitoring of detection of a game ball by the upper special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and lower in the second special variable winning device 39 are provided. A process of monitoring the detection of a game ball on the grand prize opening switch 39a is performed. Then, a specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the detection of the game ball in the specific area 38h is performed (step A3).

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A4). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A5). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A5; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, refer to it in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be used is set in the register (step A6), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A7). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A8).

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change is in progress. A special figure normal process (step A9) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A10) is performed.

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A11) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A12).
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged and the jackpot end process are performed. The large winning opening residual ball processing (step A14) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A15) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit middle processing. The small hit fanfare process (step A16) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A17) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. ..
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end processing The small hit remaining ball processing (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A19) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A20), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A21) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. .. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A22), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A23) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. .. After that, the lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed to end the special figure game process. On the other hand, in step A5, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A5; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A20, and the subsequent processing is performed. conduct.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the first start port (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to perform the first step. 1 It is determined whether or not there is a prize in the starting port (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the first starting port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of holding by the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A109), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the second starting port. Determine (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the ordinary variation. When it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning of the game ball can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to the process of A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step A113, if it is determined that the electric power fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), the special feature. Figure The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
FIG. 17 shows a hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process.
In this hard random number acquisition process, first, among the first starting port (first starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), the non-winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set ( Step A121), among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124). ..

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends.
If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first starting port (first starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and a hard random number is acquired. End the process.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is transmitted to the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step A135; Y). Step A136), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition process is stored in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (step A139).

Next, the special symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the special symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).
Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), the effect command setting process (step A148) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting area of the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and is the starting right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of memories. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. It is stored, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 19, first, a jackpot determination process (step A154) for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a special symbol random number check table for big hit corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A156), and a step of common processing for the special figure start port switch is performed. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared in A140 is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A168.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), the small hit determination process (step A159) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value. conduct. Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a special symbol random number check table for small hits is set (step A161), and the special symbol start port switch common processing step A140 is prepared. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A168.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the support hit determination process (step A163) of determining whether or not the jackpot random value is a support hit depending on whether or not it matches the support hit determination value. I do. Then, when the determination result is not a support hit (step A164; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A167), and the process proceeds to the process of step A168.
When the determination result is per support (step A164; Y), a special symbol random number check table for per support is set (step A165), and the special symbol start port switch common processing step A140 is prepared. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A166), and the process proceeds to step A168.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A169). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A170) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A171).
After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A172), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A173), the special figure reservation information determination process is completed. The special figure information setting process in step A170 and the variation pattern setting process in step A171 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment such as) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start winning prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has started (step A309), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (step A309). A309; N) sets the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and the effect command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316), and the special figure normal processing is ended. That is, when the special figure variation display game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, the customer waiting demo command that forms the standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A309 (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing the processes of steps A310 to A312.

Further, in step A301, when the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step A301; N), the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step A302). Next, the effect command setting process (step A303) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is performed, and the special figure normal process is completed.
If the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0" in step A305 (step A305; N), a decorative special figure reserved number command corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 1 is prepared (step A306). Next, the effect command setting process (step A307) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A308) is performed, and the special figure normal process is completed.

In this way, by checking the number of special figures 2 held before checking the number of special figures 1 held, if the number of special figures 2 held is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation display based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321), and the first step is made. 1 The jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit is set with the deviation information and the jackpot information, and whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small hit is determined. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the missed hit flag and the small hit information for the small hit flag is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A324) is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A325). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. Here, 100 ms) is set (step A333). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is completed.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 21A is performed in the second start. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 21B, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the first step is made. 2 The jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit is set with the deviation information and the jackpot information, and whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a small hit is determined. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed hit flag and the small hit information for the small hit flag is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed, and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Here, 100 ms) is set (step A353). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special figure variation display game execution control means for executing the special figure variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means. Further, the special figure variation display game execution control means executes the first special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory, and executes the first special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory. The figure variation display game will be executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 22A shows a jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area, and the support hit flag 1 area (step A361). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step A362), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (for the number of hold 1). Step A363). It should be noted that the hold number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

After that, a jackpot determination process (step A364) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A364) is a jackpot (step A365; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A361 (step A366). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A367) for determining the above is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is a small hit (step A368; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A361. Then (step A369), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is not a small hit (step A368; N), it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (step A370).

In the high probability state (step A370; Y), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area, and the support hit flag 1 area. On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (step A370; N), the support hit determination process (step) of determining whether or not the acquired jackpot random value is a support hit depending on whether or not it matches the support hit determination value. A371) is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A371) is a support hit (step A372; Y), the support hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A361 is overwritten and saved. Then (step A373), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A371) is not the support hit (step A372; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area, and the support hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 22B shows a jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit flag 2 area (step A381). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step A382), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (for the number of hold 1). Step A383). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

After that, a jackpot determination process (step A384) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A384) is a jackpot (step A385; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A381 (step A386). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step A384) is not a big hit (step A385; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A387) for determining the above is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is a small hit (step A388; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A381. Then (step A389), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is not a small hit (step A388; N), it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (step A390).

In the high probability state (step A390; Y), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit flag 2 area. On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (step A390; N), the support hit determination process (step) of determining whether or not the acquired jackpot random value is a support hit depending on whether or not it matches the support hit determination value. A391) is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A391) is the support hit (step A392; Y), the support hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A381 is overwritten with the support hit information and saved. Then (step A393), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A391) is not the support hit (step A392; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23A shows the jackpot determination process (steps A364 and A384) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, the upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability setting value, and the upper limit judgment value in the high probability state and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. Here, the corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value.
The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value, the jackpot judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A402), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A403). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value is different depending on the probability setting value or the probability state. Is also good. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. To set. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A403; Y), that is, when it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A408), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed. If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A403; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step A404). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A404; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A405), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A407). ). If the probability is not high (step A404; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A406), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A407). .. The upper limit determination value set here is acquired by referring to the upper limit determination value table set in step A401 described above.

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A407; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A408), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A407; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A409), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 23B shows the small hit determination process (steps A367 and A387) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A411). The small hit upper limit determination value is provided for each probability set value. Moreover, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether or not it is in a high probability state. In addition, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value in the same probability set value do not overlap. The range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value between different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A412). When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A412; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A414), and the small hit determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A412; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A413).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A413; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A414), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A413; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A415), and the small hit determination process is completed. do.

[Support hit judgment processing]
FIG. 24 shows the support hit determination process (steps A371 and A391) in the above-mentioned jackpot flag 1 setting process and jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this support hit determination process, first, the upper limit determination value table per support corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A421). The upper limit judgment value table per support is provided for each probability set value.

The probability of winning the lottery per support may be different or the same for each probability set value. When different for each probability set value, for example, the lower the probability set value, the easier it is to win the lottery per support (that is, setting 1 is the easiest to win and setting 6 is the most difficult to win). Is good, and vice versa. In addition, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different or the same for each jackpot probability state. When differentiating each jackpot probability state, for example, the low probability state (normal probability state) may be easier to win than the high probability state, or vice versa. .. In addition, it may be possible to win only when the probability is low. Further, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
Further, the range of the big hit judgment value, the range of the small hit judgment value, and the range of the support hit judgment value in the same probability set value are not overlapped. The range of the big hit judgment value, the range of the small hit judgment value, and the range of the support hit judgment value between different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

In addition, "per support" means that the big hit random number matches the judgment value per support. The support hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the support lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the support hit judgment value, and is the upper limit value of the support hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a support hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table per support corresponding to the probability set value, the support hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit determination value of the support hit determination value is set (step A422), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support lower limit determination value (step A423). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value per support is the same regardless of the probability setting value, but the lower limit judgment value per support may be different depending on the probability setting value. In this case, as in the case of the upper limit judgment value per support, the lower limit judgment value table per support in which the lower limit judgment value per support is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table per support and the lower limit judgment value table per support may be collectively used as the judgment value table per support.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value per support (step A423; Y), that is, when it is not a support hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A428), and the support hit determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for each support has been missed. Further, when the value of the target jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value per support (step A423; N), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value per support (step A427). The upper limit determination value per support set here is acquired by referring to the upper limit determination value table per support set in step A421 described above.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value per support (step A427; Y), that is, when it is not a support hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A428), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. Further, when the value of the target jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value per support (step A427; N), that is, when it is a support hit, the support hit is set as the determination result (step A429), and the support hit determination process is performed. To finish.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 25 shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 1 special symbol random number storage area (number of holds). Load the special symbol random number from (for 1) (step A432). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A434). The jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display 51) and the stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the time reduction determination data is obtained. It is saved in the area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). This information is for setting a variation pattern scenario which is information on the execution mode of the special gaming state, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state, and the transition of the variation selection table group after the end of the special gaming state. .. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).

On the other hand, when the big hit 1 flag is not a big hit (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440), and when it is a small hit (step A440; Y), a special figure 1 The special symbol random number is loaded from the special symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step A441). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A442), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A443). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444), the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A445), and the stop symbol pattern is created. Prepare the corresponding decorative special drawing command (step A455).

Further, when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A446), and when it is a support hit (step A446; Y), a special figure is provided. 1 The special symbol random number is loaded from the special symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A447). Next, the symbol table per special figure 1 support is set (step A448), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A449). By this process, the type per support is selected.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A450), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step A450). Step A451), the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A452), and the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).
If the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A446; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A453), and the disengagement stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Save to (step A454) and prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A455). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A456), and the effect command setting process (step A457) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A458), and the special symbol 1 special symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A459). Special figure 1 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 26 shows a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2.
In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A471), and if it is a big hit (step A471; Y), the special figure 2 special symbol random number storage area (number of pending numbers). Load the special symbol random number from (for 1) (step A472). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A473), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A474). The jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A475), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A476). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and the stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A477), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the time reduction determination data is obtained. It is saved in the area (step A478), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A479). This information is for setting a variation pattern scenario which is information on the execution mode of the special gaming state, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state, and the transition of the variation selection table group after the end of the special gaming state. .. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A471; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480), and when it is a small hit (step A480; Y), a special figure 2 The special symbol random number is loaded from the special symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step A481). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step A482), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A483). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A484), the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A485), and the stop symbol pattern is created. Prepare the corresponding decorative special drawing command (step A495).

Further, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A486), and when it is a support hit (step A486; Y), a special figure is provided. 2 The special symbol random number is loaded from the special symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A487). Next, the symbol table per special figure 2 support is set (step A488), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A489). By this process, the type per support is selected.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A490), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step A490). Step A491), the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A492), and the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).
If the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (step A486; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A493), and the detached stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Save to (step A494) and prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A495). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A496), and the effect command setting process (step A497) is performed. This decorative special drawing command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A498), and the special symbol 2 special symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A499). Special figure 2 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.
In this way, when setting the stop symbol for each result, the number of types of random numbers required can be reduced by using a common special symbol random number regardless of the result, and the specifications of the gaming machine and the program can be simplified. It is possible to reduce the burden of control.

[Special figure information setting process]
FIG. 27 shows the special figure information setting process (steps A170, A324, A344) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 variation start process.
First, the variable group selection pointer table is set (step A461), and the game state, the number of holds, the stopped symbol pattern number, the remaining number of supports, and the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the currently set variable selection table group are acquired. (Step A462).
Then, the acquired variable group selection pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A465), and the special figure information setting process is completed.

In the variation pattern selection process (steps A171, A326, A346) performed after the special figure information setting process, the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table selected based on the variation group selection pointer acquired here.
That is, the variation pattern is selected based on the game state, the number of holds, the stop symbol pattern number, the number of remaining supports, and the currently set variation selection table group. By selecting the fluctuation pattern in consideration of such factors, it is possible to execute various effects.

For example, the variation selection table group selected according to the variation pattern scenario as shown in FIG. 9 includes different variation pattern tables corresponding to the results (big hit, small hit, support hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game. Is included, and a variation pattern table according to the result is selected from the currently set variation selection table group.
This makes it possible to select different fluctuation patterns for each of a big hit, a small hit, a support hit, or a miss. For example, the variation pattern table for per support includes only variation patterns including the reach state. Fluctuation patterns that perform the same reach effect may also be included in the variation pattern table selected for jackpot, small hit, and miss, but the results are shown for each of the jackpot, small hit, support hit, and miss. The fluctuation time value is different in order to make the action when deriving different, and the fluctuation pattern of each fluctuation pattern table is a different fluctuation pattern.

Further, even in the same gaming state, it is possible to select different fluctuation patterns depending on the set fluctuation selection table group.
For example, in the chance mode B and the chance mode D shown in FIG. 9A, both are the third specific game state ST13 in which the number of times of support is 100, but the variable selection table group from the 20th to the 100th is different. Therefore, it is possible to perform different effects by making the tendency of the fluctuation pattern selected for each different.

Further, even if the number of times of support is the same 100 times, it is possible to make the execution mode of the effect different by making the fluctuation pattern different depending on the difference in the set fluctuation selection table group. For example, whether or not to select a variation pattern including a time value for executing an effect of notifying the number of supports is different depending on the variation selection table group, and whether or not to notify the number of supports is selected according to the set variation selection table group. Can be done.

Further, in the case of the third specific gaming state ST13, it is possible to select a variation pattern in consideration of the remaining number of times of support. For example, in the final game in the third specific game state ST13, a variation pattern including a time value for displaying a result image notifying the result of the game in the third specific game state ST13 is selected. However, the fluctuation pattern is selected in consideration of the result of the final game, and if the result is out of order, the fluctuation pattern including the time value for displaying the result image is selected, but the result is Since the result image is not displayed in the case of a big hit, a small hit, or a support hit, a fluctuation pattern that does not include the time value for displaying the result image is selected.
Further, when the third specific game state ST13 starts or reaches a predetermined number of times, it is possible to select a specific variation pattern at an arbitrary time such as a predetermined number of times before the end.

Further, by making it possible to select a fluctuation pattern in consideration of the game state, for example, it is possible to select a different fluctuation pattern depending on whether the occurrence of the support hit is the normal game state ST14 or the third specific game state ST13. Become.
As a result, when the support hit is derived in the normal game state ST14 and the third specific game state ST13 starts, a variation pattern including a time value for executing the effect peculiar to the start is selected, and the third specific game state ST13 is specified. When the support hit is derived and the support number is reset in the game state ST13, it is possible to select a variation pattern including a time value for executing an effect peculiar to the reset.

In this way, by making it possible to select the fluctuation pattern in consideration of various factors in the game control device 100, the fluctuation time can be changed according to the situation, and various effects can be executed. Although it is possible to select the effect with the effect control device 300, it is necessary to follow the variation time selected by the game control device 100 for the fluctuation time, and it is difficult to secure the time peculiar to the effect to be executed as described above. Is.

From the above, the game is controlled by the gaming machine capable of executing the game based on the establishment of the starting condition and generating a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value when the result of the game becomes a special result. The game control means includes a game control means (game control device 100) and a normal variation winning device 37 in which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball, and the game control means changes normally between the normal game state and the normal game state. A specific game state in which it is easy to win a prize in the winning device 37 and a special game state can be generated, and when the result of the game is a predetermined result among the special results, after the special game state is generated. When a specific game state can be generated and the result of the game is a specific result different from the special result, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state, and the result of the game is special. The result, the specific result, or the out-of-order result is determined by one first lottery random number (big hit random number), and before the game is executed, the result of the game is a special result and a specific result. And, it is possible to determine which of the two results is obtained.
Therefore, the lottery can be performed by one first lottery random number, the control of the lottery can be simplified, and the burden of control can be reduced.

The special results include a first special result (big hit) with the operation of the condition device and a second special result (small hit) without the operation of the condition device, and the game control means determines the result of the game. The first special result, the second special result, the specific result, or the out-of-order result is determined by one first lottery random number.
Therefore, the lottery can be performed by one first lottery random number, the control of the lottery can be simplified, and the burden of control can be reduced.

Further, the first special result, the second special result and the specific result each include a plurality of types of results, and in the game control means, the lottery result by the first lottery random number is the first special result, the second special result or the specific result. If it is a result, the type of the first special result, the second special result, or the specific result is determined by using one second lottery random number (special symbol symbol random number).
Therefore, even if the results are different, the lottery control can be simplified and the burden of control can be reduced by using the common second lottery random number.

Further, the game control means includes a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern which is an execution mode of the game, and a variation pattern scenario in which information regarding the transition of the variation pattern table in the specific game state is defined, and the specific game is provided. It is configured to set the variation pattern table defined in the variation pattern scenario based on the condition satisfying the predetermined condition in the state, and when the specific result is derived, the variation pattern used in the specific gaming state based on the specific result. The scenario will be selected based on the type of the specific result selected by the second lottery random number.
Therefore, the transition of the fluctuation pattern in the specific game state can also be selected by the second lottery random number, and the lottery control can be simplified and the burden of control can be reduced.
In addition, the transition of the fluctuation pattern in the specific game state can be selected from a plurality of patterns, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, a game control that controls a game in a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a start condition and a special game state is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The game control means is provided with means and a normal variable winning device 37 in which the starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball, and the game control means is easier to win in the normal game state and the normal variable winning device 37 than in the normal game state. A specific game state can be generated, and when the result of the game is one of a specific result consisting of a plurality of types, a specific game state can be generated, and a variation pattern which is an execution mode of the game. A variation pattern table for selecting a specific game state and a variation pattern scenario in which information regarding the transition of the variation pattern table in the specific game state is defined, and when a specific result is derived, the specific game state based on the specific result is provided. The variation pattern scenario to be used in is selected based on the type of the specific result.
Therefore, the transition of the fluctuation pattern in the specific game state can be selected from a plurality of patterns, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
FIG. 28 shows a special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment.
In this special symbol changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is prepared (step A601), and an effect command setting process (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is the support hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop display time setting means for setting a stop display time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, “2” related to the special figure display processing is set as the processing number (step A605), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606). Further, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the special symbol 2) is saved. (OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the number of symbol confirmations related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for output to the external information terminal is set in the signal control timer area. Initial value of the control timer. (For example, 256 ms) is saved (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A611), the processing during the special figure change is completed.

[Processing during special figure display]
29 and 30 show a special figure display process (step A11) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure display processing, first, the support hit flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the support hit flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A701). , RWM clears the support per flag 1 area and the support per flag 2 area (step A702).
Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A703), and the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM is loaded. And the small hit flag 2 area is cleared (step A704).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A705), and the jackpot flag 1 area and the jackpot flag of the RWM are loaded. Clear two regions (step A706). Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A707), and if it is a jackpot (step A707; Y), it relates to the start of the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the second special figure variation display game. Save the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, the special symbol 2 hit signal ON) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A710), and round. The number upper limit value table is set (step A711).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A707; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A708), and when it is a jackpot (step A708; Y), the first special feature. The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, the special symbol 1 per unit signal ON) regarding the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) of the figure variation display game is set to RWM. Save in the test signal output data area (step A709) and set the round number upper limit table (step A711).

Next, the round number upper limit value (“10”, “7” or “2” in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (step A712). ). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A713).

Next, the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process (step A715) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A717) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A718), and the effect command setting process (step). A719) is performed. This fanfare command forms the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A720). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A720, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1), and the big hit without a big hit (so-called sudden big hit, etc. When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is turned ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is turned OFF otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball, and is OFF when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal map fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set (step A721), and the set jackpot fanfare time is set. Save to the special figure game processing timer area (step A722). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A723). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area of the large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A724), and the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is set. The fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag is saved (step A725). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A726) for shifting to the fanfare / interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, based on the result of the game control device 100 being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning. It serves as a special game state generating means for generating a special game state that converts the device 39 into an open state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A708; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A727), and when it is a small hit (step A727; Y), The test signal (for example, turning on the special symbol 2 small hit signal) regarding the start of the small hit (special figure 2 small hit) of the second special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A730). , The time reduction variation number update process is performed (step A731).
If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A728), and if it is a small hit (step A728; Y). Saves the test signal (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) regarding the start of the small hit (special figure 1 small hit) of the first special figure variation display game in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step). A729), the time reduction variation number update process is performed (step A731).

Next, the effect mode information check process (step A732) relating to the setting of the effect mode is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A733).
When the probability of the special figure is not high (step A733; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area, prepared (step A734), and the effect command setting process (step A735) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A736), an effect command setting process (step A737) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A738. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Further, when the probability of the special figure is high (step A733; Y), the process proceeds to step A738. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of a small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the person aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A738), and the small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step) for shifting to the small hit fanfare middle process. A739) is performed to end the processing during display of the special figure.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A728; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A740). In the case of hitting the support (step A740; Y), the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, and the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for shifting to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure is performed. Ends the process being displayed.
When the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (step A740; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A741). In the case of hitting the support (step A741; Y), the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, and the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for shifting to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure is performed. Ends the process being displayed.

If the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A741; N), the time reduction variation number update process (step A744) is performed. Then, the effect mode information check process (step A745) related to the setting of the effect mode is performed, the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A746), and the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation are used. Is determined (step A747). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.
If the remaining rotation speeds for the effect and the remaining rotation speeds for switching preparation do not match (step A747; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process (step A750) for shifting to the special figure normal processing is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.

On the other hand, when the remaining rotation speed of the effect and the remaining rotation speed of the switching preparation match (step A747; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A748), and the effect command setting process (step A749) is performed. Figure The special figure normal process transition setting process (step A750) for shifting to the normal process is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several times before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[Time reduction fluctuation count update processing]
FIG. 31 shows the time reduction fluctuation number update process (steps A731 and A744) in the above-mentioned special figure display process. In this time reduction fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal power supply is being supported (step A751). Then, when the normal electric power support is not in progress (step A751; N), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the normal electric power support is in progress (step A751; Y), the number of time reduction fluctuations is updated by -1 (step A752), and it is determined whether the number of time reduction fluctuations has become "0" (step A753). ..

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A753; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step A753; Y), the signal related to the end of the time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A754). Next, a signal related to the end of the time reduction (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off. Is OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A755).

Next, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A756), the normal figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A757), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag (step A758). Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A759), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56a) is turned on. In order to turn off the lights, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A760), and the time reduction variation number update process is completed.

[Production mode information check processing]
FIG. 32 shows the effect mode information check process (steps A732 and A745) in the above-mentioned special figure display process. In this effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed, and the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state, for example. ..

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step A771; N), the remaining number of rotations of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). , It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is "0" (step A773). If the remaining rotation speed of the effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process ends. Further, when the remaining rotation speed of the effect becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). , Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (step A775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation speed in the RWM is acquired. Save to the area (step A777), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save to the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A778). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the probability state has not changed, the effect mode information check process ends.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A782), and the effect is produced. The command setting process (step A782) is performed.
Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A783), and the effect command setting process (step A784) is performed.
Next, the time reduction fluctuation number command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step A785), and the effect command setting process (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A787), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process ends. Further, in the case of the left-handed mode (step A787; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), the effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is completed. .. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching from before the specified rotation speed of the effect mode switching. By managing the effect mode with the game control device 100 in this way, it is possible to control, for example, to generate a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
The transition of the variation selection table group according to the variation pattern scenario described above may also be controlled by this effect mode information check process, or may be controlled by another equivalent process.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 33 shows the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A726) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing. In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A792).

Next, the signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 big hit signal is ON (output by big hit + small hit) and 4 big hit signals are ON (output by big hit)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), high probability & time saving end signal (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal OFF, special symbol 2 Save the fluctuation time shortened state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal OFF) in the test signal output data area. (Step A794). After that, clear the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state (step A795), save the number without time reduction in the game state display number area (step A796), and set the normal game mode flag. Save the low probability & no time saving flag in the area (step A797).

Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability is high in order to turn off the game state display LED (for example, the third game state display unit 56c) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The notification flag area is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the time saving state is displayed. Clear the time reduction fluctuation frequency area for managing the number of games (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are terminated, and the normal-probability state and the normal state are set.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the remaining effect rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the non-updated code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). .. Then, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56a) is turned on. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is temporarily cleared when the special game state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 34 shows a small hit fanfare processing transition setting process (step A739) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing. In this small hit fanfare intermediate processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare intermediate processing is set as the processing number (step A811), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A812).
Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit (for example, one big hit signal is turned on (output as a big hit + a small hit)). ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A814).

Next, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A815), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the illegal monitoring period flag area of the large winning opening (step A816).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A817), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56a) is turned on. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A818), and the small hit fanfare processing transition setting process is completed.

[Support operation setting process]
FIG. 35 shows a support operation setting process (step A742) in the above-mentioned special figure display process. In this support operation setting process, first, the initial value corresponding to the time reduction determination data is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number region (step A821), and the signal related to the start of the time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is external information. Save to the output data area (step A822). That is, when the support hit symbol stops, only the signal related to the start of the time reduction (for example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on) is output as an external information signal.
Next, signals related to the start of time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is ON, and normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is ON. Is ON, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A823).

Next, the number with the time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A824), the normal figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the normal figure gate mode flag area (step A825), and the probability state flag is maintained. In order to reduce the time required, a special figure time saving flag is synthesized in the special figure game mode flag area (step A826).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A827), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56a) is turned on. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A828). Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A829), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A830). In step A829, the same processing as the setting in the jackpot end processing (step A904) is performed. By acquiring the address of the corresponding table based on the effect mode transition information, the variation pattern scenario which is the information related to the migration of the variation selection table group is also acquired.
That is, in the case of hitting the support, the stop symbol which is the type of the support is selected by the special symbol random number, and the effect mode transition information is selected based on the stop symbol, and the variation pattern scenario is selected. Become.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for managing the effect mode and managing the variation selection table group in the game control device 100, first, as a process of saving the effect mode set after the end of the special figure variation display game that has become a support. The effect mode number of is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A831). Furthermore, the special figure variation display game that hits the support is acquired, and the remaining rotation speed of the production mode set after the end of the game is acquired and saved in the remaining rotation speed area of the production (step A832), and the special figure that hits the support. The next mode transition information of the effect mode set after the end of the variable display game is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A833). Based on the information saved here, the production mode and the variation selection table group will shift based on executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special figure variation display game that has become a support. ..

After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A834), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A835), and the effect command setting process (step A836) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands in which information on the production mode is further included in any of "high probability / time saving" and "low probability / time saving". Although not used in this process, there are other commands such as "high probability / no time saving" and "low probability / no time saving" that further include information on the production mode.
Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A837), the effect command setting process (step A838) is performed, and the time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is executed. The preparation (step A839) is performed, and the effect command setting process (step A840) is performed.
Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A841), the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A842), and the support operation setting process is completed.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process (steps A7343 and A750) in the above-mentioned special figure display process. In this special figure normal processing transition setting process, first, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A851), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A852). ..
Next, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A853), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A854), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process is completed. ..

[Big hit end processing]
FIG. 37 shows a jackpot end process (step A15) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment.
In this jackpot end process, first, the probability fluctuation determination data set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state is set when the probability fluctuation state becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data has a high probability (step A901).
If the data is not high-probability data (step A901; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A902), and if the data is high-probability data (step A901; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A903). .. Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A904), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A905). The effect mode transition information also includes a variation pattern scenario, which is information related to the migration of the variation selection table group.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for managing the effect mode and managing the variation selection table group in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired. And save it in the production mode number area (step A906). Further, the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A907), and the mode shifts to the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A908). Based on the information saved here, the effect mode and the variation selection table group are shifted based on executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game state.

After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A909), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A910), and the effect command setting process (step A911) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands including the effect mode information in any of "high probability / time saving", "high probability / no time saving", and "low probability / time saving". .. Although not used in this process, there are other commands that include information on the production mode in "Low probability, no time saving".
Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A912), and the effect command setting process (step A913) is performed.
Next, the time reduction fluctuation number command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step A914), and the effect command setting process (step A915) is performed.

Next, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing (step A916), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A917).
After that, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, turning off the jackpot 1 signal, turning off the jackpot 3 signal, and turning off the jackpot 4 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A918), and the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, , The condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A919). Subsequently, the information in the probability fluctuation determination data area is cleared (step A920), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds is cleared (step A921), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A922). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A923), the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A924), and the jackpot end process is completed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 38A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of the time saving (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A931). Since the signal related to the start of the time reduction is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form. Next, signals related to the start of low probability & time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time is ON. The shortened state signal is turned ON, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

Next, the number with the time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A933), the normal figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A934), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Save the special figure low probability & time saving flag (step A935). After that, the initial value (for example, 100) of the time reduction fluctuation number is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number region (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. Further, by setting the time saving fluctuation number initial value (for example, 100 times) in the time saving fluctuation number region, the time saving state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 38 (b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A903) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to a high probability start (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A941). Since the signal regarding the start with high probability is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form. Next, signals related to the start of high probability & time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is ON, special symbol 2 variation time is shortened. Save the state signal ON, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal ON, the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step A942). ).

Next, the number with the time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A943), the normal figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A944), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Save the special figure high probability & time saving flag (step A945). After that, the time reduction fluctuation frequency region is cleared (step A946), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state, and the time is shortened until the next special result mode is derived. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.
That is, after the end of the special game state, the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (time saving state) in which the period in which the normal variable winning device 37 is opened is extended for a predetermined period. It serves as a state generation control means.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 39 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 39, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the initial setting of the CPU is performed (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the cross key 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the cross key 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the cross key 29, the effect content is changed. ..

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, the reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes the command from the game control device 100 and responds to it is performed, and the effect display editing process (step C13) that edits the setting and drawing command for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, the sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and the LED control of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 including the display board 350 are performed. The WDT is cleared by performing the decoration control process (step C18), the movable body control process (step C19) that controls the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44, and the board effect setting process (step C20) that controls the effect. The process returns to the process (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 40 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is non-zero (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of command receptions is completed is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. When it is determined that the copying of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 41 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in the step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is not the correct combination (step C232; N, step C233; N). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C237, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when the MODE determines that the range of the symbol-based command is within the range (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that are established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the one-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be displayed. It is a production such as performing a production display on. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance of the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 when the start prize is won. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special figure variable display game.

Next, a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 42, in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decoration game display unit 81 for displaying the first decoration game among the decoration special figure variation display games is provided. The first decorative game display unit 81 displays the decorative special figure variable display game by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information.

At the lower right of the display area of the display device 41, a second decoration game display unit 82 for displaying the second decoration game among the decoration special figure variation display games is provided. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display unit 82 has identification information in each area of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, similarly to the first decoration game displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81. Is displayed in a variable manner, then stopped and the result is displayed. The second decorative game display unit 82 displays identification information (small symbol) that is relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbol) displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81.

Further, in the lower center of the display area of the display device 41, a standby storage display unit 83 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided.
The standby memory display unit 83 has a decorative feature corresponding to a start memory (first start memory or second start memory) that is the execution right of one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Figure The start memory display is displayed. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 has a one-to-one correspondence with the start memory that is the execution right of the one game, and the leftmost decorative special figure start memory display is stored first. Ornamental special figure corresponding to the start-up memory The start-up memory display is displayed side by side in the order of memory, and each time it is digested, it shifts to the left. In addition, the standby memory display unit 83 has a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (first start memory) which is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game, and an execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is also possible to display both the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (second start memory).
Further, the standby memory display unit 83 may suggest the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory. It is possible.

On the left side of the standby storage display unit 83, an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. At the start of the special figure variation display game, the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84. Further, the running memory display unit 84 suggests the result and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure variation display game currently being executed by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the running memory display unit 84. It is possible.
In the upper left portion of the display area of the display device 41, a first start memory number display unit 85a for displaying the first start memory number (special figure 1 hold number) and a second start memory number (special figure 2 hold number) are displayed. A second start storage number display unit 85b for displaying is provided.

42 and 43 show a case where a special figure variation display game in which the result is “per support” is executed. FIG. 42 is an example of the display on the display device 41, and FIG. 43 is an example of the timing chart.
When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t61), as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 43, the variable display ends in the display device 41 and the first The game result is stopped and displayed on the decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 is displayed. ) Disappears. In FIG. 42A, the first start memory number is 4 and the second start memory number is 0 during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state.

Further, in FIG. 42A, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is displayed in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the standby storage display unit 83 executes a hold change effect that suggests a look-ahead result. Here, the special figure variable display game corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is a special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "A per support". , It is suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display. That is, the number of times of support to be given is suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display.

Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. It is "346".
Further, here, since the game result is "missing", the first start memory number is 4, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t62). After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), in the display device 41, the transition effect (decorative special figure start memory at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83) The effect of shifting the display to the running storage display unit 84) is executed, and the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes. Here, since a plurality of decorative special figure start memory displays are displayed on the standby memory display unit 83, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed as an executing memory display due to the transition effect. At the same time as shifting to the unit 84, the decorative special figure start memory display other than the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 shifts to the left in the standby storage display unit 83.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t63), as shown in FIGS. 42 (b) and 43, the display device 41 has a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game. Fluctuation display starts. After that, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "per support", as shown in FIGS. 42 (c) and 43, the left variation display area and the right of the first decorative game display unit 81. The reach variation starts in a reach state in which the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the variation display area (t64).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42 (d) and 43, in the display device 41, a battle effect in which the ally character fights against the enemy character starts (t65). At the start of the battle effect, in order to secure a battle effect display unit for displaying the battle effect in the display area of the display device 41, the left variable display area of the first decorative game display unit 81 is the display area of the display device 41. The right-handed variable display area of the first decorative game display unit 81 moves to the right-handed end of the display area of the display device 41, and the visibility of the medium-variable display area is reduced to make it invisible. .. That is, the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area is lowered by the specific effect display. Further, the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84 are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (e), the result of the battle effect is notified. Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the result of the battle production is "draw". On the other hand, if the result of the special figure change display game being executed is "big hit", the result of the battle effect is "winning of the ally character", and the result of the special figure change display game being executed is "missing". If is, the result of the battle effect is "losing of the ally character".

Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (f), the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, rocking display) on the first decorative game display unit 81. As a result, the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area is restored. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t66), as shown in FIGS. 42 (g) and 43, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start corresponding to the first start memory). Memory display) disappears. Here, since the game result is "per support A", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the result mode of "per support A". It is "434".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 42 (g) and 43, when the stop display time starts (t66), the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number given this time is notified. Here, since the game result is "A per support" and the number of times of support corresponding to "A per support" is 20, the effect of notifying that the number of times of support given this time is 20 (for example, support). The effect of displaying "support 20 times" on the number display unit 86) is being executed. On the other hand, when the game result is "B per support", the number of times of support corresponding to "B per support" is 100 times, so for example, "100 times of support" is displayed on the support number display unit 86. The production is executed. Further, when the game result is "C per support", the number of times of support corresponding to "C per support" is 1000 times. Therefore, for example, the effect of displaying "1000 times of support" on the support number display unit 86 is produced. Will be executed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (g), when the stop display time starts (t66), the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84 reappear.

Here, since the game result is "per support", the first start memory number is 3, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and the decoration feature are displayed when the stop display time ends. The figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t67). When the fluctuation time starts (t67), the mode shifts to the chance mode as shown in FIG. 43. Specifically, in the case of the normal game state ST14, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game whose result is “support hit” ends (t67), the game shifts to the third specific game state ST13. Further, in the case of the first specific game state ST11, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game whose result is "support hit" ends (t67), the game shifts to the second specific game state ST12.

In the present embodiment, only the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the main fluctuation is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84, and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation is displayed. It is configured not to be displayed. Therefore, when the mode shifts to the chance mode (t67), the main variation is switched from the special figure 1 variation display game to the special figure 2 variation display game. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 42 (h) and 43, the display device 41 has the display device 41. The decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 disappears.
Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST14 or the first specific gaming state ST11, that is, when the player is not in the chance mode (during normal power support), the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 83 The decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory can be displayed on 84, but the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is hidden. Further, when the gaming state is the second specific gaming state ST12 or the third specific gaming state ST13, that is, in the chance mode (during normal power support), the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 83 The decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory can be displayed on 84, but the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is hidden.

When the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes in the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 42 (h).
When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t68), as shown in FIGS. 42 (i) and 43, the display device 41 has a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game. Fluctuation display starts.
When the variation display starts (t68), the remaining number of times of support is notified in the support number of times notification effect. Here, the number of times of support given this time is 20, and the chance mode (Public support) has started and the first game (first game) is being executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 42 (i). An effect of notifying that the remaining number of times of support is 19 (for example, an effect of displaying "19 times remaining" on the support number display unit 86) is executed.

Further, when the variable display starts (t68), the chance mode notification effect starts as shown in FIG. 43. Specifically, in the chance mode notification effect, first, an effect of notifying that the player is in the chance mode is executed, and then an effect of notifying that the player is in the chance mode is executed. During the chance mode (during Fuden support), the special figure fluctuation display whose result is "support hit" The battle effect started during the execution of the game is continued, that is, the special figure fluctuation display whose result is "support hit". In the game, the battle that was not settled due to a draw is continued, so in FIGS. 42 (i) and 42 (j), the effect of displaying "battle mode" is displayed as the effect of notifying that the player is in the chance mode. It is running. This makes it possible to connect the production before and after the transition to the chance mode.
Further, when the variable display starts (t68), as shown in FIG. 43, a right-handed instruction effect for instructing right-handed (for example, an effect of displaying “right-handed →” (see FIGS. 42 (i) and 42 (j))). ) Starts.

Then, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 and the second start memory (second special figure hold) occurs during the chance mode (during the normal electric support), it is displayed as shown in FIG. 42 (j). In the device 41, a new decorative special figure start memory display appears, the number of the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby storage display unit 83 changes, and the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b changes. ..
Further, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the battle mode), the battle effect is executed and the number of times of support is changed (see FIGS. 10 and 11). Each time the number of supports is changed, the number of ally characters may be increased or decreased, or the ally characters may be leveled up or down. Specifically, for example, when the number of support times after the change is less than the number of support times before the change, the number of ally characters is maintained (or reduced), and the number of support times after the change is the support before the change. If the number is greater than the number of times, the number of ally characters may be increased, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (k).

The identification information (decorative identification information) constituting the support symbol may be composed of only general symbols (designs 1 to 9), or may be composed of a general symbol and a special symbol (special symbol for support). It may be composed of only special symbols. That is, the support hit symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 may be composed of only general symbols as shown in FIG. 42 (f), or may be composed of only general symbols, or is shown in FIG. 42 (l). As shown, it may be composed of a general symbol and a special symbol, or may be composed of only a special symbol. Further, the support hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 may be composed of only general symbols as shown in FIG. 42 (g), or may be composed of only general symbols, or is shown in FIG. 42 (m). As described above, it may be composed of a general symbol and a special symbol, or may be composed of only a special symbol.

In the present embodiment, when both the first start memory and the second start memory are stored, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game.
FIGS. 44 to 48 show a case where the special figure 2 variable display game whose result is “per support” is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. 44 to 47 are examples of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 48 is an example of a timing chart.

When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 44A, the variable display ends in the display device 41, and the first decorative game display unit 81 and The game result is stopped and displayed on the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display ends and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is the result mode of "off". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 44A, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is the result mode of “off”.

Further, here, since the game result is "missing", the first start memory number is 2, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the display device 41 executes a transition effect (an effect of performing a display for shifting the decorative special figure start memory display). At the same time, the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

Next, when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), on the display device 41, the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game is displayed. The batch display device 50 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game.
When the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure hold) occurs during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, the display device 41 shows as shown in FIG. 44 (c). A new decorative special figure start memory display appears, and the number of decorative special figure start memory displays of the standby storage display unit 83 changes, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, so that the batch display is performed. In the device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold indicator 53 changes. Here, the new decorative special figure start memory display is displayed in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the standby storage display unit 83 executes a hold change effect that suggests a look-ahead result.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the first decorative game display unit The game result is stopped and displayed on the 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display ends and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is the result mode of "off".

Further, here, since the game result is "missing", the first start memory number is 2, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 44 (e), the transition effect is executed in the display device 41, and the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a is displayed. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

Next, when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 44 (e), the display device 41 displays the variation of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game. The batch display device 50 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game.
Special Figure 1 When a game ball wins a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 and a second start memory (second special figure hold) occurs during execution of the variable display game, the display device 41 is shown in FIG. 44 (f). In, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t71), as shown in FIGS. 44 (g) and 48, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start corresponding to the first start memory). Memory display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display ends and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is the result mode of "off".

Further, here, since the game result is "off" and the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t72). After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 45A, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes in the display device 41, and the batch display device 50 changes. The display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes. Here, since the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83, even if the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, the transition effect (decorative special) is displayed. Figure The effect of shifting the start memory display) is not executed.

Next, when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t73), as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 48, in the display device 41, the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game The variable display of the display game starts, and the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts on the batch display device 50. After that, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the reach variation starts in the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 (t74), and the battle effect is produced in the display device 41. Starts (t75), and the result of the battle effect is notified. Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the result of the battle effect is "draw".

Next, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, rocking display) on the first decorative game display unit 81. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t76), as shown in FIG. 45 (c), in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the first decoration The game result is stopped and displayed on the game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, the variation display is completed on the batch display device 50, and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. Here, since the game result is "per support A", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the result mode of "per support A". It is "434", and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is the result mode of "A per support".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 (c) and 48, when the stop display time starts (t76), the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number given this time is notified. Here, since the game result is "A per support" and the number of times of support corresponding to "A per support" is 20, the effect of notifying that the number of times of support given this time is 20 (for example, support). The effect of displaying "20 times remaining" on the number display unit 86) is being executed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), when the stop display time starts (t76), the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84, which were hidden at the start of the battle effect, reappear.
Here, since the game result is "per support" and the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration feature The figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t77). When the fluctuation time starts (t77), the mode shifts to the chance mode as shown in FIG. 48.

When the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 45 (d), the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes in the display device 41, and in the batch display device 50, the numerical value is changed. Special figure 1 The display mode of the hold indicator 53 changes.
When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t78), as shown in FIGS. 45 (d) and 48, the display device 41 has a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game. The variation display of the above is started, and the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game is started in the batch display device 50.

When the variation display starts (t78), the remaining number of times of support is notified in the support number of times notification effect. Here, since the number of times of support given this time is 20 and the chance mode (Public support) has started and the first game (first game) is being executed, FIGS. 45 (d) and 45 (e). ), An effect of notifying that the remaining number of times of support is 19 (for example, an effect of displaying "19 times remaining" on the support number display unit 86) is executed.
Further, when the variable display starts (t78), as shown in FIG. 48, a right-handed instruction effect for instructing right-handed (for example, an effect of displaying “right-handed →” (see FIGS. 45 (d) and 45 (e))). ) Starts.

Further, when the variable display starts (t78), the chance mode notification effect starts as shown in FIG. 48. Specifically, in the chance mode notification effect, first, as shown in FIG. 45D, an effect of notifying the entry into the chance mode (for example, an effect of displaying a “chance mode entry screen”) is executed, and then an effect of displaying the “chance mode entry screen” is executed. , As shown in FIG. 45 (e), an effect of notifying that the player is in the chance mode (for example, an effect of displaying a “chance mode in-screen”) is executed. Here, the first decorative game display unit 81 (large design) is hidden by the chance mode entry screen and the chance mode middle screen to reduce visibility, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, the chance mode entry screen or the chance mode in-screen may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the first decorative game display unit 81 so that the visibility does not deteriorate, or the chance mode entry screen or The first decorative game display unit 81 may be displayed on the front side of the screen during the chance mode so that the visibility does not deteriorate.

In the present embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display is hidden at the start of the battle effect and redisplayed when the symbol is confirmed. If the hold change effect is executed in the standby memory display unit 83 before it is hidden, the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby memory display unit 83 is hidden at the start of the battle effect and the symbol is displayed. When it is redisplayed at the time of confirmation, it may be redisplayed in a state where the hold change effect is not executed (the hold change effect is canceled), for example, as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (e). As shown in 45 (f) to (j), it may be redisplayed in a state where the hold change effect is executed.

Specifically, in FIG. 45 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83, and in FIG. 45 (c), the decorative special figure start memory displayed at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83. The display is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is a specific display mode before non-display (FIG. 45 (a)), whereas it is a normal display mode at the time of redisplay (FIG. 45 (c)). .. That is, it reappears in a state where the display mode is reset.
Further, in FIG. 45 (f), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 and the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 in FIG. 45 (h) are , It is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is the specific display mode before non-display (FIG. 45 (f)), and is also the specific display mode at the time of redisplay (FIG. 45 (h)).

Further, when the hold change effect is redisplayed in the executed state, the effect mode of the hold change effect at the time of redisplay is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 45 (f) to 45 (j), the effect mode before hiding. It may be the same as, for example, as shown in FIGS. 46A to 46E, it may be different from the production mode before hiding.
Specifically, in FIG. 45 (f), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83, and in FIG. 45 (h), the decorative special figure start memory displayed at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83. The display is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is the same before non-display (FIG. 45 (f)) and when redisplay (FIG. 45 (h)). That is, it reappears in a state in which the display mode before hiding (before the start of the battle effect) is inherited.
Further, in FIG. 46 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 and the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 in FIG. 46 (c) are , It is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. Among the display modes of the decorative special figure start memory display, the display modes (colors in the case of this embodiment) for suggesting the look-ahead result are before non-display (FIG. 46 (a)) and at the time of re-display (FIG. 46). The display mode (here, the shape) that is the same as in (c)) but different from the display mode for suggesting the look-ahead result is before hiding (FIG. 46 (a)) and when redisplaying (FIG. 46). (C)) is different.

The battle effect should be started not only during the execution of the special figure variation display game whose result is "per support", but also during the execution of the special figure variation display game whose result is other than "per support". However, depending on whether the result of the special figure fluctuation display game that was executed at the start of the battle effect is "support hit" or not "support hit", there is a pending change effect at the time of reappearance. Or, the production mode of the pending change effect at the time of reappearance may be different.
Specifically, for example, the decorative special figure start memory display is hidden during the execution of the special figure variation display game (for example, at the start of the battle effect), and at the start of the stop display time of the special figure variation display game (for example, at the start of the battle effect). If it is redisplayed at (when the symbol is confirmed) and the hold change effect is executed in the standby storage display unit 83 before it is hidden, the result of the special figure variation display game is "support". If it is a "hit", as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (e), it is redisplayed without executing the hold change effect, and if the result of the special figure variation display game is a "big hit", FIG. 46 ( Similar to a) to (e), if the pending change effect is redisplayed in the executed state (the effect mode is different from that before the non-display) and the result of the special figure variation display game is "off", FIG. 45 ( Similar to f) to (j), the hold change effect may be redisplayed in the executed state (the effect mode is the same as before the non-display).

Further, in the present embodiment, only the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the main fluctuation is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84, and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation is displayed. Is configured not to be displayed, but is not limited to this. For example, the standby storage display unit 83 can display only the decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the main fluctuation, and the running storage display unit 84 can display only the decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the main fluctuation. Instead, it may be possible to display a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to irregular fluctuations.
In that case, when the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the running memory display unit 84 is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation, for example, FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (e). As shown, the pending change effect may be executed in the executing storage display unit 84, or the pending change effect may be executed in the executing storage display unit 84, for example, as shown in FIGS. 47 (f) to 47 (j). You may not execute it.

The hold change effect executed in the standby storage display unit 83 is such that the decorative special figure start storage display displayed on the standby storage display unit 83 is displayed in a specific display mode. It is an effect that suggests the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the display and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern.
Further, the pending change effect executed by the executing memory display unit 84 displays the decorative special figure start storage display displayed on the executing storage display unit 84 in a specific display mode, thereby displaying the decorative special figure start storage. It is an effect that suggests the result and fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game (currently running special figure fluctuation display game) corresponding to the display.

Specifically, in FIG. 47 (c), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83, and in FIG. 47 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display in the running memory display unit 84. Is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the same special figure variation display game. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is the same before the transition to the executing memory display unit 84 (FIG. 47 (c)) and after the transition to the executing memory display unit 84 (FIG. 47 (e)). ing. That is, the display mode before the transition is inherited and the transition to the execution storage display unit 84 is performed.
The display mode after the transition to the running storage display unit 84 may be a display mode different from the display mode before the transition. Specifically, for example, among the display modes of the decorative special figure start memory display, the display mode for suggesting the look-ahead result (in the case of this embodiment, the color) is inherited even after the transition and suggests the look-ahead result. The display mode (for example, the shape) different from the display mode for the purpose may be different before and after the transition.

Further, in FIG. 47 (h), the decorative special figure start memory display on the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 and the decorative special figure start memory display on the running storage display unit 84 in FIG. 47 (j) are the same. This is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure variable display game. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is a specific display mode before the transition to the running storage display unit 84 (FIG. 47 (h)), whereas after the transition to the running storage display unit 84 (FIG. 47). (J)) is a normal display mode. That is, the display mode is reset and the process shifts to the running storage display unit 84.

Further, since only the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the main fluctuation is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby storage display unit 83 is the first start memory. In the case of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to, the decorative special figure start memory display is hidden when the chance mode starts and reappears when the chance mode ends. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, when the first start memory generated before the start of the chance mode is not digested during the chance mode, the hold change effect targeting the first start memory before the start of the chance mode is performed. If it has been executed, when the chance mode ends, it may reappear in a state in which the display mode before the start of the battle effect is inherited.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 45 (d), (i), 46 (d), 47 (d), and (i), the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84 are displayed on the chance mode entry screen. Hidden in, but not limited to this. Specifically, for example, the size of the chance mode entry screen does not overlap with the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84 (including the decorative special figure start memory display) (for example, the same size as the chance mode screen). The standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84 may be displayed on the front side of the chance mode entry screen.
Further, when the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to irregular fluctuation, the standby storage is performed. The decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the main variation) of the display unit 83 may be hidden. That is, in the examples shown in FIGS. 45 (a), 45 (f), 46 (a), 47 (a), and (f), the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby storage display unit 83 ( The decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) may be hidden.

In the example shown in FIGS. 44 to 48, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t72 to t73), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 is ". The display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 is the result mode of “off”, and the display mode is the result mode of “off”. Therefore, the special figure 2 is in a state where the stop symbol (off symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (off symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned. Variable display of the variable display game (variable display on the special figure 2 display 52) and variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game (first decorative game display unit 81 and second decoration) (Variable display on the game display unit 82) will be started.
Of course, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t72 to t73), the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are aligned with the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52. If not, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game (variable display on the special figure 2 display 52) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game remain in the inconsistent state. The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

The special effect performed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "per support" is not limited to the battle effect and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit", in addition to (or instead of) the battle effect, a pseudo-continuous effect that repeats the variation display of the large symbol may be executed. ..
FIG. 50 shows an example of a case where a pseudo continuous effect is executed as a special effect to be performed during the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “C per support”. Since FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram showing the same state as FIG. 45 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is “support hit”, the pseudo continuous effect is started in the first decorative game display unit 81 after the start of the variation display. When the pseudo-continuous effect starts, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), first, a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times and a general symbol (here, "4") suggesting the number of times of support to be given are temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is "C per support", the number of times of support actually given is 1000, but here, the number of times of support given is less than the number of times actually given. A special symbol for suggesting the number of times of support is displayed as a temporary stop. Specifically, a special symbol for suggesting the number of times of support, which suggests that the number of times of support to be given is 20, is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the suggested number of times is displayed on the support number display unit 86.
Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the re-variation display of the large symbol starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 50 (d), the special symbol for suggesting the number of support times and the general symbol suggesting the number of times of support to be given. The symbol (here, "5") is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, a special symbol for suggesting the number of times of support that suggests the number of times of support to be added is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times, which suggests that the number of times of support to be added is 80, is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (e), the suggested number of times is added to the number of times displayed on the support number display unit 86.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e), the re-variation display of the large symbol starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 50 (f), the special symbol for suggesting the number of support times and the general symbol suggesting the number of times of support to be given. The symbol (here, "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times, which suggests the number of times of support to be added, is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times, which suggests that the number of times of support to be added is 900, is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (g), the suggested number of times is added to the number of times displayed on the support number display unit 86.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (g), the re-variation display of the large symbol is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 50 (h), the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81. , The pseudo-continuous production ends. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 50 (i), in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the first decorative game display unit The game result is stopped and displayed on the 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. Here, since the game result is "C per support", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the result mode of "C per support". It is "656".

Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (i), when the stop display time starts, the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number given this time is notified. Here, since the game result is "C per support" and the number of times of support corresponding to "C per support" is 1000 times, an effect of notifying that the number of times of support given this time is 1000 times (for example, support). The effect of displaying "Support 1000 times!" On the number display unit 86) is being executed.
Further, here, since the game result is "per support" and the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and The decorative special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the fluctuation time starts, the mode shifts to the chance mode as shown in FIG. 50 (j).

In FIG. 50, the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “support hit” is illustrated, but in the pseudo-continuous effect, the special figure 1 variable display in which the result is “support hit” is illustrated. It can also be run during the game. The same applies to special effects other than pseudo-continuous effects (for example, battle effects).
Further, in FIG. 50, a case where a pseudo continuous effect is executed during a special figure variation display game in which the result is “C per support” is illustrated, but in the pseudo continuous effect, the special figure in which the result is “A per support” is illustrated. It can be executed during the variable display game, or it can be executed during the special figure variable display game in which the result is "B per support".

In the pseudo-continuous production executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "A per support", for example, FIGS. 50 (d) to 50 (g) are omitted. That is, when the pseudo continuous effect starts, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), first, the special symbol for suggesting the number of support times is temporarily stopped and then, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the large symbol is re-variated. The display starts, and then the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81, and the pseudo continuous effect ends. Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, the game result (“A per support”) is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. "434") is stopped and displayed, and the mode shifts to the chance mode.

Further, in the pseudo-continuous production executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "B per support", for example, FIGS. 50 (f) to 50 (g) are omitted. That is, when the pseudo continuous effect starts, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), first, the special symbol for suggesting the number of support times is temporarily stopped and then, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the large symbol is re-variated. The display starts, then the special symbol for suggesting the number of support times is temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 50 (d), and then the re-variation display of the large symbol starts as shown in FIG. 50 (e). After that, the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81, and the pseudo-continuous production ends. Then, when the variable time of the special figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, the game result (“B per support”) is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. "545") is stopped and displayed, and the mode shifts to the chance mode.

In FIGS. 50 (b), (e), and (f), a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times is temporarily stopped and displayed in the medium fluctuation display area of the first decorative game display unit 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special symbol for suggesting the number of times of support may be temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas.
Further, the number of additional supports is not limited to "80 times" and "900 times", and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the number of times of support initially suggested (the number of times of support less than the number of times of support actually given) is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.
Of course, the special effect (for example, battle effect, pseudo-continuous effect) is not only when the game state is the normal game state ST14 or the first specific game state ST11, but also when the game state is the second specific game state ST12 or the third specific. It can also be executed when the game state is ST13. That is, the special effect can be executed regardless of whether or not it is in the chance mode (during Fuden support).

In addition, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the game result is "per support" starts, the support count notification effect starts, and first, the support count given this time is notified, but the stop display time The number of times of support notified during may be different from the number of times of support actually given. Specifically, for example, even if it is notified that the number of times of support is given less than the number of times of support actually given during the stop display time, and an additional effect of adding the number of times of support is executed during the chance mode. good.
FIG. 51 shows an example of the additional effect performed after the end of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “C per support”. Since FIG. 51 (a) is a diagram showing the same state as FIG. 45 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the support hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81. When the fluctuation time of the variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the support hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. Will be done. Here, since the game result is "C per support", in the display device 41, the result mode common to "A per support", "B per support", and "C per support" as the symbol per support is "767". Is temporarily stopped or stopped. Of course, not only when the game result is "C per support", but also when the game result is "A per support" or "B per support", the result common to each "per support" as a symbol per support. It is possible to temporarily stop and display the mode "767".

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), when the stop display time starts, the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number to be given is notified. Here, the game result is "C per support", and the number of times of support corresponding to "C per support" is 1000 times, but it is notified that the number of times of support to be given is smaller than the number of times of support actually given. An effect (for example, an effect of displaying "20 times remaining" on the support count display unit 86) is being executed.
Further, here, since the game result is "per support" and the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and The decorative special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the fluctuation time starts, the mode shifts to the chance mode.

When the mode shifts to the chance mode, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode notification effect, first, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), an effect of notifying the entry into the chance mode (for example, an effect of displaying a “chance mode entry screen”) is executed, and then an effect of displaying the “chance mode entry screen” is executed. As shown in FIG. 51 (e), an effect of notifying that the player is in the chance mode (for example, an effect of displaying a “chance mode in-screen”) is executed.
As shown in FIGS. 51 (f) and 51 (g), when a game ball wins a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 and the second start memory (second special figure hold) occurs during the chance mode (during the normal electric support). In the display device 41, a new decorative special figure start memory display appears, the number of the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby storage display unit 83 changes, and the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes. Change.

Here, the number of times of support to be added is displayed on the new decorative special figure start memory display. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (h), the fluctuation time of the next special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) starts, and the transition effect (decorative special figure start memory display is shifted) is displayed. When the effect) is executed, the number of times of support displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display that shifts to the running memory display unit 84 is added to the number of times displayed on the support number display unit 86. Here, since "80" is displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display that shifts to the running memory display unit 84, "80 times" is added to the number of times displayed on the support number display unit 86.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (i), the fluctuation time of the next special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) starts, and the transition effect (decorative special figure start memory display is shifted) is displayed. When the effect) is executed, the number of times of support displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display that shifts to the running memory display unit 84 is added to the number of times displayed on the support number display unit 86. Here, since "900" is displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display that shifts to the running memory display unit 84, "900 times" is added to the number of times displayed on the support number display unit 86. Further, the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed as "900" is a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the hold change effect for the start memory corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display is executed.

The number of additional supports is not limited to "80 times" and "900 times", and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the number of times of support notified before the additional effect (the number of times of support less than the number of times of support actually given) is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (here, the start memory generated in FIG. 51 (f)) that is not the target of the hold change effect, and the start memory that is the target of the hold change effect. Although it is possible to display the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to (here, the start memory generated in FIG. 51 (g)) and the number of times of support added to both, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to display the number of times of support to be added only to the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is not the target of the hold change effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, it corresponds to the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the special figure change display game whose result is "missing" and the start memory of the special figure change display game whose result is "big hit". Ornamental special figure start memory display and special figure change display game whose result is "small hit" Ornament special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the game and special figure change display game whose result is "support hit" It is possible to display the number of times of support to be added to both the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to display the number of times of support to be added only to the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the special figure variation display game whose result is "off".

For example, if it is possible to display the number of times of support to be added only to the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the off-game (special figure variation display game whose result is "out of place"), the number of support is displayed. Since it is suggested whether or not the game is an out-of-game, the player can know that the game result is "out of place" even before the out-of-game starts, and the interest of the out-of-game is It may decrease.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure variation display game in which the result is "missing" and the special figure variation display game in which the result is "big hit" Corresponding decorative special figure start memory display and special figure variation display game whose result is "small hit" Ornament special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the game and special figure variation display game whose result is "support hit" By making it possible to display the number of times of support to be added to both the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to, it is not suggested whether or not it is an out-of-game game depending on whether or not the number of support is displayed. You can improve your interest.

FIG. 51 illustrates a case where the additional effect is executed during the chance mode that has entered with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “support hit”. However, in the additional effect, the result is “support hit”. It is also possible to execute it during the chance mode that has entered with the end of a certain special figure 1 variable display game.
Further, FIG. 51 illustrates a case where the additional effect is executed during the chance mode that has entered with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is “C per support”, but the result of the additional effect is “per support”. It is also possible to execute during the chance mode that has entered with the end of the special figure variation display game that is "A", and the chance mode that has entered with the end of the special figure variation display game whose result is "B per support". It is also possible to run inside.

Further, in FIG. 51 (b), “767”, which is a result mode common to each “support hit”, is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81, and in FIG. 51 (c), the first decoration game is displayed. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 stop and display "767", which is a common result mode for each "support hit", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the game result is "C per support", "656", which is the result mode of "C per support", is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81, and the first decorative game display unit is displayed. "656", which is the result mode of "C per support", may be stopped and displayed on the 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82.
For example, when "656", which is a result mode peculiar to "C per support", is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop, the player grasps the number of times of support actually given at the stage before the execution of the additional effect. Since it becomes possible to do so, there is a risk that the interest of the additional production will be reduced. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 51, by temporarily stopping and displaying the result mode common to each "support hit", it is actually given at the stage before the execution of the additional effect. Since the number of times of support can be ambiguous, it is possible to improve the interest of the additional production.

Next, an example of the production of the game will be described. 52 to 54 show an example of the effect of the game, and FIG. 55 shows the change in visibility of the board effect device 44, the standby storage display unit 83, the running storage display unit 84, and the medium fluctuation display area 81b. rice field. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the display on the display device 41, the board effect device 44 that can move forward of the display device 41, and the display on the display board 350 arranged so as to cover the front surface of the game board 30 are combined. It is possible to carry out the production that was made.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), when the previous special figure variation display game is finished, the identification information is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. Since the board effect device 44 is also in the initial position, the visibility of the identification information of each variation display area including the board effect device 44, the standby storage display unit 83, the running storage display unit 84, and the medium fluctuation display area 81b is high. It is in a state (t100 in FIG. 55).
When the next special figure fluctuation display game is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 52B, the left fluctuation display area 81a, the middle fluctuation display area 81b, and the right fluctuation display area 81c of the first decorative game display unit 81 are started. The variable display of the identification information is started in each of the above. Further, the second decorative game display unit 82 also starts variable display of the identification information. Since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the visibility of the identification information in each variable display area including the medium variable display area 81b is reduced (t101 in FIG. 55).
That is, the variable display of the identification information is the first effect of changing the display of the display device 41 to change the visibility of the display.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (c) and 52 (d), in this example, the board effect device 44 operates from the initial position toward the operation position on the center side of the display area after the start of the variation display. In this process, the identification information of the medium variation display area 81b is gradually hidden and the visibility is gradually lowered. Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (e), the visibility of the identification information in the medium variation display area 81b is gradually improved by the operation of the board effect device 44 returning to the initial position (t102 to t103 in FIG. 55).

After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (f), the display is performed on the display board 350. By displaying on the display board 350, the visibility of the first decorative game display unit 81, the second decorative game display unit 82, the standby storage display unit 83, and the running storage display unit 84, which overlap with the display, is reduced. .. The display of the display board 350 here is a display that allows the display device 41 and the board effect device 44 located at the rear to be seen through, and the identification information displayed in the medium fluctuation display area 81b by the board effect device 44 is visually recognized. The degree of decrease is lower than the decrease in sex (t104 to t105 in FIG. 55).

Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (g), the reach state is reached, and the board effect device 44 is operating as shown in FIG. 52 (h). As a result, the visibility of the identification information in the medium variation display area 81b is reduced (t106 to t107 in FIG. 55). This effect is such that the board effect device 44 changes the visibility of the display of the display device 41.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 52 (i), the display is performed on the display board 350, and the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b is further reduced (t107 to t108 in FIG. 55). This effect changes the visibility of the display of the board effect device 44 and the display device 41 depending on the display of the display board 350.
Further, since the display on the display board 350 also overlaps with the board effect device 44, the second decorative game display unit 82, and the standby storage display unit 83, their visibility also deteriorates, but they overlap with each other as compared with the medium fluctuation display area 81b. Since the area is small, there is little deterioration in visibility.

That is, in the portion where the display on the display board 350 overlaps, the visibility of the identification information of the medium variation display area 81b is the lowest, the visibility of the board effect device 44, the second decorative game display unit 82, and the standby storage display unit 83. The visibility is higher in the order of the visibility and the visibility of the running memory display unit 84, and there is a difference in the visibility.
As a result, the visibility of the second decorative game display unit 82 is ensured even in a situation where the effect of covering the medium variation display area 81b and the board effect device 44, which are the parts most noticed by the player, is fully exhibited. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the special figure variation display game, and by ensuring the visibility of the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84, it is easy to grasp the information of the start memory. Can be.
In addition to causing a difference in visibility depending on the size of the area where the displays on the display board 350 overlap, the visibility may be changed depending on the degree of transparency of the display on the display board 350. For example, the transparency of the display of the portion overlapping the second decorative game display unit 82 and the standby storage display unit 83 may be made higher than the transparency of the portion overlapping the medium variation display area 81b and the board effect device 44.

In this way, with respect to the identification information of the medium fluctuation display area 81b forming a predetermined image displayed on the display device 41, the visibility of the display of the board effect device 44 and the display board 350 is changed to produce various effects. Can be executed and the fun of the game can be improved.
Further, although it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that a special result will be obtained by the display color and display content of the display board 350, the visual recognition of the running memory display unit 84, the second decorative game display unit 82, and the standby storage display unit 83. Since the sexuality is ensured, even if the visibility of the first decorative game display unit 81 is lowered, the progress status and the expected degree of the game can be grasped at the same time.

After that, the display on the display board 350 is completed, the board effect device 44 returns to the initial position, and the visibility of the display device 41 including the medium fluctuation display area 81b is restored (t109 in FIG. 55). Then, the SP reach state is developed, and the identification information is temporarily stopped in the medium fluctuation display area 81b as shown in FIG. 52 (j). Due to the temporary stop, the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b is improved as compared with the state in which the fluctuation display is performed at high speed (t110 in FIG. 55). Further, during the execution of SP reach, the standby storage display unit 83 and the execution storage display unit 84 are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 53A, in this SP reach effect, the identification information is transformed into different identification information. As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the shape of the identification information begins to be deformed, and as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the identification information is deformed so as to be compressed from the left and right. The visibility of the region 81b is reduced. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 (c) and 53 (d), the smaller the amount of deformation, the better the visibility of the medium variation display region 81b (t111 to t112 in FIG. 55). That is, the effect of transforming the identification information is the first effect of changing the display of the display device 41 to change the visibility of the display.
Further, the first effect here does not continue the situation where the visibility is low as in the variable display, but is an effect that periodically changes the state where the visibility is high and the state where the visibility is low.

Here, the board effect device 44 operates as shown in FIGS. 53 (g) and 53 (h) in a state where the visibility is lowered due to the deformation again as shown in FIGS. 53 (e) and 53 (f). The effect is performed and the visibility is further reduced (t113 to t115 in FIG. 55). This effect is a second effect that changes the visibility of the display of the display device 41 by operating the board effect device 44, which forms a movable accessory, so as to overlap the display device 41.
The execution timing of the second effect here is started in a state where the visibility is the lowest in the first effect in which the visibility changes periodically, and in addition to the decrease in visibility due to the first effect, the second effect By reducing the visibility due to the above, the visibility is greatly reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (i), the effect of displaying on the display board 350 is executed while the board effect device 44 is operating, and the visibility is further lowered (t115 to t116 in FIG. 55). This effect is a third effect that changes the visibility of the display of the board effect device 44 and the display device 41 by displaying a predetermined display on the display board 350.
In the portion where the display on the display board 350 overlaps, the identification information of the medium variation display area 81b is the lowest in visibility due to the combination of the deformation, the overlap of the board effect device 44, and the overlap of the display on the display board 350, and the board. The visibility increases in the order of the visibility of the effect device 44 and the visibility of the second decorative game display unit 82, and there is a difference in these visibility.

As shown in FIG. 53 (j), when the display on the display board 350 is completed, the board effect device 44 returns to the initial position (t117 in FIG. 55), and is in the reach state as shown in FIG. 54 (a). The identification information is temporarily stopped (t118 in FIG. 55). In this example, the result is a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 54 (b), it is definitively notified that the board effect device 44 operates and the display board 350 displays the result to derive a special result. (T118 to t121 in FIG. 55).
After that, the temporary stop is completed, the variable display is stopped, and the stop display time is reached. As shown in FIG. It is stopped and displayed (t122 in FIG. 55). As a result, the visibility of the identification information in the medium variation display area 81b is the highest. Further, at the stop display time, the display of the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84 is restarted.

When the stop display time ends, the special game state starts. As shown in FIG. 54 (d), in the fanfare state, the second decorative game display unit 82, the standby storage number display unit 83, the running storage display unit 84, the first start storage number display unit 85a, and the second start storage number display unit The display of 85b is finished (t123 in FIG. 55).
In this example, as shown in FIGS. 54 (e) and 54 (f), the board effect device 44 is operating during the fanfare effect, and the visibility of the identification information in the medium variation display area 81b is reduced (t124 in FIG. 55). From t127). Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (g), the display is performed on the display plate 350, and the visibility is lowered (t125 to t126 in FIG. 55).
After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (h), the display on the display board 350 is completed, the board effect device 44 returns to the initial position, the display of the first decorative game display unit 81 is also completed, and FIG. 54 (i) ) Is started (t128 in FIG. 55).

As shown in FIG. 54 (i), in the round game, the round number display 87a indicating the number of rounds, the type display 87b indicating the type of bonus, the special result display 87c indicating the derived special result, and the number of prize balls acquired are displayed. The number of acquisitions displayed 87d is displayed.
As shown in FIG. 54 (j), the operation of the board effect device 44 and the display of the display board 350 may be performed even during the round game. In this case, the round number display 87a, the type display 87b, and the special result display 87c are performed. The visibility of a part or all of the acquired number display 87d is changed by the display of the board effect device 44 or the display board 350. Of course, there are cases where only one of the operation of the board effect device 44 and the display of the display board 350 is performed.

When the board effect device 44 is operated or the display board 350 is displayed during the special game state, it is notified that a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the content of the special game state initially notified is executed. There is a case of so-called promotion production.
For example, during the fanfare effect as shown in FIGS. 54 (e) to 54 (g), or during the round as shown in FIG. 54 (j), the promotion effect is performed together with the operation of the board effect device 44 and the display of the display board 350. Can be considered.
In this case, the display of the result mode on the first decorative game display unit 81 shown in FIG. 54 (g) and the visibility of the special result display 87c shown in FIG. 54 (j) are displayed on the board effect device 44 and the display board 350. The process of changing the first decorative game display unit 81 and the special result display 87c to a display advantageous to the player can be effectively produced.

As described above, by changing the display of the display device 41 to change the visibility of the display and operating the board effect device 44 so as to overlap the display device 41, the display of the display device 41 can be displayed. The second effect of changing the visibility and the third effect of changing the visibility of the display of the board effect device 44 and the display device 41 by displaying a predetermined display on the display board 350 are combined and executed. Therefore, the visibility of the display device 41 can be changed in multiple stages, and the interest of the game can be improved.
Further, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by operating the board effect device 44 and displaying the display board 350 so that the degree of visibility differs for a plurality of types of displays in each part of the display device 41. At the same time, visibility can be ensured for the required display.
Further, since the board effect device 44 is opaque and the display on the display board 350 is translucent and the degree of deterioration of visibility is different, the effect can be different and the effect can be varied.

Further, by the first effect of changing the visibility by deformation of the medium variation display area 81b or the like, the second effect of changing the visibility of the medium variation display area 81b by the operation of the board effect device 44, and the display of the display board 350. The third effect that changes the visibility of the board effect device 44 can be executed independently of each other, and can be executed in any combination.

Further, the visibility of the medium variation display area 81b may not be changed by executing the third effect.
In the above example, since the identification information of the medium variation display area 81b is not completely hidden by the board effect device 44, the display board 350 is displayed to visually recognize the visible portion of the identification information of the medium variation display area 81. Although the property was reduced, the visibility of the medium variation display area 81 changed even when the display board 350 was displayed by completely hiding the identification information of the medium variation display area 81b by the board effect device 44. You can avoid it.
Further, by hiding the medium fluctuation display area 81 and the first decorative game display unit 81 in advance when displaying the display board 350, the medium fluctuation display area 81 can be visually recognized even if the display board 350 is displayed. It is possible to prevent the sex from changing.

It should be noted that the volume emitted from the speaker 19 when the second effect of changing the visibility of the display of the display device 41 is executed by operating the board effect device 44 forming a movable accessory so as to overlap the display device 41. Is different depending on the execution timing of the second effect. As a result, the effect is different depending on the execution timing of the second effect.
In the above example, during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the volume becomes louder as the special figure variation display game ends. The volume is the lowest before the reach state (t102 to t103 in FIG. 55), and when the reach state occurs (t106 to t109 in FIG. 55), the fluctuation display is stopped during the SP reach (t114 to t117 in FIG. 55). The volume increases in the order immediately before (t118 to t121 in FIG. 55). As a result, the player's expectation can be gradually increased toward the derivation of the result, and the interest of the game can be improved. The volume during operation of the board effect device 44 in the special gaming state (t124 to t127 in FIG. 55) is the same volume as during SP reach.

Further, regarding the light emitting mode of the predetermined LED provided on the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 when the third effect of performing the predetermined display on the display board 350 is executed, before the SP reach occurs (FIG. 55). (t102 to t103, t106 to t109) and after SP reach occurs (t114 to t117, t118 to t121 in FIG. 55). As a result, the effect is different depending on whether or not SP reach is generated.
In the above example, the LED is turned off before the occurrence of the SP reach, and after the occurrence of the SP reach, the light emission mode before the execution timing of the second effect is continued or the light emission mode suggesting the expectation degree of a special result. I try to do it. Even during the special game state, the light emitting mode before the execution timing of the second effect is continued.

By turning off the other LEDs while performing a predetermined display on the display board 350, the display on the display board 350 becomes conspicuous, suggesting the occurrence of SP reach, and the like. The effect can be enhanced.
Further, after the SP reach occurs, the SP reach effect is performed by emitting the image of the display device 41 and other LEDs, and the effect of the display of the display board 350 can be added while continuing these effects. , The fun of the game can be improved.

The volume during execution of the second effect is not limited to the above-mentioned order. For example, the lower the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b, the higher the volume, or the lower the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b. The volume may be reduced as much as possible.
Further, regarding the volume during execution of the third effect, for example, the volume may be increased as the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b is lower, or the volume may be increased as the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b is lower. It may be made smaller.

Further, the volume may be different depending on whether the second effect and the third effect are combined or not.
For example, in a situation where either the second effect and the third effect are combined at the same timing or the second effect or the third effect is executed independently, the second effect and the third effect can be selected. The volume may be louder in the case where the two effects are combined than in the case where the second effect or the third effect is executed alone. On the contrary, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the volume may be lower than when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone.
By doing so, it is possible to create a production having a different taste depending on whether or not the production is combined, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition to this, when the volume is the lowest among the cases where the second effect and the third effect are combined (for example, before the reach state (t102 to t103 in FIG. 55)), the volume of the special figure variation display game is executed. The volume may be lower than the volume when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone.
Further, the volume when the volume is the loudest (for example, during SP reach (t114 to t117 in FIG. 55)) among the cases where the second effect and the third effect are combined is the second during the execution of the special figure variation display game. The volume may be lower than the volume when the effect or the third effect is executed alone.

The light emitting mode of the predetermined LED provided in the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 during the execution of the third effect is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set.
Further, the light emitting mode of the predetermined LED provided in the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 during the execution of the second effect may also be different depending on the execution timing of the effect. For example, it may be different before the occurrence of SP reach and after the occurrence of SP reach.

Further, the light emitting mode may be different depending on whether the second effect and the third effect are combined or not.
For example, in a situation where either the second effect and the third effect are combined at the same timing or the second effect or the third effect is executed independently, the second effect and the third effect can be selected. The light emission intensity of the LED may be higher in the case where the two effects are combined than in the case where the second effect or the third effect is executed alone. On the contrary, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the light emission intensity of the LED may be lower than when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone.
By doing so, it is possible to create a production having a different taste depending on whether or not the production is combined, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition to this, when the second effect and the third effect are combined during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the light emission intensity when the LED emission intensity is the lowest is the second during the execution of the special figure variation display game. The emission intensity of the LED may be lower than that when the effect or the third effect is executed independently.
Further, among the cases where the second effect and the third effect are combined, the light emission intensity when the LED emission intensity is the highest is such that the second effect or the third effect is executed independently during the execution of the special figure variation display game. It may be made smaller than the emission intensity of the LED in the case.

Further, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the light emission intensity of the LED may be different depending on the loudness of the volume.
For example, the louder the volume, the higher the light emission intensity of the LED, or the louder the volume, the lower the light emission intensity of the LED.

The operation of the board effect device 44 and the execution timing of the display on the display board 350 are not limited to the above examples and can be set arbitrarily.
Further, the method for reducing the visibility of the identification information in the medium variation display area 81b is not limited to the above-mentioned method, and other methods may be used. For example, the visibility may be lowered by inverting the top and bottom and left and right of the identification information, the visibility may be lowered by changing the color, lightness, saturation, and transparency of the identification information, and others. The visibility may be lowered by superimposing the images of.

Further, as the first effect, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the effect of the variation display in which the identification information is operated in the same manner in the plurality of variation display areas with the start of the special figure variation display game is included. However, this effect may not be included in the first effect.
For example, in a situation where the operating state of the identification information is different in a plurality of variable display areas and the visibility is different as shown in FIG. 52 (g), the effect of reducing the visibility of the identification information is set as the first effect. You can do it. Further, the effect of reducing the visibility of the identification information after the start of the reach state may be set as the first effect.
Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the visibility of the identification information is lowered due to changes other than operating the identification information in the same manner in the plurality of variation display areas with the start of the special figure variation display game. May be the first production.

Further, in the above example, the visibility of the identification information in the medium variation display area 81b is reduced, but the visibility of the identification information in the left variation display area 81a and the right variation display area 81c may be reduced. .. Further, the visibility may be lowered for an image other than the identification information, and for example, a background image, an effect image, an image indicating a firing direction, or the like may be used.
Further, it can be said that reducing the visibility makes it difficult to see, and these states may include making the state invisible.
In addition, reducing the visibility includes covering a part or all of the object invisible, and covering a part or all of the object with an object or an image having low translucency.

Further, the operation and shape of the board effect device 44 are not limited to those described above, and may be any. Further, although the visibility is reduced by overlapping with the identification information of the medium variation display area 81b, the visibility may be reduced by overlapping with the identification information of the left variation display area 81a and the right variation display area 81c. The operating range and operating mode of the device 44 can be arbitrarily set.
Further, the visibility may be lowered by overlapping with an image other than the identification information. For example, the second decorative game display unit 82, the standby storage display unit 83, the running storage display unit 84, the background image, the effect image, and the launch image. It may overlap with an image indicating a direction to reduce visibility.

Further, the display of the display board 350 may be displayed at a position overlapping only the front surface of the board effect device 44 when the board effect device 44 is in the position when the operation is completed by lowering.
By doing so, the first effect of changing the visibility due to the deformation of the medium variation display area 81b and the like, and the second effect of changing the visibility of the medium variation display area 81b by the operation of the board effect device 44 are displayed. The third effect, which changes the visibility of the board effect device 44 by displaying the board 350, can be executed independently.
That is, in the case where the first effect, the second effect or the third effect is executed independently, or in any combination of the first effect and the second effect, the first effect and the third effect, the second effect and the third effect. It is possible to execute the case where the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are combined and executed, respectively.

Further, when the second effect or the third effect is executed, the medium variation display area 81b or the first decorative game display unit 81 may not be displayed. Further, when the second effect or the third effect is executed, the standby storage display unit 83 and the executing memory display unit 84 may not be displayed. In this case, the pedestal portion (the rectangular display indicating the position where the storage display is displayed in FIG. 52 (a)) of the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84 may be left displayed or displayed. You may not do it.

Further, when a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device is used as the display board 350, more diverse displays can be performed.
For example, when the visibility of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is reduced by the display of the display board 350, the third decorative game may be displayed on the display board 350. Further, when the visibility of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is lowered by the board effect device 44, the third decorative game may be displayed on the display board 350. By doing so, it is possible to clearly grasp the progress of the special figure variation display game at all times.
The display position of the third decorative game may be a position that does not overlap the display position of the first decorative game display unit 81 or the second decorative game in the front-rear direction, or may be a position that overlaps the display position in the front-rear direction.
Further, in the above-described example, in a situation where the board effect device 44 overlaps the front side of the medium variation display area 81b, the identification information of the medium variation display area 81b is displayed at a position on the display board 350 on the front side of the board effect device 44. You may do so.
Further, a predetermined display may be performed at a position on the front side of the board effect device 44 according to the operation of the board effect device 44, so that only the visibility of the board effect device 44 may be lowered.

Further, when the display of the display board 350 reduces the visibility of the standby storage display unit 83, the running storage display unit 84, the first start storage number display unit 85a, and the second start storage number display unit 85b, the display board is displayed. The start memory display, the running memory display, or the start memory number may be displayed on the 350. By doing so, the status of the start memory can always be clearly grasped.

Further, in the above example, the board effect device 44 is arranged behind the display board 350, and the board effect device 44 can execute the second effect of changing the visibility of the predetermined image of the display device 41. The display board 350 serves as a second effect means capable of executing a third effect that changes the visibility of the first effect means.
The display board 350 may be arranged behind the board effect device 44. In this case, the display board 350 may perform the second effect of changing the visibility of the predetermined image of the display device 41. The board effect device 44 serves as a second effect means capable of executing a third effect that changes the visibility of the first effect means.
That is, it is sufficient that the second effect means for changing the visibility of the first effect means is located in front of the first effect means for changing the visibility of the predetermined image of the display device 41, and the first effect means and the second effect means. Any structure of the directing means may be used. For example, both the first effect means and the second effect means may be the board effect device 44, or both the first effect means and the second effect means may be the display board 350.
Further, it is possible that three or more effect means are overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the effect means located in the front may change the visibility of the effect means located in the rear.
Further, when the visibility of the predetermined image of the display device 41 is changed by another image displayed on the display device 41, the first effect means for changing the visibility of the predetermined image of the display device 41. Is the display device 41.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the visibility is changed by the first effect. Visibility of a display means (display device 41) that displays a possible predetermined image, a first effect means (board effect device 44) that can execute a second effect that changes the visibility of the predetermined image, and a first effect means. It is provided with a second effect means (display board 350) capable of executing a third effect of changing the above.
Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the interest of the game.

Further, the visibility of the display means (display device 41) for displaying a predetermined image, the first effect means (board effect device 44) capable of performing an effect of changing the visibility of the predetermined image, and the first effect means are changed. A second effect means (display board 350) capable of executing the effect to be produced is provided.
Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a display means (display) capable of displaying a game on a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The device 41), the movable accessory (board effect device 44) that can be operated so as to overlap the front side of the display means, and the display means and the movable accessory that are arranged on the front side of the display means and the movable accessory can be seen through. The effect control means includes a display board 350 capable of displaying a predetermined display, and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the display of the display means, the operation of the movable accessory, and the display of the display board 350. , The first effect of changing the display of the display means to change the visibility of the display, and the second effect of changing the visibility of the display of the display means by operating the movable accessory so as to overlap the display means. By displaying a predetermined display on the display board 350, it is possible to execute the third effect of changing the visibility of the display of the display means.
Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the interest of the game.

Further, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed independently or in combination.
Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect control means can display the first decorative game, which is a display corresponding to the game, and the second decorative game, which is compatible with the game and is smaller than the first decorative game, on the display means. When the third effect is executed, the visibility of the second decoration game is made higher than the visibility of the first decoration game.
Therefore, at least the progress of the game can be confirmed by the second decoration game.

In addition, a start storage means (game control device) that stores up to a predetermined upper limit of the start memory that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). 100), the effect control means can display a start memory display indicating information about the start memory on the display means, and when the third effect is executed, the visibility of the start memory display is the first decoration game. It will be higher than the visibility of.
Therefore, the information of the start memory can be confirmed.

[Modification example 1 of support hit determination]
In the above embodiment, the small hit determination (small hit lottery) and the support hit determination (support lottery) are performed using the same random numbers as the big hit determination (big hit lottery). That is, in the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 26, a big hit determination, a small hit determination, and a support hit determination are performed using a large hit random number (see FIG. 7A), and the determination result is obtained. If it is a big hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 7B), and if the determination result is a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired. (Refer to FIG. 7 (c)), and when the judgment result is a support, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 7 (d)), and the judgment result is any If not, the stop symbol information of the outlier is acquired, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the support hit is derived only in the low probability state, but for example, the support hit may be derived only in the normal game state ST14 (no low probability support). Further, the support hit may be derived regardless of the game state, or the support hit is derived only when there is no normal electric support (normal game state ST14, first specific game state ST11). You may do so. In addition, whether or not the support hit can be derived may be selected based on the game state.

[Modification example 2 of support hit determination]
In the above embodiment, the lottery is performed using a common big hit random number for the big hit, the small hit, and the support hit, but the lottery may be performed using the lottery random number corresponding to each result, or the big hit and the lottery. For small hits, a lottery may be performed using a large hit random number, and for support hits, a lottery may be performed using a random number per support. In this case, for example, the distribution rate is as shown in FIG. 56. Specifically, for example, a big hit judgment and a small hit judgment are performed using a big hit random number (see FIG. 56 (a)), and when the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the support hit random number is used to hit the support. The determination is made (see FIG. 56 (d)).

Further, in the above embodiment, the stop symbol information is acquired by using a special symbol random number common to all of the big hit, the small hit, and the support hit, but the symbol random number corresponding to each result is provided. Alternatively, a special symbol random number may be used for the big hit and the small hit, and a symbol random number per support may be used for the support hit.
For example, when the judgment result is a big hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 56 (b)), and when the judgment result is a small hit, it corresponds to the small hit symbol random number. When the stop symbol information to be performed is acquired (see FIG. 56 (c)) and the determination result is per support (that is, when “support is activated”), the stop symbol information corresponding to the random number per support is acquired. (See FIG. 56 (e)), if the determination result is neither, the stop symbol information of the outlier is acquired.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure start port switch common process shown in FIG. 57 instead of the special figure start port switch common process shown in FIG. In this special symbol start port switch common process, the jackpot symbol random number, which is the symbol random number for the jackpot, is extracted and prepared in step A140, and the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A141 is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM.
Next, the small hit symbol random number, which is a symbol random number for small hits, is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the prepared small hit symbol random number is saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A144).
After that, a random number per support is extracted and prepared (step A150a), and the prepared random number per support is saved in the random number storage area per support of RWM (step A150b) to perform a process of saving the prepared random number per support (step A150b). The hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A149a), and the prepared symbol per support symbol random number is saved in the symbol random number storage area per support of RWM (step A149b).

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 58 (a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22 (a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, after the process of step A363 is performed, a random number per support is loaded and prepared from the random number storage area per support (for 1 hold number) of the special figure 1 of the RWM (step A374), and the special figure is prepared. After performing the process (step A375) of clearing the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of 0 per support, the process proceeds to the process of step A364. Further, the process of step A370 is not performed, and the support hit can be derived regardless of the gaming state.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 58 (b) instead of the jackpot flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22 (b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, after the process of step A383 is performed, a random number per support is loaded and prepared from the random number storage area per support (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 2 of RWM (step A394), and the special figure is prepared. After performing the process (step A395) of clearing the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of 2 per support to 0, the process proceeds to the process of step A384. Further, the process of step A370 is not performed, and the support hit can be derived regardless of the gaming state.

[Support hit judgment processing]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 59 instead of the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 24. In this support hit determination process, after performing the process of step A422, it is determined whether the value of the target random number per support is less than the lower limit determination value per support (step A423a).

Then, when the value of the random number per support of the target is less than the lower limit determination value per support (step A423a; Y), that is, when it is not a support hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A428), and the support hit determination process is performed. finish. Further, when the value of the random number per support of the target is not less than the lower limit determination value per support (step A423a; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step A424). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A424; Y), the upper limit determination value per support during the high probability is set (step A425), and whether the value of the random number per support of the target is larger than the upper limit determination value per support is determined. Determine (step A427a). If the probability is not high (step A424; N), the upper limit judgment value per support during the low probability is set (step A426), and it is determined whether the value of the random number per support of the target is larger than the upper limit judgment value per support. (Step A427a).

When the value of the random number per support of the target is larger than the upper limit determination value per support (step A427a; Y), that is, when it is not a support hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A428), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. Further, when the value of the random number per support of the target is not larger than the upper limit determination value per support (step A427a; N), that is, when it is per support, the support hit is set as the determination result (step A429), and the support hit determination is performed. End the process.

The probability of winning the lottery per support may be different or the same for each probability set value. When different for each probability set value, for example, the lower the probability set value, the easier it is to win the lottery per support (that is, setting 1 is the easiest to win and setting 6 is the most difficult to win). Is good, and vice versa. In addition, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different or the same for each jackpot probability state. When differentiating each jackpot probability state, for example, the low probability state (normal probability state) may be easier to win than the high probability state, or vice versa. .. In addition, it may be possible to win only when the probability is low. Further, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

In this modified example as well, the support hit may be derived only in the normal game state ST14 (no low probability support). Specifically, for example, in the normal game state ST14, when the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, a support hit judgment is performed using a support hit random number, and when the judgment result is a big hit, it corresponds to a big hit symbol random number. The stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired when the judgment result is a small hit, and the stop symbol information corresponding to the support hit symbol random number is acquired when the judgment result is a support hit. If the judgment result is neither, the stop symbol information of the deviation is acquired, and in the specific game states ST11 to ST13, the judgment result is a big hit without performing the support hit judgment using the support hit random number. When there is a stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number, and when the judgment result is a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired, and when the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit. It is also possible to acquire the stop symbol information of the out-of-order. That is, in the case of a high probability state or the normal electric support, the processing related to the support (steps A150a to A150b, steps A149a to A149b, steps A151a to A151d, steps A373a to A373b, steps A370 to A372, Steps A393a to A393b, steps A390 to A392, etc.) may be skipped.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only when the probability is low (normal game state ST14, third specific game state ST13), or there is no normal electric support (normal game state ST14, first). The support hit may be derived only in the case of the specific game state ST11).

[Modified example of support hit determination 3]
Further, for example, the support hit symbol or the outlier symbol may be acquired by using the special symbol symbol random number without performing the support hit determination. That is, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number may include the stop symbol information for the loss and the support. In this case, for example, the distribution rate is as shown in FIG. 60. Specifically, for example, a jackpot determination and a small hit determination are performed using a jackpot random number (see FIG. 60A), and when the determination result is a jackpot, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol symbol random number is obtained. (Refer to FIG. 60 (b)), and when the determination result is a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 60 (c)).

Then, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit and is in a low probability state, the out-of-order stop symbol information or the stop symbol information per support is acquired as the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number (FIG. 60). (D)).
If the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit and is in a high probability state, the stop symbol information of the loss is acquired.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 61 (a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22 (a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, the processes of steps A370 to A373 regarding the determination of the support hit are not performed. Therefore, in this modification, the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 24 is not performed.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 61 (b) instead of the jackpot flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22 (b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, the processes of steps A390 to A393 related to the determination of the support hit are not performed.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 62 instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 25.
In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether or not it is in a low probability state (step A462). In the case of the low probability state (step A462; Y), the special symbol symbol random number is deviated by using the special figure 1 support symbol table in which the distribution value shown in the low probability column of FIG. 60 (d) is set. Alternatively, a process of selecting per support (steps A447 to A452) is performed. If the probability is not low (step A462; N), the process of setting the outlier symbol (steps A453 and A454) is performed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 63 instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 26.
In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether or not it is in a low probability state (step A502). In the case of the low probability state (step A502; Y), the special symbol symbol random number is deviated by using the special symbol 2 support symbol table in which the distribution value shown in the low probability column of FIG. 60 (d) is set. Alternatively, a process of selecting per support (steps A487 to A492) is performed. If the probability is not low (step A502; N), the process of setting the outlier symbol (steps A493 and A494) is performed.

In this modified example as well, the support hit may be derived only in the normal game state ST14 (no low probability support). Specifically, for example, in the normal game state ST14 (without low probability support), when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information per support or the stop symbol information per support is used as the stop symbol information corresponding to the symbol random number per support. In addition to acquiring the out-of-order stop symbol information, in the specific game states ST11 to ST13, if the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the out-of-order stop symbol information may be acquired.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only when the probability is high (first specific game state ST11, second specific game state ST12), or there is no normal electric support (normal game state ST14, The support hit may be derived only in the case of the first specific gaming state ST11), or the support hit may be derived regardless of the gaming state.

[Modification example 4 of support hit determination]
The small hit symbol (small hit result mode) and the support hit symbol (support hit result mode) may be used in combination. Specifically, for example, when a combined symbol that also serves as a small hit symbol and a support hit symbol is provided and the combined symbol is stopped and displayed on the display device 41 (and the batch display device 50), the small hit game state is set. After the end, the chance mode (third specific game state ST13) may be entered.
In this case, for example, the distribution rate is as shown in FIG. 64. Specifically, for example, a jackpot determination and a small hit determination are performed using a jackpot random number (see FIG. 64 (a)), and when the determination result is a jackpot, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol symbol random number is obtained. (See FIG. 64 (b)).
When the determination result is a small hit, the small hit symbol A to C that also serves as the small hit symbol and the support symbol or the small hit symbol that does not serve as the support symbol is used as the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol symbol random number. Acquire any of the hit Ds (see FIG. 64 (c)).

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 61 (a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22 (a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, the processes of steps A370 to A373 regarding the determination of the support hit are not performed. Therefore, in this modification, the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 24 is not performed.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 61 (b) instead of the jackpot flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22 (b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, the processes of steps A390 to A393 related to the determination of the support hit are not performed.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 65 instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 25.
In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, when the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440; Y), the distribution value as shown in the high probability column of FIG. 64 (c) is set. A special figure 1 small hit symbol table for high probability is set (step A463).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state (step A464), and if it is not in the low probability state (step A464; N), the special figure 1 small hit symbol table for high probability is used and the special symbol random number is used to make a small number. The process of selecting the hit type (steps A441 to A445) is performed.
Further, in the case of the low probability state (step A464; Y), a low probability special figure 1 small hit symbol table in which the distribution value as shown in the low probability column of FIG. 64 (c) is set is set. Then (step A465), the process of selecting the small hit type by the special symbol random number (steps A441 to A445) is performed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 66 instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 26.
In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480; Y), the distribution value as shown in the high probability column of FIG. 64 (c) is set. A special figure 2 small hit symbol table for high probability is set (step A503).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state (step A504), and if it is not in the low probability state (step A504; N), it is small by the special symbol random number using the special figure 2 small hit symbol table for high probability. The process of selecting the hit type (steps A481 to A485) is performed.
Further, in the case of the low probability state (step A504; Y), a low probability special figure 2 small hit symbol table in which the distribution value as shown in the low probability column of FIG. 64 (c) is set is set. Then (step A505), the process of selecting the small hit type by the special symbol random number (steps A481 to A485) is performed.

In this modified example as well, the support hit may be derived only in the normal game state ST14 (no low probability support). Specifically, for example, in the normal game state ST14 (without low probability support), when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information per support or the stop symbol information per support is used as the stop symbol information corresponding to the symbol random number per support. In addition to acquiring the out-of-order stop symbol information, in the specific game states ST11 to ST13, if the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the out-of-order stop symbol information may be acquired.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only when the probability is high (first specific game state ST11, second specific game state ST12), or there is no normal electric support (normal game state ST14, The support hit may be derived only in the case of the first specific gaming state ST11), or the support hit may be derived regardless of the gaming state.
Further, in the case of a support hit, the number of support times may be set to 1 or more, and in the case of a small hit, 0 times may be selected as the number of support times. When 0 times is selected as the number of times of support, the specific game state ends in the game. On the contrary, in the case of a support hit, 0 times may be selected as the support count, and in the case of a small hit, the support count may be 1 or more.
In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that performs so-called two types of games in which there is no big hit and only small hits can be won, a small hit lottery is performed using a small hit random number that draws small hits, and when the small hit is won. It is possible to select the type of small hit by using a special symbol random number. In this case, 0 times may be selected as the number of support times.

From the above, a game control means (game control device) that controls a game in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a start condition and generating a special game state when the result of the game becomes a special result. 100) and a normal variable winning device 37 in which the starting condition is satisfied by winning the game ball, and the special result includes the first special result (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device and the operation of the conditional device. There is no second special result (small hit), and the game control means includes a normal game state, a specific game state in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal game state, and a special game state. , And when the result of the game is a predetermined result of the second special result, the specific game state is set after the special game state (small hit game state, second special game state) is generated. It can occur, and before executing the game, it is possible to determine whether the result of the game is the first special result, the second special result, or the outlier result.
Therefore, even if it is the second special result, a specific game state can be generated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example of support hit determination 5]
Although it is said that the type of support is selected by the special symbol random number, it may be selected by the big hit random number.
For example, as a judgment value of a jackpot random number, the range per support is divided into a range of A per support, B per support, and C per support, and when the extracted jackpot random number value corresponds to the range per support, any range is used. Depending on whether it is applicable, the winning per support and the symbol per support may be set. In this case, for big hits and small hits, the type is selected by the special symbol random number, but as in the case of the support hit, the type is not selected by the special symbol random number, and the type is selected by the big hit random number. good.
In the case of a so-called two-type gaming machine that does not have a big hit and can only win a small hit, the small hit random number that draws the small hit is used to similarly draw and select the type of support. Is possible.

[Other Modifications 1]
The ordinary variable winning device 37 may be arranged at a position where both left-handed and right-handed winning can be won (for example, the lower center of the game area 32). For example, if the support hit symbol (A symbol per support, etc.) that corresponds to a relatively small number of supports is a distribution that stops frequently, the chance mode will start and end frequently. By arranging the normal variable winning device 37 at a position where both right-handed and left-handed winning can be won, it is necessary to divide the game ball into the left game area and the right game area according to the start and end of the chance mode. It disappears. Further, when the normal variable winning device 37 is arranged at a position where both right-handed and left-handed winning can be won, the large winning opening and the normal variable winning opening are located upstream of the large winning opening in the right game area. A function (nails, flow paths, etc.) for distributing game balls may be provided in the variable winning device 37. The symbol per support with a relatively small number of corresponding supports is not limited to the symbol A per support with a corresponding number of support of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of corresponding supports is less than 5 times. It may be a design per support.

[Other Modifications 2]
The result mode of the special figure variation display game may not be provided with the symbol per support (result mode per support), but the result mode of the normal figure variation display game may be provided with the symbol per support (result mode per support). That is, instead of deriving the support hit in the special figure fluctuation display game, the support hit may be derived in the normal figure fluctuation display game.

[Other Modifications 3]
In the above embodiment, when the mode is changed to the chance mode, the right-handed instruction effect is always executed. That is, regardless of the symbol per support to be stopped (the number of times of support given), the right-handed instruction effect is executed when the mode shifts to the chance mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the support hit symbol (A symbol per support, etc.) that corresponds to a relatively small number of support stops, when the chance mode is entered, a right-handed instruction effect is executed to encourage the user to accumulate the second start memory. You may. The symbol per support with a relatively small number of corresponding supports is not limited to the symbol A per support with a corresponding number of supports of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of corresponding supports is one. It may be a design per support.
Also, only when the first special figure variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game after shifting to the chance mode, when the chance mode is shifted, the right-handed instruction effect is executed and the second start memory is accumulated. You may urge.
Further, only when the normal game state ST14 is shifted to the chance mode, when the chance mode is shifted, the right-handed instruction effect may be executed to prompt the player to accumulate the second start memory.

[Other Modifications 4]
In the present embodiment, there is no time reduction for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game when the normal power supply is not supported, and the time reduction for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game when the normal power supply is being supported. The fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when the normal power is not supported is longer than the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when the normal power is supported. Not limited to. For example, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game executed when the normal power support is not supported may be the same as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game executed when the normal power support is in progress. As a result, it becomes possible to store the second start memory immediately after shifting to the chance mode. Since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variable display game with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, the game shifts to the chance mode and the first special figure variable display game ends. By generating the second start memory, it becomes possible to execute the main variation (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first special figure variation display game, which is advantageous for the player. You can proceed with the game.
If the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when the normal power support is not supported is the same as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when the normal power support is in progress, the normal power support is supported. It is preferable to set the probability of hitting a normal figure to 0 when it is not inside.

[Other Modifications 5]
In the above embodiment, when the mode is changed to the chance mode, the number of times of support given this time is always notified. That is, regardless of the symbol per support to be stopped (the number of times of support given), the number of times of support given this time is notified when the stop display time starts, but the number of times of support is not limited to this, for example, it is given this time. Depending on the number of times of support, it may be decided whether or not to notify the number of times of support. Specifically, for example, when a symbol per support (such as a symbol A per support) that has a relatively small number of corresponding supports stops, the number of times of support given this time is not notified even if the stop display time starts. At the same time, when the other support hit symbols are stopped, when the stop display time starts, the number of times of support given this time may be notified. The symbol per support with a relatively small number of corresponding supports is not limited to the symbol A per support with a corresponding number of supports of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times of support corresponding is less than 10 times. It may be a design per support.

[Other Modifications 6]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 48, the right-handed instruction effect (instruction of the launch direction) is displayed as a variation of the game to be executed next to the game (support hit game) whose result is a specific result. Changed to start at the start. That is, the right-handed instruction effect is started at the start of the variation display (t68, t78) of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after shifting to the chance mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the right-handed instruction effect may be started at the start of the variation time (t67, t77) of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after shifting to the chance mode, or the stop display time of the game per support. It may be started at the start (t66, t76). Further, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support per game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support per game).

[Other Modifications 7]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 48, the chance mode notification effect is started at the start of the variable display of the game to be executed next to the game (game per support) whose result is a specific result. bottom. That is, the chance mode notification effect is started at the start of the variation display (t68, t78) of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after shifting to the chance mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance mode notification effect may be started at the start of the fluctuation time (t67, t77) of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after shifting to the chance mode, or the stop display time of the game per support. It may be started at the start (t66, t76). Further, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support per game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support per game). Further, the chance mode notification effect and the right-handed instruction effect may be started at the same timing or at different timings.

[Other Modifications 8]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 48, the support count notification effect is started at the start of the stop display time of the game per support (t66, t76), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support count notification effect may be started at the start of the fluctuation time (t67, t77) of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after shifting to the chance mode, or the first time after shifting to the chance mode. The special figure variation display to be executed may be started at the start of the variation display of the game (t68, t78). Further, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support per game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support per game).

[Other Modifications 9]
Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the support hit symbol are acquired by using the same random numbers, but the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the support hit symbol are acquired by using different random numbers. You may try to do it. That is, different random numbers may be used as the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, and the support hit symbol random number to sort the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the support hit symbol.

[Other Modifications 10]
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is not limited to a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variable display game with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment may be a gaming machine that executes one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game with priority over the other, or the special figure 1 variable display game. And the special figure 2 variable display game may be a gaming machine that executes the game in the order of winning.

[Other Modifications 11]
As a configuration of the gaming machine, a so-called type 1 + type 2 gaming machine in which a special gaming state is generated by winning a prize in the specific area 38h may be used. FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a transition of the game state in the game machine of this modified example.
The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST14, a third specific gaming state ST13, a special gaming state ST15, and a small hit gaming state ST16. Further, in the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability that a special result is derived is always constant.

In the normal game state ST14, there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and shortens the variable time of the special figure variable display game and the normal figure variable display game. There is no time saving. In addition, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation.

The third specific gaming state ST13 is a state in which the normal variable winning device 37 has a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time to facilitate winning. If there is Fuden support, it will be possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation. When the special figure variation display game of the number of times of support is executed in the third specific game state ST13, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14.

When a big hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game in the normal game state ST14 or the third specific game state ST13, the game shifts to the special game state ST15. Then, after the end of the special game state ST15, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST13. The number of times of support in the third specific game state ST13 is determined by the type of jackpot.

When a small hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game in the normal game state ST14 or the third specific game state ST13, the game shifts to the small hit game state ST16. Then, when the game ball flows into the specific area 38h (V prize) in the small hit game state ST16, the process shifts to the special game state ST15. After the end of the special game state ST15 in this case, the shift destination differs depending on the type of the derived small hit, and if the small hit is set to 0 the number of support times, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. Further, if the number of times of support is a small hit set to other than 0, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST13. The number of times of support in the third specific game state ST13 is determined by the type of small hit.

When the game ball does not flow into the specific area 38h in the small hit game state ST16, the transfer destination differs depending on the type of the derived small hit, and when the support number is set to 0, it is normal. It shifts to the game state ST14. Further, if the number of times of support is a small hit set to other than 0, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST13. The number of times of support in the third specific game state ST13 is determined by the type of small hit.

FIG. 68 shows the fractionation rate in the gaming machine of this modified example. All small hits also serve as support symbols, and the number of support times set for each is different. As in the first embodiment, the result of only the support symbol may be provided.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 61 (a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22 (a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, the processes of steps A370 to A373 regarding the determination of the support hit are not performed. Therefore, in this modification, the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 24 is not performed.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 61 (b) instead of the jackpot flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22 (b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, the processes of steps A390 to A393 related to the determination of the support hit are not performed.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 65 instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 25, but does not perform the processes of steps A463 to A465. ..

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 66 instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 26, but does not perform the processes of steps A503 to A505. ..

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the process shown in FIG. 69 is performed in the specific area switch monitoring process (step A10) in the special figure game process. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit is in progress (step A41). Here, the small hit during the small hit is a period during which the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing are performed. If this small hit is not in progress (step A41; N), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. That is, the specific area switch 38d is effective only during the period during which the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing are performed. Further, when the small hit is in progress (step A41; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is in operation (step A42).

When the condition device is operating (step A42; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the condition device is not operating (step A42; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the specific area switch (step A43). Then, when there is no input to the specific area switch (step A43; N), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. If there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43; Y), the specific area passage flag is set (step A44), and the specific area switch monitoring process ends. Later, based on the presence of this specific area passage flag, a process for generating a special gaming state will be performed.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, the process shown in FIG. 70 is performed in the small hit remaining ball process (step A18) in the special figure game process. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861). If a residual ball error is occurring (step A861; Y), the process proceeds to step A863. Further, when the remaining ball error is not occurring (step A861; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862). When the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A862; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is terminated. When the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862; Y), a process for ending the small hit after step A863 is performed.

That is, the process for ending the small hit is performed after all the remaining balls in the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged. However, if there is a residual ball error in which the discharge cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined time has passed since the game ball finally flowed into the first special variable winning device 38, the time required for discharge has sufficiently passed. As a result, the process shifts to the process for ending the small hit. Of course, if there is a remaining ball error, it is possible not to shift to the process for ending the small hit. Therefore, the process of step A861 may not be performed.

In the process for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether or not the specific area has been passed (step A863). When the game ball flows into and passes through the specific area 38h, it is detected by the specific area switch 38d and the specific area passage flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not the specific area has been passed based on the presence or absence of the specific area passage flag. When there is a passage through a specific area (step A863; Y), the process proceeds to step A870 to generate a special gaming state. If there is no passage through the specific area (step A863; N), the process proceeds to step A864 to end the small hit game state and perform a process for enabling the special figure variation display game to be executed.

In the process for ending the small hit game state after step A864 and enabling the special figure variation display game to be executed, 10 related to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A864), and the special figure game process number is set. The processing number is saved in the area (step A865). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A866), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A867). Then, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step A868), the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared (step A869), and the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

On the other hand, when there is a passage through a specific area (step A863; Y) and a process for generating a special game state after step A870 is performed, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area to prepare (step A870), and a production command is produced. Perform the setting process (step A871). Next, the V jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step A872), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A873).

After that, it is saved in the signal external information output data area regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (step A874), and the test signal regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operation device is turned on). The operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A875).

Then, the number during the jackpot is saved in the game state display number area (step A876), the round number upper limit value table is set (step A877), and the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (this modification). In the case of, 10) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step A878). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A879), and the initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step A880). 10 rounds are set as the upper limit of the number of rounds, but since the small hit operation corresponds to the first round, by setting 1 as the initial value of the number of rounds, 9 rounds are released in the special game state. I am trying to do it.

After that, 3 related to fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A881), and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A882). Further, the V jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A883), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process (step A884) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A868.

With the above configuration, the following characteristic game progress is possible.
The third specific game state ST13 is a normal game state because there is a high possibility that the game ball flows into the specific area 38h in the small hit game state ST16 accompanying the derivation of the small hit and shifts to the special game state ST15. It is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than ST14, and the longer this gaming state continues, the more advantageous it is for the player.
As a type of small hit derived in the third specific game state ST13, if a small hit in which the number of times of support is not 0 is derived, the third specific game state ST13 can be continued, but the number of times of support is 0. When a small hit is derived, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. That is, the derivation of a small hit in which the number of times of support is 0 triggers a fall into a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. By providing such a fall opportunity, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the third specific game state ST13.

From the above, the game is controlled by the gaming machine capable of executing the game based on the establishment of the starting condition and generating a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value when the result of the game becomes a special result. The game control means (game control device 100) and the normal variable winning device 37 for which the starting condition is satisfied by winning the game ball are provided, and the special result includes the first special result accompanied by the operation of the condition device and the condition. There is a second special result that does not involve the operation of the device, and the game control means includes a normal game state, a specific game state in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal game state, and a special game state. And, based on the fact that the result of the game is the first special result, the first special gaming state can be generated as the special gaming state, and the specific gaming state is generated after the first special gaming state is generated. Is possible, and based on the result of the game being the second special result, the second special gaming state can be generated as the special gaming state, and when the second special gaming state is generated, the first special It is possible to generate a specific gaming state without generating a gaming state.
Therefore, since the specific game state can be generated based on the second special result without the operation of the condition device, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the special variable winning device includes a first special variable winning device 38 and a second special variable winning device 39, and includes a specific area 38h into which the game ball winning the first special variable winning device 38 can flow. , Based on the derivation of the first special result or the inflow into the specific area 38h, it is possible to execute the first special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 can be converted into the open state, and based on the derivation of the second special result. , The second special game state in which the first special variable winning device 38 can be converted into the open state can be executed, and the game control means can be executed in the specific game state according to the type of the derived special result. If the number of executions of the variable display game is set and a special result is derived during the execution of the specific game state, the remaining number of special figure variable display games that can be executed in the specific game state being executed is discarded. It is configured to set the number of executions based on the derived special result, and 0 times can be set as the number of executions set based on the special result.
Therefore, by setting 0 times, it is possible to set to end the specific game state or not to start the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the game control means can execute the first game as a game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36, and is provided with the starting winning opening 36 in which the starting condition is satisfied by winning the game ball. The second game can be executed as a game based on the winning of the game ball to the device 37, and the number of executions of the specific game state can be set to 0 when the result of the second game is the second special result. It will be.
Therefore, by setting 0 times, it is possible to set to end the specific game state or not to start the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although a combined symbol that serves as both a small hit symbol and a support hit symbol is used, a support symbol that does not serve as both a small hit symbol and a support hit symbol may be provided.
In this case, by providing the support symbol having the support number of 0 times as the support symbol, the configuration can be the same as the configuration of the present modification described above.
Further, for the special figure 1 variable display game, only a small hit that the number of times of support is 0 is provided, but a small hit that sets the number of times of support other than 0 may be provided so that the small hit does not occur. Is also good.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the gaming value is given to the player. A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state to be given, which is specified as a normal variable winning device 37 in which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball, and a normal gaming state (normal gaming state ST14, first specific gaming state ST11). A game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) and a special game state is provided, and the game state control means is a result of the game. Is a predetermined result among the special results (in this embodiment, a normal jackpot or a probability variation A jackpot), a specific gaming state can be generated after the special gaming state is generated, and the result of the game is a special result. When a specific result (per support) different from the above is obtained, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state (see FIG. 8).

Therefore, since a specific gaming state (hobby support) occurs with a predetermined probability before the special gaming state occurs, it is necessary to suppress the amount of money spent by the player and the speed at which the number of balls held is reduced. Is possible, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
Further, since the specific game state (hobby support) may occur not only after passing through the special game state but also without passing through the special game state, the transition timing of the game state increases. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.
In addition, if the specific game state (Public power support) occurs frequently, the gambling may become too high. If the game state (Public support) occurs frequently, it is necessary to suppress the ball output in the special game state. Therefore, even if the specific game state (Public electric support) occurs frequently, the gambling property does not become too high, and it is possible to calm the wave of the ball output.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a specific gaming state (second specific gaming state ST12, third specific gaming state) when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a specific result (per support). A setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating ST13) is provided, and the setting means specifies the result of the game while the specific game state is generated. When a result is obtained, the specific game period being set can be reset so that the period corresponding to the specific result can be reset (see FIG. 10).
With this configuration, when a specific result (per support) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13), the specific game period (number of support times) is set. Since it can be extended, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a specific gaming state (second specific gaming state ST12, third specific gaming state) when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a specific result (per support). A setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating ST13) is provided, and the setting means specifies the result of the game while the specific game state is generated. When a result is obtained, the period obtained by adding the period corresponding to the specific result to the remaining period of the specific game period can be configured to be reset as the specific game period (FIG. 11 (a)). reference).
With this configuration, when a specific result (per support) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13), the specific game period (number of support times) is set. Since it will be extended, the interest of the game will be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing an effect related to a game (special figure variation display game), and the effect control means is after a special game state occurs. The generated specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) and the specific game state that occurred without the special game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13). And, it can be configured so that the effect can be executed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific gaming state (second specific gaming state ST12, third specific gaming state ST13).
The specific gaming state (second specific gaming state ST12, third specific gaming state ST13) that occurred after the special gaming state occurred and the specific gaming state (second specific gaming state) that occurred without the special gaming state occurring. In ST12, the third specific gaming state ST13), different aspects of the effect may be executed. As a result, whether it is the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) generated based on the derivation of the special result (big hit), or the specific game generated based on the derivation of the specific result (per support). Since it is possible to suggest whether the state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) is achieved by the effect executed during the specific game state, the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, a specific gaming state (second specific gaming state ST12, third specific gaming state ST13) that occurred after the special gaming state occurred and a specific gaming state (second specific gaming state) that occurred without the special gaming state occurring. In ST12, the third specific game state ST13), the same aspect of the effect may be executed.
Specifically, for example, a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state (2nd specific game state ST12, 3rd specific game state ST13). When the specific game period (number of times of support) is the same in the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST13), the same aspect of the effect may be executed. That is, for example, the effect mode of the effect to be executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot (normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment) in which the corresponding number of supports is 100, and the corresponding number of supports is 100. The effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the support hit (in the case of the present embodiment, the support hit B) may be the same.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes an instruction means (effect control device 300) for instructing the launch direction of the game ball, which is advantageous for the player, and the instruction means indicates that the result of the game is a specific result (per support). In such a case, it is possible to configure the game to start the instruction of the firing direction in response to the start of the game to be executed next to the game (see FIGS. 43 and 48).
With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately indicate the launch direction of the game ball, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Special figure fluctuation display game and decoration special figure fluctuation display game]
Next, the special figure variation display game in the batch display device 50 and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 80.

71 and 72 show a case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”. FIG. 71 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 72 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 71 (a), the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 0 during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is the result mode of "off" (the LED lamp A0 is turned on and the LED lamps A1 to A7 are turned off). (Aspects to be used). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 71 (a), the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is also the result mode of "off" (a mode in which the LED lamps B0 are turned on and the LED lamps B1 to B7 are turned off). It has become.

Further, here, since the stop display time of the special figure 1 variation display game is in progress, the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the display device 41 has the first The numerical value of the start storage number display unit 85a is "1", the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b is "0", one is in the standby storage display unit 83, and one is in the running storage display unit 84. Displays 0 decorative special figure start memory displays (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory). Further, in the batch display device 50, a mode in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 corresponds to "one special figure hold" (a mode in which the LED lamp C0 is turned on and the LED lamp C1 is turned off (a mode in which the LED lamp C0 is turned on and the LED lamp C1 is turned off). (See FIG. 4D)), and the display mode of the special figure 2 hold indicator 54 corresponds to “no special figure hold” (the LED lamps C2 and C3 are turned off (FIG. 4 (d)). d) See)).

Here, since the game result is "out of place", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. Special Figure 1 When the variable time of the variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is the running memory display. The display for shifting to the unit 84 is performed, and the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes. Here, since the first start memory is digested and becomes 0, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 becomes 0. The numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a is "0". Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 is changed to correspond to the “no special figure hold” mode (LED lamps C0 and C1 are turned off (FIG. 4 (FIG. 4)). d) See)).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, the display device 41 starts the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and displays all at once. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game starts. Specifically, the variable display of the identification information (large symbol) starts in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the first decorative game display unit 81, and the left area of the second decorative game display unit 82, The variable display of the identification information (small symbol) starts in each of the middle area and the right area. Further, a mode corresponding to the variable display on the special figure 1 display 51, that is, "during fluctuation" (LED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit and LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are lit). Display (see FIG. 4B) starts. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time starts, the special figure fluctuation display game and the decorative special figure fluctuation display game start, but the fluctuation display does not start, and the first predetermined from the start of the fluctuation time. When the time has passed, the variable display of the special figure variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game starts.

When the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure hold) occurs during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, the display device 41 shows as shown in FIG. 71 (c). As the number of the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby storage display unit 83 changes, the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 hold display 53 The display mode of is changed.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t11), as shown in FIGS. 71 (d) and 72, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "big hit" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the result modes of the “big hit”.

Further, here, since the game result is a "big hit", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t12), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 1 The variable time of the variable display game starts (t13). Special Figure 1 When the variable time of the variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 71 (f), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is the running memory display. Along with the display of shifting to the unit 84, the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

In the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special game state, and then the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the variable time. 2 The decorative game display unit 82 reappears. That is, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 become invisible at the same time as the start of the special game state, and become visible at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed on the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. Here, since the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "333" (see FIG. 71 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 71 (e) and 72, "333" is displayed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time. The first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 appear in a state where is stopped and displayed (t13). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t13 to t14). The display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 71 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 72, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t11 to t14).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t14), as shown in FIG. 72, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t14 to t15), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 71 (f). t15 to t16). After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t16), and the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t16 to t17). (T17 to t19).

As shown in FIG. 71 (g), the identification information of the first decorative game display unit 81 starts low-speed fluctuation in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and the left fluctuation display area. , The right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area are temporarily stopped in this order. In the temporarily stopped state, the identification information is displayed in a swaying manner, indicating that it has not completely stopped. As shown in FIG. 71 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t18).
In FIG. 72, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81. Therefore, in FIG. 72, “t14” is the timing at which the identification information (left symbol) displayed in the left fluctuation display area starts low-speed fluctuation, and the identification information (right symbol) displayed in the right fluctuation display area and the medium fluctuation display. The timing at which the identification information (middle symbol) displayed in the area starts low-speed fluctuation is between "t14" and "t15". Further, "t16" is the timing at which the left symbol ends the high-speed fluctuation (starts the low-speed fluctuation), and the timing at which the right symbol and the middle symbol end the high-speed fluctuation (starts the low-speed fluctuation) is "t16" and "t17". Between. Further, "t17" is the timing when the left symbol starts the temporary stop, "t18" is the timing when the right symbol starts the temporary stop, and the timing when the middle symbol starts the temporary stop is "t18" and "t19". Is between.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t14 to t19), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, during the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t14 to t19), the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 1 display 51) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "changing".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t19), as shown in FIGS. 71 (i) and 72, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "off" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state. If there is a start memory, the next special figure variation display game will start. If the result is a big hit, it is in the first special game state, and if it is a small hit, it is in the second special game state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 71 (i) is different from FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (i). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 71 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the "hit" result mode. The display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the "hit" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”, the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next is executed. At the start of (t13 to t14), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of the “big hit”, and the special figure 1 of the batch display device 50 The display mode of the display 51 is a result mode of "big hit".
Therefore, in this case, the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 are in a consistent state. , The variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display 51) and the variation of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next. The display (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed after the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "small hit", or when the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "missing" is executed, special figure 1 is executed. Similarly, when the variable display game is executed, the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned with each other, and then the next The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next are started.

That is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the special figure 1 display 51 The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next, while the stop symbols of Will be started.
Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game, the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the special figure 2 display are similarly executed. With the stop symbol of 52 consistent, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next. And will be started.

73 and 74 show a case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”. FIG. 73 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 74 is an example of a timing chart. Since FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b) are diagrams showing the same states as those of FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.
Special Figure 1 When a game ball wins a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 and a second start memory (second special figure hold) occurs during execution of the variable display game, the display device 41 is shown in FIG. 73 (c). In, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t21), as shown in FIGS. 73 (d) and 74, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "big hit" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the result modes of the “big hit”.

Further, here, since the game result is "big hit", the first start memory number is 0, and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t22), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 2 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game starts (t23). Special Figure 2 When the fluctuation time of the variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 73 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83. After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (f), a display is performed in which the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 shifts to the running storage display unit 84, and the second start is performed. The numerical value of the storage number display unit 85b changes. Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

In the present embodiment, from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the transition effect (the effect of shifting the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 to the running memory display unit 84). The time is when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game (FIGS. 71 (a), (b), FIG. 71 (e), (f), FIG. 73 (a), (. (B)), when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game, and when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed after the special figure 1 variable display game (FIG. 73 (Fig. 73). e) and (f) are the same as when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game. In the present embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the transition effect is set to, for example, the second predetermined time shorter than the first predetermined time (the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display).

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory has a circular shape, and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory has a hexagonal shape. That is, in the present embodiment, the shape of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the shape of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory are different from each other, so that the decorative feature being displayed is displayed. Figure Notifies which of the first start memory and the second start memory the start memory display corresponds to. Of course, by changing the display mode (for example, color or size) other than the shape, it is notified whether the decorative special figure start memory display being displayed corresponds to the first start memory or the second start memory. You may try to do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special gaming state, and then the first decorative game is displayed at the same time as the start of the variable time. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed on the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. Here, since the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "333" (see FIG. 73 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 73 (e) and 74, "333" is displayed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time. The first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 appear in a state where is stopped and displayed (t23). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t23 to t24). The display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as those before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 73 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 74, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t21 to t24).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t24), as shown in FIG. 74, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t24 to t25), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 73 (f). t25 to t26). After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t26), and the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t26 to t27). (T27 to t29). As shown in FIG. 73 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left variation display area and the right variation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach variation is started (t28).
In FIG. 74, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t24 to t29), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, during the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t24 to t29), the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 2 display 52) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "changing".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t29), as shown in FIGS. 73 (i) and 74, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "off" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 73 (i) is different from FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (i). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 73 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the "hit" result mode. The display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the "hit" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”, the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next is executed. At the start of (t23 to t24), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of "big hit". Further, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the result of the previous special figure 2 variable display game is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50. Therefore, when the result of the previous special figure 2 variable display game is “missing”, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to In t24), the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 is the result mode of “off”.

Therefore, there is a case where the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 2 is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "big hit". When executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 2 display 52 are aligned. The variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (variable display on the special figure 2 display 52) and the decorative special figure variable display corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

Further, in the case where the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "small hit". Similarly, when the two variable display game is executed, the stop symbol (small hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 2 display 52 are displayed. The variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next are started in a state of inconsistency with. The Rukoto.

That is, there is a case where the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 2 is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 2 display 52 are aligned. In this state, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next are started. Become.

In the case where the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 variable display is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "hit". In order to start the variable display in a state where the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 are aligned when the game is executed. At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t23 to t24) to be executed next, the result mode of "off" is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 (previous game). The result (“hit” result mode) may be displayed and then the “miss” result mode may be displayed, or the “miss” result mode may be displayed without displaying the previous game result). There is a need to. Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t23 to t24) to be executed next, it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 2 display 52.

Then, the player may be given the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the special figure start memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 are inconsistent, they are inconsistent. Since the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is started, it is possible to prevent the game situation from being erroneously recognized and to the player. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

75 and 76 show a case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”. FIG. 75 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 76 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 75A, the first start memory number is 0 and the second start memory number is 1 during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is the result mode of "off". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75 (a), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is also a result mode of “off”.

Here, since the game result is "off", the first start memory number is 0, and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. Special Figure 2 When the fluctuation time of the variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is the running memory display. Along with the display of shifting to the unit 84, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41 starts the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, and displays all at once. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts.
When the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure hold) occurs during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41 shows as shown in FIG. 75 (c). The numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t31), as shown in FIGS. 75 (d) and 76, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "big hit" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the result modes of the “big hit”.

Further, here, since the game result is a "big hit", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t32), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 1 The variable time of the variable display game starts (t33). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 75 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83. After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (f), a display is performed in which the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 shifts to the running storage display unit 84, and the first start is performed. The numerical value of the storage number display unit 85a changes. Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special gaming state, and then the first decorative game is displayed at the same time as the start of the variable time. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed on the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. Here, since the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "333" (see FIG. 75 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 75 (e) and 76, "333" is displayed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time. The first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 appear in a state where is stopped and displayed (t33). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t33 to t34). , The display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 does not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 75 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game also starts when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 76, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t31 to t34).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t34), as shown in FIG. 76, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t34 to t35), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 75 (f). t35 to t36). After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t36), and the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t36 to t37). (T37 to t39). As shown in FIG. 75 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t38).
In FIG. 76, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t34 to t39), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, during the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t34 to t39), the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 1 display 51) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "changing".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t39), as shown in FIGS. 75 (i) and 76, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "off" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 75 (i) is different from FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (i). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 75 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the "hit" result mode. The display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the "hit" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”, the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next is executed. At the start of (t33 to t34), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of "big hit". Further, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the result of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50. Therefore, when the result of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is "off", as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to). In t34), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50 is the result mode of “off”.

Therefore, there is a case where the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "big hit". When executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned. The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (variable display on the special figure 1 display 51) and the decorative special figure variable display corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

Further, there is a case where the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 2 is next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "small hit". Similarly, when the 1 variable display game is executed, the stop symbol (small hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 are executed. The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next are started in a state of inconsistency with. The Rukoto.

That is, there is a case where the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned. In this state, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next are started. Become.

In the case where the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display is next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "hit". In order to start the variable display in a state where the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned when the game is executed. At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t33 to t34) to be executed next, the result mode of "off" is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 (previous game). The result (“hit” result mode) may be displayed and then the “miss” result mode may be displayed, or the “miss” result mode may be displayed without displaying the previous game result). There is a need to. Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t33 to t34) to be executed next, it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 1 display 51.

Then, the player may be given the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the special figure start memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display 51 are inconsistent, they are inconsistent. Since the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, it is possible to prevent the game situation from being erroneously recognized and to the player. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

77 and 78 show a case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is “normal jackpot”. FIG. 77 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 78 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 77 (a), the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 0 during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is the result mode of "off". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 77 (a), the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the result modes of the “probability variation jackpot”.

Here, since the game result is "out of place", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. Special Figure 1 When the variable time of the variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is the running memory display. Along with the display of shifting to the unit 84, the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, the display device 41 starts the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and displays all at once. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game starts.
Special Figure 1 When a game ball wins a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 and a second start memory (second special figure hold) occurs during execution of the variable display game, the display device 41 is shown in FIG. 77 (c). In, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t41), as shown in FIGS. 77 (d) and 78, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is a "normal jackpot", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the result modes of the "normal jackpot". In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the result modes of the "normal jackpot".

Further, here, since the game result is "big hit", the first start memory number is 0, and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t42), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 2 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game starts (t43). Special Figure 2 When the fluctuation time of the variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83. After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (f), a display is performed in which the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 shifts to the running storage display unit 84, and the second start is performed. The numerical value of the storage number display unit 85b changes. Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special gaming state, and then the first decorative game is displayed at the same time as the start of the variable time. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed on the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. Here, since the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "222" (see FIG. 77 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 77 (e) and 78, "222" is displayed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time. The first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 appear in a state where is stopped and displayed (t43). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t43 to t44). The display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 do not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as those before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 77 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 78, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t41 to t44).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t44), as shown in FIG. 78, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t44 to t45), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 77 (f) (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify). t45 to t46). After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t46), and the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t46 to t47). (T47 to t49). As shown in FIG. 77 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t48).
In FIG. 78, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t44 to t49), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, during the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t44 to t49), the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 2 display 52) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "changing".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t49), as shown in FIGS. 77 (i) and 78, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "off" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 77 (i) of FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (i) is different. Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 77 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the "hit" result mode. The display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the "hit" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 2 variable display to be executed next is executed. At the start of the game (t43 to t44), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of "normal jackpot". Further, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the result of the previous special figure 2 variable display game is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50. Therefore, when the result of the previous special figure 2 variable display game is "probability variation jackpot", as shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43). In ~ t44), the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 is the result mode of the “probability variation jackpot”.

Therefore, there is a case where the result mode of "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the result is "normal jackpot" next to the special figure 1 variable display game. FIG. 2 When executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (normal jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (probability variable jackpot symbol) of the special figure 2 display 52 are executed. ) Is inconsistent with the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (variable display on the special figure 2 display 52) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

Further, when the result mode of the "normal jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is the "probability variable jackpot" is next to the special figure 1. FIG. 2 Similarly, when the variable display game is executed, the stop symbol (probability variation jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 (normal jackpot) are executed. In a state where the symbol) does not match, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next are displayed. It will be started.

That is, there is a case where the result mode of the "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit. When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the variable display game, the stop symbol (second jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the special figure 2 In a state where the stop symbol (first jackpot symbol) of the display 52 does not match, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the special figure variable display game will be started.
Here, one of the "normal jackpot" and the "probability variable jackpot" is defined as the "first jackpot" and the other is designated as the "second jackpot", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when one of "10R jackpot", "7R jackpot" and "2R jackpot" is set as "first jackpot" and the other one is set as "second jackpot", the stop symbol is similarly set. The variable display of the next game will be started in an inconsistent state.

For example, in the case where the result mode of the "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is the "normal jackpot" is next to the special figure 1. FIG. 2 When executing a variable display game, variable display is started in a state where the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 are aligned. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t43 to t44) to be executed next, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are provided with the result mode of "probability variation jackpot". The display (the result mode of the previous game result (“normal jackpot” result mode) may be displayed and then the result mode of the “probability change jackpot” may be displayed, or the result of the “probability change jackpot” may be displayed without displaying the previous game result. The mode may be displayed). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t43 to t44) to be executed next, it is necessary to display the result mode of the "normal big hit" on the special figure 2 display 52.

Then, the player may be given the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the special figure start memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 are inconsistent, they are inconsistent. Since the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is started, it is possible to prevent the game situation from being erroneously recognized and to the player. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific region (probability variation operation region), so that even if the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot. If the game ball does not flow into the specific area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is a normal big hit, if the game ball flows into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

79 and 80 show a case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game whose result is “normal jackpot”. FIG. 79 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 80 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 79 (a), the first start memory number is 0 and the second start memory number is 1 during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is the result mode of "off". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 79 (a), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the result modes of the “probability variation jackpot”.

Here, since the game result is "off", the first start memory number is 0, and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. Special Figure 2 When the fluctuation time of the variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is the running memory display. Along with the display of shifting to the unit 84, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41 starts the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, and displays all at once. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts.
When the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure hold) occurs during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41 shows as shown in FIG. 79 (c). The numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t51), as shown in FIGS. 79 (d) and 80, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. Here, since the game result is a "normal jackpot", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the result modes of the "normal jackpot". In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the result modes of the "normal jackpot".

Further, here, since the game result is a "big hit", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t52), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 1 The variable time of the variable display game starts (t53). Special Figure 1 When the fluctuation time of the variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 79 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83. After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (f), a display is performed in which the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 shifts to the running storage display unit 84, and the first start is performed. The numerical value of the storage number display unit 85a changes. Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special gaming state, and then the first decorative game is displayed at the same time as the start of the variable time. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed on the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. Here, since the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "222" (see FIG. 79 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 79 (e) and 80, "222" is displayed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time. The first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 appear in a state where is stopped and displayed (t53). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t53 to t54). The display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 do not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as those before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 79 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 80, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t51 to t54).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t54), as shown in FIG. 80, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t54 to t55), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 79 (f). t55-t56). After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t56), and the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t56 to t57). (T57 to t59). As shown in FIG. 79 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t58).
In FIG. 80, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t54 to t59), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, during the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t54 to t59), the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 1 display 51) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "changing".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t59), as shown in FIGS. 79 (i) and 80, the variable display ends in the display device 41. The game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running memory display unit 84 (decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory). Display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "off" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 79 (i) is different from FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (i). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 79 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the "hit" result mode. The display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the "hit" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 1 variable display to be executed next is executed. At the start of the game (t53 to t54), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of "normal jackpot". Further, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the result of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50. Therefore, when the result of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is "probability variation jackpot", as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53). In ~ t54), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50 is the result mode of the “probability variation jackpot”.

Therefore, there is a case where the result mode of the "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is the "normal jackpot" is next to the special figure 2. FIG. 1 When executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (normal jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (probability variable jackpot symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 are executed. ) Is inconsistent with the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (variable display on the special figure 1 display 51) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

Further, when the result mode of the "normal jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is the "probability variable jackpot" is next to the special figure 2. FIG. 1 Similarly, when the variable display game is executed, the stop symbol (probability variation jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 (normal jackpot) are executed. In a state where the symbol) does not match, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next are displayed. It will be started.

That is, there is a case where the result mode of the "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit. FIG. 2 When executing the special figure 1 variable display game after the variable display game, the stop symbol (second jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the special figure 1 In a state where the stop symbol (first jackpot symbol) of the display 51 does not match, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the special figure variable display game will be started.
Here, one of the "probability variable jackpot" and the "normal jackpot" is defined as the "first jackpot" and the other is designated as the "second jackpot", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when one of "10R jackpot", "7R jackpot" and "2R jackpot" is set as "first jackpot" and the other one is set as "second jackpot", the stop symbol is similarly set. The variable display of the next game will be started in an inconsistent state.

For example, in the case where the result mode of the "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is the "normal jackpot" is next to the special figure 2. FIG. 1 When executing a variable display game, variable display is started in a state where the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t53 to t54) to be executed next, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are provided with the result mode of "probability variation jackpot". The display (the result mode of the previous game result (“normal jackpot” result mode) may be displayed and then the result mode of the “probability change jackpot” may be displayed, or the result of the “probability change jackpot” may be displayed without displaying the previous game result. The mode may be displayed). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t53 to t54) to be executed next, it is necessary to display the result mode of the "normal big hit" on the special figure 1 display 51.

Then, the player may be given the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the special figure start memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display 51 are inconsistent, they are inconsistent. Since the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, it is possible to prevent the game situation from being erroneously recognized and to the player. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the first display device 41 If the stop symbol of the decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50 are matched, they remain in the matched state. The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and if they are not consistent, the special figure remains in the inconsistent state. Since the variable display of the 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, the game can be smoothly progressed.

Further, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the first decorative game display unit 81 and the first display device 41 of the display device 41 If the stop symbol of the two-decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 match, the special figure 2 variable display game remains in the matched state. And the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game is started, and if it is not consistent, the special figure 2 variation display game and the special figure 2 are in the inconsistent state. FIG. 2 Decorative special figure corresponding to the variable display game Since the variable display of the variable display game is started, the game can be smoothly progressed.

Hereinafter, when the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 match at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 2 The case where the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 match at the start of the variable display game is simply "matched". If there is, it is called.
Further, when the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 do not match at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 The case where the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 do not match at the start of the variable display game is simply "matched". If not, it is called.

In the above description, as an example of "in the case of matching", a case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a case where the special figure 2 variable display game is followed by the special figure 2 variable display game. Although the case of executing the display game is mentioned, the “case of matching” is not limited to these cases. For example, in the case where the result mode of "big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "big hit". When the variable display game is executed, or when the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 shows the result mode of "off" as a stop, the special figure 1 variable display in which the result is "off". When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the game, it is also “when consistent”.

Further, in the above description, as an example of "inconsistency", the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the result is "hit". When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game (see FIGS. 73 and 74), the result mode of “missing” on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50 When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game (see FIGS. 75 and 76) in which is stopped and the result is "hit", the batch display device 50 The special figure 2 variable display game is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result mode of the "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the above, and the result is the "second big hit". (See FIGS. 77 and 78) and when the result mode of "first jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the result is "second jackpot". The case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game (see FIGS. 79 and 80) is mentioned, but the “inconsistent case” is limited to these cases. Not done. For example, when the result mode of "hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the result is "missing", the special figure 2 variation is next to the special figure 1 variation display game. When a display game is executed, or when the result mode of "either big hit or small hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the result is "big hit or small hit". When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game which is "one of the hits", it is also "inconsistent".

Here, the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 starts low-speed fluctuation (starts fluctuation display) in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and then left. High-speed fluctuation is started at the same time in the fluctuation display area, right fluctuation display area, and medium fluctuation display area (low-speed fluctuation is finished), and then high-speed fluctuation is performed in the order of left fluctuation display area, right fluctuation display area, and medium fluctuation display area. End (start low-speed fluctuation).
As shown in FIGS. 72, 74, 76, 78, and 80, the effect control device 300 stops and displays the desired result mode (here, “424”) on the first decorative game display unit 81. , The identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 is set at the start of high-speed fluctuation (t15, t25, t35, t45, t55) and at the end of high-speed fluctuation (t16, t26, t36, t46, t56). ).

For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 72, 74, and 76, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333", the variation display starting from "333" starts (t14, t24, t34). Then, the effect control device 300 starts the fluctuation display starting from "333" from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "123") at the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (t15, t25, t35). The first replacement process for replacing the variable display is executed. Further, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (t16, t26, t36), the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode is displayed on the game result and the remaining fluctuation time (t16 to t19, t26 to t29, t36 to t39). The second replacement process is executed to replace the fluctuation display starting from the result mode calculated back based on the fluctuation pattern (whether or not the reach state is generated, etc.).

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 80, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is “222”, the variation display starting from “222” starts (t44, t54). Then, the effect control device 300 displays the fluctuation display starting from "222" at the start of high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (t45, t55), and the fluctuation display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "123"). The first replacement process of replacing with is executed. Further, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (t46, t56), the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode is displayed as the game result, the remaining fluctuation time (t46 to t49, t56 to t59), and the fluctuation pattern (reach state). The second replacement process is executed to replace the variable display starting from the result mode calculated back based on the presence / absence of occurrence, etc.).
Execution of these replacement processes is reserved, for example, in variable command processing (step C236 in FIG. 41).

It is also possible to replace the large symbol during low-speed fluctuation or temporary stop display in order to stop and display the desired result mode on the first decorative game display unit 81. However, in that case, the player may notice that the large symbol has been replaced, and the interest of the game may be reduced. On the other hand, by replacing the large symbol during high-speed fluctuation as in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the large symbol has been replaced.

The timing of replacing the large symbol can be changed as appropriate during high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol.
Further, the number of times the large symbol is replaced is not limited to two, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times to replace the large symbol may be one, and in that case, it is preferable to execute only the second replacement process without executing the first replacement process. Specifically, for example, the timing may be the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (or the timing after the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol and before the end of the high-speed fluctuation, or the large symbol. (It may be at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of), the fluctuation display starting from the result mode of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is replaced with the fluctuation display starting from the result mode calculated back based on the game result etc. It is good to execute the process. Further, when the number of times to replace the large symbol is a plurality of times, the last replacement process may be the second replacement process.

Further, the first decorative game display unit 81 does not perform the reach fluctuation from the high-speed fluctuation via the low-speed fluctuation, but may perform the reach fluctuation as it is from the high-speed fluctuation without passing through the low-speed fluctuation. When not passing through the low-speed fluctuation, for example, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol, the large symbol (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 is set to the desired reach mode (desired). You may perform the replacement process to replace it with the reach symbol).

On the other hand, the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 starts high-speed fluctuation at the same time in the left region, the right region, and the middle region (starts the fluctuation display), and then starts the fluctuation display in the left region, the right region, and the middle region. End high-speed fluctuation (end fluctuation display) at the same time as the area.
As shown in FIGS. 72, 74, 76, 78, and 80, the effect control device 300 stops and displays the desired result mode (here, “424”) on the second decorative game display unit 82. , The identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is replaced at the end of the high-speed fluctuation (t19, t29, t39, t49, t59). Specifically, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbol, the third replacement process is configured to replace the small symbol stopped and displayed on the second decorative game display unit 82 with a desired result mode.
The execution of the third replacement process is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 41).

The timing of replacing the small symbol can be changed as appropriate during high-speed fluctuation of the small symbol. When the small symbol is replaced at a timing other than the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbol, the first replacement process for replacing the small symbol with the variation display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode may be executed, or the game result or the game result or A second replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display starting from the result mode calculated back based on the remaining fluctuation time, fluctuation pattern, and the like.
When executing the second replacement process for replacing the small symbols, it is not necessary to execute the third replacement process at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbols.
Further, when executing the first replacement process for replacing the small symbol, the second replacement process for replacing the small symbol is executed after the first replacement process, or the high speed of the small symbol is executed. It is advisable to execute the third replacement process at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the number of times the small symbols are replaced may be once or may be a plurality of times. When the number of times the small symbols are replaced is one, it is preferable to execute only the second replacement process or only the third replacement process without executing the first replacement process. When the number of times the small symbols are replaced is a plurality of times, the last replacement process may be the second replacement process or the third replacement process.

In the present embodiment, the time from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the fluctuation display is "when consistent" (for example, t13 to t14) and "when not consistent" (for example, t23 to t24, t33). ~ T34, t43 to t44, t53 to t54) are the same.
Further, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol is "when consistent" (for example, t14 to t15) and "when not consistent" (for example, t24 to t25, t34). ~ T35, t44 to t45, t54 to t55) are the same.
Further, the time from the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol is "when consistent" (for example, t15 to t16) and "when not consistent" (for example, t25 to). It is the same as t26, t35-t36, t45-t46, t55-t56).

Further, the time from the start of the low-speed fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the low-speed fluctuation of the large symbol is "when consistent" (for example, t16 to t17) and "when not consistent" (for example, t26-). It is the same as t27, t36 to t37, t46 to t47, t56 to t57).
Further, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large symbol to the start of the reach fluctuation of the large symbol is "when consistent" (for example, t17 to t18) and "when not consistent" (for example, t27). ~ T28, t37 to t38, t47 to t48, t57 to t58) are the same.
Further, the time from the start of the reach fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the fluctuation time is "when consistent" (for example, t18 to t19) and "when not consistent" (for example, t28 to t29, t38). ~ T39, t48 ~ t49, t58 ~ t59) are the same.

In this way, the time from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the fluctuation display, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol, and the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol Time to, the time from the start of the low-speed fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the low-speed fluctuation of the large symbol, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large symbol to the start of the reach fluctuation of the large symbol, and the reach of the large symbol. By making each time from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation time the same for "inconsistent" and "inconsistent", the variation display is started in an inconsistent state. The fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is started can be set to the same time as the fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is started in a consistent state. That is, it is not necessary to determine whether or not they are consistent when determining the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern).
It should be noted that at least one of these times may be different depending on whether the time is “consistent” or “inconsistent”. If they are different, it is necessary to determine whether or not they are consistent when determining the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern), so that the processing load increases accordingly.

From the above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variablely displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result mode of the variable display game is a special result. A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state when it becomes a mode, and as a variable display game, a first variable display game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning to the starting winning opening 36) among the starting conditions. The first variable display means (special figure 1 display 51) capable of displaying (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second start condition of the start conditions are satisfied as the variable display game (to the normal variable winning device 37). Controls the second variable display means (special figure 2 display 52) capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning), the first variable display means, and the second variable display means. A game control means (game control device 100) to be played, a first decorative game corresponding to a variable display game and variable display of an identification symbol (large symbol), and a variable display game corresponding to a smaller identification than the first decorative game. A second decorative game in which a symbol (small symbol) is variablely displayed, an effect display means (display device 41) capable of displaying, and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect display means are provided. When the second variable display game is executed next to the one variable display game, the result mode that is stopped and displayed on the second variable display means at the start of the second variable display game and the stop display on the effect display means. There is a case that the result mode of the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) that is played is not consistent, and in that case, a process for making these result modes consistent is performed. Without the game control means, the game control means starts the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game, and the effect control means is the first decorative game (and / or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game. ) Is configured to start the variable display of the identification symbol (see FIGS. 73 and 77).

Therefore, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) and the second stop symbol. 2 If the stop symbol of the variable display means (special figure 2 display 52) does not match, the second variable display game and the second variable display game corresponding to the second variable display game remain in the inconsistent state. Since the variable display of the 1-decoration game (and / or the 2nd decoration game) starts, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first variable display game may be used as the special figure 2 variable display game, and the second variable display game may be used as the special figure 1 variable display game (see FIGS. 75 and 79).
In this case, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) and the stop symbol. When the stop symbol of the second variation display means (special figure 1 display 51) does not match, the second variation display game and the second variation display game are supported in the inconsistent state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) is started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the above is not consistent, the result mode of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) becomes a special result mode (result mode of "hit"). At the end of the special gaming state that has occurred, the result mode that is stopped and displayed on the second variable display means (special figure 2 display 52) is a result mode other than the special result mode (result mode of "missing"). In addition, the number of start memories (first start memory) that is the execution right of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 0, and that of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The case where the number of start memories (second start memories) which is the execution right is one or more is included, and in that case, the game control means (game control device 100) becomes the first after the end of the special game state. 2 From the state in which the result mode other than the special result mode is stopped and displayed in the variable display means, the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game is started, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs the special effect. After the end of the game state, the variation display starting from the special result mode is started as the variation display of the identification symbol in the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) corresponding to the second variation display game. (See FIGS. 73 and 77).

With this configuration, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the effect display means (display device 41). If the stop symbol of is a hit symbol and the stop symbol of the second variation display means (special figure 2 display 52) is an off symbol, the second variation display game and the second variation display are in that state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) corresponding to the game can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. ..

The first variable display game may be used as the special figure 2 variable display game, and the second variable display game may be used as the special figure 1 variable display game (see FIGS. 75 and 79).
In this case, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) hits. If it is a symbol and the stop symbol of the second variable display means (special figure 1 display 51) is an off symbol, the second variable display game and the second variable display game corresponding to the second variable display game are supported in that state. Since the variable display of the 1-decoration game (and / or the 2nd decoration game) can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the special result mode at "at the end of the special gaming state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game becomes the special result mode" is not limited to the "hit" result mode. That is, the special result mode may be only the "big hit" result mode of the "hit" result modes, or only the "small hit" result mode of the "hits" result modes. It may be the result mode of "probability big hit" among the result modes of "hit", or only the result mode of "normal big hit" among the result modes of "hit". It may be good, it may be only the result aspect of "10R big hit" among the result aspects of "hit", or it may be only the result aspect of "7R hit" among the result aspects of "hit". , Only the "per 2R" result mode of the "hit" result modes may be used.

In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, the game control means (game control device 300) is in a state in which the start memory that is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start memory that is the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game are stored. 2 The variable display game is configured to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 2 variable display game next to the special figure 1 variable display game, a special game generated in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a special result mode. At the end of the state, the number of first start memories may not be 0 (that is, the number of first start memories may be 1 or more) as long as the number of second start memories is 1 or more.
That is, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game, the first variable display game is set as the special figure 1 variable display game, and the second variable display game is set as the special figure 2 variable display game. In order to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) after the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) in the display game, the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed. At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game is the special result mode, the start memory (second) that is the execution right of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) It is necessary to satisfy the condition that "the number of start memories) is one or more", but the number of start memories (first start memories) that is the execution right of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). It is not necessary to satisfy the condition that "is 0".

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 1 variable display game next to the special figure 2 variable display game, a special game generated in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result mode. At the end of the state, the first start memory number must be 1 or more and the second start memory number must be 0.
That is, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game, the first variable display game is set as the special figure 2 variable display game, and the second variable display game is set as the special figure 1 variable display game. In order to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) after the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the display game, the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed. At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the special result mode, the start memory (second) that is the execution right of the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) The condition that "the number of start memory) is 0" and "the number of start memory (first start memory) that is the execution right of the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 1 or more. It is necessary to satisfy both of the conditions of ".

The gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 2 variable display game.
In this case, in order to execute the special figure 2 variable display game next to the special figure 1 variable display game, the end of the special gaming state generated in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the special result mode. Occasionally, the number of second start memories needs to be one or more, and the number of first start memories needs to be zero.
That is, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 2 variable display game, the first variable display game is set as the special figure 1 variable display game, and the second variable display game is set as the special figure 2 variable display game. In order to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) after the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) in the display game, the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed. At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game is the special result mode, the start memory (first) that becomes the execution right of the "first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game)" The condition that "the number of start memory) is 0" and "the number of start memory (second start memory) that is the execution right of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is 1 or more. It is necessary to satisfy both of the conditions of ".

On the other hand, in this case, in order to execute the special figure 1 variable display game next to the special figure 2 variable display game, the special gaming state generated in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result mode. As long as the number of first start storage is 1 or more at the end of, the number of second start storage may not be 0 (that is, the number of second start storage may be 1 or more).
That is, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 2 variable display game, the first variable display game is set as the special figure 2 variable display game, and the second variable display game is set as the special figure 1 variable. In order to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) after the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the display game, the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed. At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the special result mode, the start memory (first) that becomes the execution right of the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) It is necessary to satisfy the condition that "the number of start-up memories) is one or more", but the number of start-up memories (second start-up memories) that is the execution right of the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It is not necessary to satisfy the condition that "is 0".

Further, the gaming machine 10 includes a first variable display game (one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) and a second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game). It may be a gaming machine that executes the other of the games) in the order of winning.
In this case, in order to execute the second variable display game next to the first variable display game, at the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the first variable display game becomes the special result mode, " Both the condition that "the number of start-up memories that are the execution right of the first variable display game is 0" and the condition that "the number of start-up memories that are the execution right of the second variable display game is 1 or more". Satisfy, or "the earliest start memory of the start memory that is the execution right of the first variable display game and the start memory that is the execution right of the second variable display game is the execution right of the second variable display game. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that "it is a start memory".

That is, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) stores the start memory that is the execution right of the first variable display game and the start memory that is the execution right of the second variable display game. In this state, it is possible to configure the variable display game (special figure variable display game) to be executed in the order of memory.
Then, in the case of such a configuration, if the above-mentioned inconsistency occurs,
At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. And the number of start memories that are the execution rights of the first variable display game is 0, and the number of start memories that are the execution rights of the second variable display game is 1 or more.
At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. In addition, the number of start memories that are the execution right of the first variable display game is one or more, and the number of start memories that are the execution right of the second variable display game is one or more. The case where the start memory stored first is the start memory which is the execution right of the second variable display game is included, and in those cases, the start memory is included.
After the end of the special game state, the game control means stops and displays a result mode other than the special result mode in the second variable display means, and then changes the identification information in the second variable display game. To start
After the end of the special gaming state, the effect control means starts from the special result mode as a variation display of the identification symbol in the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) corresponding to the second variation display game. It can be configured to start a variable display.

With this configuration, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) is a hit symbol. Yes, if the stop symbol of the second variable display means is an off symbol, the first decorative game (and / or the second decorative) corresponding to the second variable display game and the second variable display game remains in that state. Since the variable display of the game) can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs variable display of the identification symbol (large symbol) in the first decorative game, the display mode of the identification symbol is displayed. The variable display of the identification symbol in the first decorative game corresponding to the second variable display game can be converted into a low-speed variable display mode in which the identification symbol can be identified and a high-speed variable display mode in which the identification symbol is difficult to identify. The time from the start to the start of the low-speed fluctuation display mode via the high-speed fluctuation display mode is the result mode in which the second fluctuation display means is stopped and displayed at the start of the second fluctuation display game, and the effect display. When the result mode of the first decorative game stopped and displayed on the means is consistent (t14 to t16) and when is not consistent (t24 to t26, t34 to t36, t44 to t46, t54 to 56). Can be configured to be the same as.
With this configuration, the variable time can be set to the same time depending on whether the variable display is started in an inconsistent state or the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared with the configuration in which the time from the start of the fluctuation display of information (large symbol) to the start of low-speed fluctuation through high-speed fluctuation is different between "inconsistent" and "inconsistent". , It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs variable display of the identification symbol (small symbol) in the second decorative game, the display mode of the identification symbol is displayed. The identification symbol can be converted into a high-speed variable display mode that is difficult to identify, and after the variable display of the identification symbol in the second decorative game corresponding to the second variable display game starts, the variable display is displayed through the high-speed variable display mode. The time until the end (t14 to t19, t24 to t29, t34 to t39, t44 to t49, t54 to 59) is the result of being stopped and displayed on the second variable display means at the start of the second variable display game. When the aspect and the result aspect of the second decorative game stopped and displayed on the effect display means are consistent (t14 to t19) and inconsistent (t24 to t29, t34 to t39, t44 to t49). , T54 to 59) can be configured to be the same.
With this configuration, the variable time can be set to the same time depending on whether the variable display is started in an inconsistent state or the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared with the configuration in which the time from the start of the fluctuation display of information (small symbols) to the stop of the fluctuation display after high-speed fluctuation is different between "inconsistent" and "inconsistent". , It is possible to reduce the processing load.

In the present embodiment, both the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, but only one of the first decoration game and the second decoration game may be displayed. Specifically, for example, a mode in which the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, a mode in which the first decoration game is displayed and the second decoration game is not displayed, and a mode in which the second decoration game is displayed and the first decoration game is displayed. There may be a mode in which the decoration game is not displayed.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
For example, it is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and is a decorative special figure corresponding to the main variable (the special figure variable display game determined to be the main in each game state). In a game machine that displays only the variable display game and does not display the decorative special figure variable display game that corresponds to the irregular fluctuation (special figure variable display game that is determined not to be the main in each game state), the main fluctuation is switched. At the start of the first special figure variation display game, the stop symbol of the display device 41 and the stop symbol of the batch display device 50 may not match.
Specifically, when the special figure 1 variation display game is switched from the first game state in which the main variation is the main variation to the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation, the second game state is displayed. At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed first, the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 It may not be consistent with the stop symbol. In that case, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is started in an inconsistent state.

Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is switched from the second game state in which the main fluctuation is the main fluctuation to the first game state in which the special figure 1 variable display game is the main fluctuation, the game is executed first in the first game state. At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50 May not be consistent. In that case, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game shall be started in an inconsistent state.
As a result, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, it is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the main variable is provided in the display area of the display device 41. In the game machine that displays on the display unit and displays the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the irregular fluctuation on the irregular fluctuation display unit provided in the display area of the display device 41, the main fluctuation is switched and the first special feature is displayed. At the start of the figure variation display game, the stop symbol of the main variation display unit of the display device 41 may not match the stop symbol of the batch display device 50.
Specifically, when the special figure 1 variation display game is switched from the first game state in which the main variation is the main variation to the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation, the second game state is displayed. At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed first, the stop symbol of the main variable display unit of the display device 41 may not match the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50. .. In that case, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is started in an inconsistent state.

Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is switched from the second game state in which the main fluctuation is the main fluctuation to the first game state in which the special figure 1 variable display game is the main fluctuation, the game is executed first in the first game state. At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbol of the main variable display unit of the display device 41 may not match the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50. In that case, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game shall be started in an inconsistent state.
As a result, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and mainly different parts will be described below. Specifically, the gaming machine of the second embodiment is different from the gaming machine of the first embodiment in that the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time.

First, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 81, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. The game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a hitting ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.
The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. Information about the game, such as a background image, that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the first start winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the first starting winning opening 36.
Further, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 which has a movable member and a light emitting member, and produces a game by the operation of the movable member and the light emission of the light emitting member.

As shown in FIG. 81, the first start winning opening 36 (first start winning prize) that gives a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) to the game area 32 below the center case 40. Area) is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 82). The game area 32 below the first start winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning opening or the like.

A general winning opening 35 is provided on the left side of the first starting winning opening 36 in the game area 32 below the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 82). Further, a general winning opening 35 is also provided on the right side of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the first starting winning opening 36 in the gaming area 32 below the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is also detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 82).

As shown in FIG. 81, a normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the upper part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 82) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed. A general winning opening 35 is provided below the normal drawing start gate 34. Game balls can flow down to the left and right of the general winning opening 35.

In the central part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, there is a first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. ) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper large winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by tilting the opening / closing member 38c to the right with respect to the lower end portion. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 82).

Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), a specific area where game balls can flow in is provided, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 82) is provided so as to change the inflow probability of the game balls into the specific area. ) Is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 82) capable of detecting the inflow of the game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous for the player can be obtained. It occurs (in the present embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the end of the special gaming state). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38.

Further, inside the upper prize opening, a residual ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 82) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area is provided. ing. The number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 38a provided inside the upper large winning opening (the number of game balls flowing into the upper large winning opening), and detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e. By matching the number of game balls (the number of game balls discharged from the upper prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize opening have been discharged, and basically until this confirmation is completed. Is not open to the new top prize opening.

At the lower part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (first starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) is provided. ing. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 82). The normal variable winning device 37 includes a plate-shaped movable member 37b that can slide back and forth, and the movable member 37b always protrudes forward to prevent the game ball from flowing into the normal variable winning device 37 in a closed closed state (game). It is in a disadvantageous state for the person). Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the movable member 37b is retracted rearward by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 82) as a driving device, and the game is played in the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the ball can easily flow in.

In the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes by advancing and retreating (sliding) in the front-rear direction by the normal variable winning device 37. The movable member of the device 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side by the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, or the ordinary electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in an inverted "C" shape. Further, the normal variable winning device 37 enables the winning of the game ball even when the movable member is closed, and the game ball may be less likely to be won in the closed state than in the open state.

Game balls can flow down to the left and right of the normal variable winning device 37. An out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided in the flow path on the right side of the ordinary variable winning device 37. Further, the flow path on the left side of the normal variable winning device 37 communicates with the lower part of the game area 32.
A second start winning opening 97 that gives a start condition for a special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) on the right side of the game area 32 below the center case 40, that is, below the normal variable winning device 37. (Second start winning area) is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 82).

Of the game area 32 below the center case 40, the game ball is not accepted on the right side of the first start winning opening 36 and on the left side of the second starting winning opening 97 depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A second special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 that can be converted into a state that is easy to accept is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower large winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving the opening / closing member 39c back and forth (sliding). The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 82). The front side of the game area 32 on the right side is covered with a transparent plate capable of seeing through the game area 32.
Further, on the lower left side of the game board main body 80, which is outside the game area 32, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are collectively executed. A display device 50 is provided.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal variable winning device 37 is not a second start winning area in which the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is given a start condition, but the special figure 1 variable. The special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) is located below the normal variable winning device 37 and the point that is the first start winning area that gives the start condition of the display game (1st special figure variable display game). It is different from the game machine 10 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 3) in that a second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) that gives the start condition of the above is provided.

FIG. 82 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 82, in the game control device 100 of the present embodiment, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the start port 3 switch 97a in the second start winning opening 97. It is different from the game control device 100 (see FIG. 5) of the first embodiment.

FIG. 83 shows an example of the distribution rate in this embodiment.
In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the small hit determination (small hit lottery) and the support hit determination (support lottery) are performed using the same random numbers as the big hit determination (big hit lottery). That is, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination, the small hit determination, and the support hit determination are performed using the big hit random number (see FIG. 83 (a)), and when the determination result is a big hit, the special symbol random number is used. The stop symbol information corresponding to (see FIG. 83 (b)) is acquired, and when the determination result is a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 83 (c)). If the judgment result is a support, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 83 (d)), and if the judgment result is neither, the out-of-order stop symbol information is obtained. get. It should be noted that the support hit may be derived only in the low probability state (normal game state ST24, third specific game state ST23), or in the state without normal electric support (normal game state ST24, first). The support hit may be derived only in the case of the specific game state ST21), or the support hit may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST24 (no low probability support).

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the present embodiment.
The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST24, a first specific gaming state ST21, a second specific gaming state ST22, and a third specific gaming state ST23. In addition to this, there are a first special gaming state (big hit gaming state) based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special gaming state (small hit gaming state) based on the second special result (small hit). However, it is omitted here.

In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result (big hit) to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, and the game. The main starting area, which is the starting area to be mainly aimed at in the state, the main variable special map, which is the type of the special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first start winning opening 36 by hitting left, and aiming for a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second starting winning opening 97 by hitting right. You can do it. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will.
Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1.

In the normal game state ST24, the special figure probability is a low probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game or normal Figure Fluctuation display There is no time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. In addition, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variation special figure is a special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST24, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state ST24. ..

In the first specific game state ST21, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, but the special figure changing display. There is a certain time reduction for shortening the fluctuation time of games and normal map fluctuation display games. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit RUSH. The main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 97, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the second starting winning opening 97. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In this first specific game state ST21, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST24, and the special figure is aimed at the second start winning opening 97 by hitting right. 2 It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game. Since the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher small hit probability than the special figure 1 variable display game, and the small hit has a higher probability of winning than the big hit, the small hit is high in this first specific gaming state ST21. It occurs frequently and the player's ball is increased. Since small hits occur frequently in this way, the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

The second specific game state ST22 is a state in which the special figure probability is high, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is Fuden support, it will be possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In the second specific game state ST22, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST24, and the right-handed hit is aimed at the normal variation winning device 37, and the special figure 1 is aimed at. It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game.
The third specific game state ST23 is the same as the second specific game state ST22 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

Of these four gaming states, the normal gaming state ST24 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The third specific game state ST23 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST24 because it has a general electric support, and the second specific game state ST22 is a high probability state, so that the normal game state ST24 and the third specific game state ST24 and the third. This is a state more advantageous to the player than the specific game state ST23. The first specific game state ST21 is a high-probability state, and further, the player's ball is increased due to the frequent occurrence of small hits. Therefore, the normal game state ST24, the second specific game state ST22, and the third specific game State It is a state more advantageous to the player than ST23.
In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), there are two types of jackpots in the special figure 1 variable display game, a probability variation A jackpot and a normal jackpot, and in the special figure 2 variable display game. There are three types of jackpots: probability variation A jackpot, probability variation B jackpot, and normal jackpot.

The transition of the game state is performed by the end of the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result (big hit), the derivation per support, and the digestion of the specified number of games. Therefore, the gaming state does not shift due to the end of the second special gaming state based on the derivation of the second special result (small hit).
Basically, if the special result that triggered the start of the special game state is a normal jackpot that is set to a low probability state after the end of the special game state, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST23, and the special Of the probability variation jackpots that are set to the high probability state after the end of the gaming state, if the probability variation A jackpot is the probability variation A jackpot, the process shifts to the second specific game state ST22, and if the probability variation B jackpot is the probability variation B jackpot, the process shifts to the first specific game state ST21. ..

Specifically, when the probability variation A jackpot is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game and the special gaming state is entered, and V is passed in the special gaming state (the specific area of the first special variation winning device 38 (probability variation operation area). ) When the game ball flows in and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), the process shifts to the second specific game state ST22 after the end of the special game state. In addition, as a result of the special figure variation display game, the probability variation B jackpot is derived and the game is in the special gaming state, and when V is passed in the special gaming state (the game is played in the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38). When the ball flows in and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), the game shifts to the first specific game state ST21 after the end of the special game state. In addition, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a normal jackpot is derived and a special game state is set, and when V is not passed in the special game state (a game ball in a specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38). If the game does not flow in), the game shifts to the third specific game state ST23 after the end of the special game state. Since the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23 have the same chance mode as the effect mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the mode has changed.

It should be noted that the number of STs (for example, 2000 times), which is the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high probability state, is set, and the special figure variation display game is executed from the end of the special game state in the first specific game state ST21. When the number of times reaches the ST number of times, the game may shift to the normal game state ST24.
Further, the number of STs (for example, 2000 times), which is the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high probability state, is set, and the special figure variation display game is executed from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST22. When the number of times reaches the ST number of times, the game may shift to the normal game state ST24 (or the third specific game state ST23).
Further, in FIG. 84, the transition of the gaming state when the jackpot is derived as a result of the irregular fluctuation is omitted. Specifically, although not shown in FIG. 84, for example, in the normal game state ST24, the second specific game state ST22, and the third specific game state ST23, as a result of irregular fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). When the probability change B jackpot is derived and the game is in the special game state and V is passed in the special game state (the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 and the specific area switch 38d is used. If detected), the game shifts to the first specific game state ST21 after the end of the special game state.

When a normal jackpot is derived and the game shifts to the third specific game state ST23, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST23 until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving the big hit or the support hit in the specific game state ST23, the game shifts to the normal game state ST24. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times the jackpot is normally supported is set to "100 times". The number of times the jackpot is normally supported is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the probability variation jackpot A is derived and the game shifts to the second specific game state ST22, it is possible to stay in the second specific game state ST22 until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving the big hit or the support hit in the second specific game state ST22, the game shifts to the first specific game state ST21. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support for the probability variation A jackpot is set to "1000 times". The number of times the probabilistic A jackpot is supported is not limited to "1000 times" and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be "until the next jackpot or support hit".

Further, as described above, the transition of the gaming state is also performed by the derivation per support.
Specifically, in the normal game state ST24 and the third specific game state ST23, when a support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the third specific game state is performed after the end of the special figure variation display game. Move to ST23. Further, in the first specific game state ST21 and the second specific game state ST22, when a support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the second specific game state ST22 is performed after the end of the special figure variation display game. Move to. That is, the transition (transition) of the gaming state when the probabilistic jackpot or the normal jackpot is derived goes through the special gaming state, whereas the transition (transition) of the gaming state when the support hit is derived is special. Does not go through the game state. Therefore, for example, in the first specific game state ST21 (without high probability support), when a support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the special game state is changed after the end of the special figure variation display game. It is possible to shift to the second specific game state ST22 (with high probability support) without going through.

When A per support is derived and shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the third specific is specified until the special figure variation display game is executed 50 times. It is possible to stay in the game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), and in the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), a big hit or a support hit is not derived and 50 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed, the game shifts to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times A is supported per support is set to "50 times". The number of times A is supported per support is not limited to "50 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the support hit B of the support hits is derived and the game shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the first is said until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. It is possible to stay in the 3 specific game state ST23 (or the 2nd specific game state ST22), and in the 3rd specific game state ST23 (or the 2nd specific game state ST22), a big hit or a support hit is not derived and 100 When the special figure variation display game is executed, the game shifts to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times B is supported per support is set to "100 times". The number of times B is supported per support is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when C per support is derived and shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the first is said until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times. It is possible to stay in the 3 specific game state ST23 (or the 2nd specific game state ST22), and in the 3rd specific game state ST23 (or the 2nd specific game state ST22), a big hit or a support hit is not derived and 1000 When the special figure variation display game is executed, the game shifts to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support of C per support is set to "1000 times". The number of times C is supported per support is not limited to "1000 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the normal electric support), that is, the support hit is derived in the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23. If so, reset the number of support times and reset the number of times of support corresponding to a new support (see FIG. 10). Further, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the effect mode is changed in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. It is not necessary to change the production mode in response to the change in the remaining number of support times. Further, it is possible to allow only the rank up of the effect mode and not to switch the effect mode to lower the rank.

Alternatively, when a support hit is derived during the chance mode (during Fuden support), the support count corresponding to the new support hit may be added to the remaining support counts (FIG. 11 (a)). )reference). In this case, an upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) is set for the number of times of support, and if the sum of the remaining number of times of support and the number of times of support corresponding to a new support exceeds the upper limit number of times, the remaining number of times of support is set. It may be changed to the upper limit number of times. Further, in this case, the effect mode may or may not be changed in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. Further, it is possible to allow only the rank up of the effect mode and not to switch the effect mode to lower the rank.

Alternatively, when a support hit is derived during the chance mode (during Fuden support), the remaining number of supports is compared with the number of supports corresponding to a new support hit, which is more advantageous (advantageous for the player). (1) may be adopted (FIG. 11 (b)). In this case, the effect mode may or may not be changed in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. Further, it is possible to allow only the rank up of the effect mode and not to switch the effect mode to lower the rank. Further, when the support number corresponding to the new support hit is not adopted, the support hit symbol may be displayed on the display device 41 as the game result, or as the game result, the out-of-support symbol may be displayed instead of the support hit symbol. It may be displayed on the display device 41.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is performed by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) toward the game area 32 from a hit ball launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , 1st start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, 2nd starting winning opening 97, 1st special variable winning device 38 or 2nd special variable winning device 39, or flowing into the out opening 30a and playing area 32 Is discharged from. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, a prize is won. A number of prize balls corresponding to the types of winning openings are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 82) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the gaming ball into the left gaming area (so-called left-handed) to obtain the first starting winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36. It is possible to aim for a prize in the general winning opening 35 arranged on the left side of the game, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the pachinko starting gate 34 and the pachinko starting gate 34 A general winning opening 35, a normal variable winning device 37, a second starting winning opening 97, a first special variable winning device 38, a second special variable winning device 39, and a second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the above. It is possible to aim for a prize in the general winning opening 35 arranged on the left side.

A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start memories is an upper limit number (for example, 4) based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), the number of normal figure start memories is added (+1) and one normal figure start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The number of stored numbers of the winnings for starting the normal drawing is displayed on the holding display of the general drawing of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory of starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, as a process of executing the game control device 100, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are predetermined in the normal map display unit provided in the batch display device 50 over a predetermined fluctuation time as a process of executing the normal figure variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order of the above, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed. In addition, the general drawing display unit of the batch display device 50 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the figures in a predetermined time variation, the result is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to be displayed.

When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern, which is a special result mode, is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display unit of the batch display device 50, and the normal variable winning device 37 is operated by operating the normal electric solenoid 37c. Control is performed to open the movable member of the above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the general display unit of the batch display device 50 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the out of alignment.

Further, the winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97 are the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 provided inside, respectively. It is detected by the switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (special figure start memory) of the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 is performed. For example, the maximum number of second start memories (for example, 4) is limited to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4), and the second start memory (special figure start memory) is stored based on the winning of the second start winning opening 97. Remember in. Based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97, the jackpot random number value, the special symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The extracted random value is stored in the RAM 111C as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the stored number of the start memory is displayed on the first storage display unit (special figure 1 hold display) and the second memory display unit (special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50. At the same time, it is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display on the display device 41 of the center case 40.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display (first variation display device) of the batch display device 50 based on the first start memory, and the batch display device is based on the second start memory. The special figure 2 variable display game is played on the special figure 2 display device (second variable display device) of 50. The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In that case, one of the special figure variation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, if the other special figure variation display game has a second special result (small hit) during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the one is concerned until the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit. The special figure fluctuation display game of is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) or the ordinary variable winning device 37 (first starting winning area). 1 It serves as a first execution control means for controlling execution of a variable display game (first special figure variable display game). Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area). It serves as a second execution control means for controlling the execution of.

In the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50, after performing variable display, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result and is a big hit. Then, it becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display becomes a special result mode (small hit result mode) corresponding to the second special result. It becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display of the batch display device 50 can display the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It serves as the first variable display means. Further, the special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50 can display the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97. Make.

Further, after the end of the big hit game state (first special game state), the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and the probability of hitting is high). It is possible to control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the game can proceed by (with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure variation in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on the display device 41. The display game is now running. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 changes the decoration identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It serves as a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit, but in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, the variable time is used as the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. Very long (about 10 minutes) long variation is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit left and aim at the first start winning opening 36 to play the special figure 1 variable display game. The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the gaming value is given to the player. A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state to be given, which is specified as a normal variable winning device 37 in which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball, and a normal gaming state (normal gaming state ST24, first specific gaming state ST21). A game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) and a special game state is provided, and the game state control means is a result of the game. Is a predetermined result among the special results (in this embodiment, a normal jackpot or a probability variation A jackpot), a specific gaming state can be generated after the special gaming state is generated, and the result of the game is a special result. When a specific result (per support) different from the above is obtained, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state (see FIG. 84).

Therefore, since a specific gaming state (hobby support) occurs with a predetermined probability before the special gaming state occurs, it is necessary to suppress the amount of money spent by the player and the speed at which the number of balls held is reduced. Is possible, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
Further, since the specific game state (hobby support) may occur not only after passing through the special game state but also without passing through the special game state, the transition timing of the game state increases. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.
In addition, if the specific game state (Public power support) occurs frequently, the gambling may become too high. If the game state (Public support) occurs frequently, it is necessary to suppress the ball output in the special game state. Therefore, even if the specific game state (Public electric support) occurs frequently, the gambling property does not become too high, and it is possible to calm the wave of the ball output.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a specific gaming state (second specific gaming state ST22, third specific gaming state) when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a specific result (per support). A setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating ST23) is provided, and the setting means specifies the result of the game while the specific game state is generated. When a result is obtained, the specific game period being set can be reset so that the period corresponding to the specific result can be reset (see FIG. 10).
With this configuration, when a specific result (per support) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23), the specific game period (number of support times) is set. Since it can be extended, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a specific gaming state (second specific gaming state ST22, third specific gaming state) when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a specific result (per support). A setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating ST23) is provided, and the setting means specifies the result of the game while the specific game state is generated. When a result is obtained, the period obtained by adding the period corresponding to the specific result to the remaining period of the specific game period can be configured to be reset as the specific game period (FIG. 11 (a)). reference).
With this configuration, when a specific result (per support) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23), the specific game period (number of support times) is set. Since it will be extended, the interest of the game will improve.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing an effect related to a game (special figure variation display game), and the effect control means is after a special game state occurs. The generated specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) and the specific game state that occurred without the special game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23). And, it can be configured so that the effect can be executed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific gaming state (second specific gaming state ST22, third specific gaming state ST23).
The specific gaming state (second specific gaming state ST22, third specific gaming state ST23) that occurred after the special gaming state occurred and the specific gaming state (second specific gaming state) that occurred without the special gaming state occurring. In ST22, the third specific game state ST23), different aspects of the effect may be executed. As a result, whether it is the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) generated based on the derivation of the special result (big hit), or the specific game generated based on the derivation of the specific result (per support). Since it is possible to suggest whether the state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) by the effect executed during the specific game state, the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, a specific gaming state (second specific gaming state ST22, third specific gaming state ST23) that occurred after the special gaming state occurred and a specific gaming state (second specific gaming state) that occurred without the special gaming state occurring. In ST22, the third specific gaming state ST23), the same aspect of the effect may be executed.
Specifically, for example, a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state (2nd specific game state ST22, 3rd specific game state ST23). When the specific game period (number of times of support) is the same in the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23), the same aspect of the effect may be executed. That is, for example, the effect mode of the effect to be executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot (normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment) in which the corresponding number of supports is 100, and the corresponding number of supports is 100. The effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the support hit (in the case of the present embodiment, the support hit B) may be the same.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes an instruction means (effect control device 300) for instructing the launch direction of the game ball, which is advantageous for the player, and the instruction means indicates that the result of the game is a specific result (per support). In such a case, it is possible to configure the game to start the instruction of the firing direction in response to the start of the game to be executed next to the game (see FIGS. 43 and 48).
With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately indicate the launch direction of the game ball, so that the interest of the game is improved.
Of course, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment also has the effect illustrated in the first embodiment (special effect performed during the special effect display game in which the result is "support hit", and the special figure variation in which the result is "support hit". It is possible to execute an additional effect (such as an additional effect) performed after the display game is completed. Further, also in the present embodiment, the modified examples in the first embodiment ([Modified example of support hit determination 1] to [Modified example of support hit determination 5], [Other modified examples 1] to [Other modified examples 11] ] Etc.) can be applied as appropriate.

[Support count notification effect]
In each embodiment, as described in [Other Modifications 8], the support count notification effect is started before the start of the stop display time of the support per game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support per game). You may.
However, during the fluctuation time of the game per support, it is not possible to clearly inform the number of times of support given this time. That is, after the start of the stop display time of the game per support, the number of times of support given this time can be clearly notified, whereas before the start of the stop display time of the game per support, the number of times of support given this time can be clearly notified. Cannot be clearly informed. Therefore, when the support count notification effect is started before the start of the stop display time of the game per support, the support count notification effect is first executed in an unclear manner, and then after the start of the stop display time. At a predetermined timing, the mode of the support number notification effect is switched from an unclear mode to a clear mode.

The clear mode is, for example, a mode in which "support 20 times" is displayed (Fig. 42 (g), etc.) or a mode in which "remaining 20 times" is displayed when the number of times of support given this time is 20 times. (Fig. 45 (c), etc.) and the like.
Further, the unclear mode is a mode in which the display of "support", "remaining", "times", etc., which can be used in the clear mode, is omitted, and specifically, for example, "20" is displayed. And the mode of displaying "20 GET". Alternatively, the number of times may be replaced with another unit (for example, a mode of displaying "20 pt" or a mode of displaying "20 pt GET").
Alternatively, for example, the mode with the question mark is set as an unclear mode such as "20 times of support?" Shown in FIG. 50 (c), and for example, "1000 times of support!" As shown in FIG. 50 (i). A mode with an exclamation mark may be used as a clear mode. Therefore, in FIG. 50, the support count notification effect starts before the start of the stop display time of the game per support, and at the start of the stop display time, the mode of the support count notification effect changes from an unclear mode to a clear mode. It can be said that it has been switched.

85 and 86 (a) show a case where the support number notification effect is started during the temporary stop display of the result of the support hit game. FIG. 85 is an example of the display on the display device 41, and FIG. 86 (a) is an example of the timing chart. Since FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (e) are diagrams showing the same states as those of FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (e), the description thereof will be omitted.
When it is notified that the result of the battle effect is "draw", as shown in FIG. 85 (f), the temporary stop display of the support symbol (symbol per support) starts after the reach fluctuation (for example, SP reach fluctuation). (T81). Here, since the game result is "A per support", "434", which is the A symbol per support, is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (g), the support number number notification effect starts during the temporary stop display of the support hit symbol (t82). Since the temporary stop display is in the fluctuating time, the support count notification effect is started in an unclear manner. Here, since the game result is "A per support" and the number of times of support corresponding to "A per support" is 20 times, it is unclearly notified that the number of times of support is 20 times as a support number notification effect. An effect (for example, an effect of displaying a support count suggestion image 88 described as "20 GET !!") is being executed.

Then, when the fluctuation time ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 85 (h), the stop display of the support symbol (symbol per support) starts (t83). Here, since the game result is "A per support", "434", which is the A symbol per support, is stopped and displayed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (h), when the stop display time starts, the mode of the support number notification effect is switched from an unclear mode to a clear mode. Here, from the effect of unclearly notifying that the number of times of support is 20 times, the effect of clearly notifying that the number of times of support is 20 times (for example, the effect of displaying "support 20 times" on the support number display unit 86). It has been switched to.
That is, the support frequency notification effect is a notification effect that suggests or notifies information about a specific gaming state (Public electric support). For example, among the modes of the support count notification effect, an unclear mode corresponds to "suggestion" and a clear mode corresponds to "notification". In addition, the number of times of support corresponds to the information regarding the specific gaming state.

Then, when the stop display time ends, the fluctuation time of the next special figure fluctuation display game starts (t85). When the fluctuation time starts, the chance mode (Public power support) starts, and the chance mode notification effect and the right-handed instruction effect start. Note that the start timing of the chance mode notification effect is not at the start of the chance mode, but after the start of the chance mode (for example, at the start of the variable display of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after shifting to the chance mode). You may. Further, the start timing of the right-handed instruction effect may be not at the start of the chance mode but after the start of the chance mode. Then, in the chance mode, each time the special figure variation display game starts, the remaining number of times of support is notified in the support number notification effect.

In this way, by starting the support count notification effect before the start of the stop display time of the support per game (during the fluctuation time of the support per game), it is possible to secure a sufficient time to inform the player of the support count. It becomes.
It is also possible to start the support count notification effect after the start of the stop display time of the game per support. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), it is possible to start the support number number notification effect during the stop display time (t84) of the game per support, and as shown in FIGS. 43 and 48, for example. It is also possible to start the support number notification effect at the start of the stop display time of the support per game (t66, t76). However, when the support count notification effect is started after the start of the stop display time of the support per game, the stop display time of the support per game is set to the support per game in order to secure a sufficient time for notifying the support count. It may be necessary to set it longer than the stop display time of the special figure fluctuation display game other than. On the other hand, by starting the support count notification effect before the start of the stop display time of the game per support, even if the stop display time of the game per support is short, a sufficient time is secured to inform the player of the support count. Because it is possible, smooth game is possible.

As described above, the identification information (decorative identification information) constituting the support symbol may be composed of only the general symbol (designs 1 to 9), or the general symbol and the special symbol (special for support). It may be composed of a symbol) or only a special symbol. That is, the support hit symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 may be composed of only general symbols as shown in FIG. 85 (f), or may be composed of only general symbols, as shown in FIG. 85 (i). As shown, it may be composed of a general symbol and a special symbol, or may be composed of only a special symbol. Further, the support hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 may be composed of only general symbols as shown in FIG. 85 (h), or may be composed of only general symbols, or is shown in FIG. 85 (j). As described above, it may be composed of a general symbol and a special symbol, or may be composed of only a special symbol. The same applies to FIGS. 87 and 88, which will be described later.

Further, in FIGS. 42 (a) and 85 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is displayed in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the standby storage display unit 83 executes a hold change effect that suggests a look-ahead result. Here, the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is a support hit game, which is suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display. Has been done.
Of course, the hold change effect for the start memory corresponding to the support hit game can be performed across a plurality of fluctuations (a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games). That is, in a state where the start memory stored before the start memory corresponding to the support hit game is undigested, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the support hit game is displayed in a specific display mode, and the support hit game is displayed. The specific display mode may be continued until the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to is hidden (for example, until the game per support is completed). Further, when there are a plurality of types of the specific display mode, the type of the specific display mode changes (for example, changes from the first specific display mode to the second specific display mode) while the specific display mode is continued. Is also possible.

In addition, the support count notification effect is not only when shifting to the chance mode (Public support) without going through the special game state, but also when shifting to the chance mode (Public support) via the special game state. Is also feasible. That is, the support number notification effect can be executed not only when the support hit is derived but also when the big hit is derived.
FIG. 86 (c) shows an example of a timing chart in the case of executing the support number notification effect when shifting to the chance mode via the special gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 86 (c), the display device 41 executes reach variation (for example, SP reach variation), temporary stop display of the jackpot symbol, and stop display of the jackpot symbol, and when the stop display time ends, the third 1 The special gaming state starts (t91). In the first special game state, the big hit fanfare effect, the big hit round effect (and the interval effect), and the big hit ending effect are executed on the display device 41 or the like. Further, when the mode shifts to the chance mode after the end of the first special game state, the support number notification effect starts during the first special game state (for example, during the ending effect) (t92). Since the fluctuation time is not during the special game state, the support number notification effect is started in a clear manner. Specifically, during the special game state, an effect of clearly notifying the number of support times (for example, an effect of displaying "support 100 times" on the support number display unit 86) is executed as a support number notification effect.

After that, when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special gaming state ends, and the variation time of the next special figure variation display game starts (t93). When the fluctuation time starts, the chance mode (Public power support) starts, and the chance mode notification effect and the right-handed instruction effect start. Also in this case, the start timing of the chance mode notification effect and / or the right-handed instruction effect is the start timing of the variation display of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after the start of the chance mode (for example, after shifting to the chance mode). ) May be. Then, in the chance mode, each time the special figure variation display game starts, the remaining number of times of support is notified in the support number notification effect.

In this embodiment, in the case of shifting to the chance mode without going through the special gaming state (FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)), the chance mode starts (t85) from the start of the support number notification effect (t82, t84). ) Is the period K2 from the start of the support number notification effect (t92) to the start of the chance mode (t93) in the case of shifting to the chance mode via the special gaming state (FIG. 86 (c)). And the length is set to be different.
In this way, in two types of gaming machines, the route that shifts to the chance mode (Public support) is a route that does not go through the special game state and a route that goes through the special game state, the period K1 depending on whether the route does not go through the special game state or goes through. By making the lengths of K2 different, the player decides which route to take to shift to the chance mode depending on the lengths of the periods K1 and K2 (that is, the game result that triggered the transition to the chance mode). Is a support hit or a big hit) can be easily grasped.

Further, in the case of shifting to the chance mode without going through the special game state (FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)), the start timing of the support number notification effect is during the special figure variation display game (from the start of the variation time). (Until the end of the stop display time) is set. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the chance mode via the special game state (FIG. 86 (c)), the start timing of the support number notification effect is during the special game state (from the start of the fanfare time to the end of the ending time). Is set to (between). That is, the gaming state at the time of starting the support number notification effect differs depending on whether the special gaming state is not passed or passed. Therefore, the player decides which route to take to shift to the chance mode depending on the game state at the start of the support count notification effect (that is, the game result that triggered the shift to the chance mode is a support hit or a big hit. Which one) can be easily grasped.

Further, the effect control device 300 can execute a fanning effect related to the support hit in addition to the support number number notification effect. The fanning effect related to the support hit is, for example, the support hit fanning effect that fuels the player's expectation that the support hit is derived, and the promotion of the support hit symbol (the number of supports increases). It is a support promotion promotion production that fuels the expectations of the player.
FIG. 87 shows an example of a support-hit fanning effect and a support promotion fanning effect. 87 (a) to 87 (c) are diagrams showing the same state as FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (c), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 87 (d), for example, the fanning effect per support is executed during the reach variation (for example, the SP reach variation). Here, as a support hit fanning effect, in the medium fluctuation display area of the first decorative game display unit 81, the identification information (here, “3”) that establishes the support hit symbol, the support hit symbol, the big hit symbol, and the small hit symbol An effect is executed in which the identification information (here, "2") that cannot be established is pressed against each other.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", as shown in FIG. 87 (e), the identification information for establishing the support hit symbol is both the support hit symbol and the jackpot symbol. It temporarily stops by overcoming the identification information that does not establish the small hit symbol. As a result, the symbol per support is temporarily stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "missing", the identification information that does not establish the support hit symbol, the big hit symbol, or the small hit symbol overwhelms the identification information that establishes the support hit symbol. Temporarily stop. As a result, the out-of-order symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (g), for example, the support promotion fanning effect is executed during the temporary stop display of the symbol per support.
Specifically, for example, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (f), the support number number notification effect is started during the temporary stop display of the support hit symbol. Here, the symbol per support that is temporarily stopped and displayed is the symbol A per support, and the number of times of support corresponding to "A per support" is 20 times. Therefore, the number of times of support is 20 times as the support number notification effect. An effect of unclearly notifying that (for example, an effect of displaying a support count suggestion image 88 described as "20 GET !!") is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (g), the support promotion promotion effect is executed while the temporary stop display of the support symbol is displayed. Here, as a support promotion promotion effect, an effect in which the A symbol per support (“434”) and the B symbol per support (“545”) are pressed against each other is executed in the first decorative game display unit 81.
Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "B per support", as shown in FIG. 87 (h), the B symbol per support pushes over the A symbol per support and temporarily stops. .. As a result, the B symbol per support is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (h), the numerical value shown in the support count suggestion image 88 fluctuates, and the numerical value increases as shown in FIG. 87 (i). Here, the symbol per support that is temporarily stopped and displayed is the symbol B per support, and the number of times of support corresponding to "B per support" is 100 times, so that the number of times of support notification effect is 20 times. It has been promoted from an effect of unclearly notifying that to an effect of unclearly notifying that the number of times of support is 100 (for example, an effect of displaying a support number suggestion image 88 described as "100 GET !!"). As a result, it is possible to perform a rank-up effect that makes it appear that the number of times of support has increased (added) during the fluctuation time by using the support number notification effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Next, when the fluctuation time ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 87 (j), the stop display of the symbol per support starts, and the mode of the support number notification effect is clear from an unclear mode. Switch to mode.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "A per support", the A symbol per support overtakes the B symbol per support and temporarily stops. As a result, the symbol A per support is temporarily stopped and displayed again. Then, when the fluctuation time ends and the stop display time starts, the stop display of the A symbol per support starts, and the mode of the support count notification effect is switched from an unclear mode to a clear mode.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol variation display game being executed is "C per support", after the B symbol per support overtakes the A symbol per support (during the temporary stop display of the B symbol per support). The support promotion fanning production is executed again. In that case, as a support promotion promotion effect, for example, the B symbol per support (“545”) and the C symbol per support (“656”) are pressed against each other, and the C symbol per support is pushed to win. The hit C symbol will be temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, when the fluctuation time ends and the stop display time starts, the stop display of the C symbol per support starts, and the mode of the support count notification effect is switched from an unclear mode to a clear mode.
In addition, even when the result of the special symbol variation display game being executed is "B per support", after the B symbol per support overtakes the A symbol per support (during the temporary stop display of the B symbol per support). You may perform the support promotion fanning effect again. In that case, as a support promotion promotion effect, for example, the B symbol per support (“545”) and the C symbol per support (“656”) are pressed against each other, and the B symbol per support wins the effect again. The B symbol per support will be temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, when the fluctuation time ends and the stop display time starts, the stop display of the B symbol per support starts, and the mode of the support count notification effect is switched from an unclear mode to a clear mode.

In this way, in the special figure variation display game in which the result is "A per support", when the fanning effect per support is executed, the effect of whether or not the A symbol per support is temporarily stopped is performed as the fanning effect per support. (See FIG. 87 (d)) is executed.
In addition, when the support hit fanning effect is executed in the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hitting B", as the support hitting fanning effect, an effect of whether or not the support hit A symbol is temporarily stopped (Fig.). 87 (d)) and the effect of whether or not the B symbol per support is temporarily stopped are executed. Which one to execute is selected, for example, when deciding to execute the fanning effect per support.
In addition, when the special figure variation display game in which the result is "C per support" is executed, the effect of whether or not the symbol A per support is temporarily stopped is produced as the effect of fanning per support (Fig.). 87 (d)), the effect of whether or not the B symbol per support is temporarily stopped, and the effect of whether or not the C symbol per support is temporarily stopped are executed. Which one to execute is selected, for example, when deciding to execute the fanning effect per support.

In addition, when executing the support promotion promotion effect in the special figure variation display game in which the result is "A per support", the A symbol per support is displayed as the temporary stop display of the A symbol per support. And the effect that the B symbol per support pushes against each other and the A symbol per support wins, and the effect that the A symbol per support and the C symbol per support push each other and the A symbol per support wins. Which one to execute is selected, for example, when deciding to execute the support promotion fanning effect.

In addition, in the case of executing the support promotion fanning effect in the special figure variation display game in which the result is "B per support", and the symbol to be temporarily stopped is the A symbol per support, the provisional A symbol per support is provided. During the stop display, as the support promotion promotion effect, the effect that the A symbol per support and the B symbol per support push each other and the B symbol per support pushes over, and the A symbol per support and the B symbol per support push each other to hit the support. After the B symbol wins, one of the effect that the B symbol per support and the C symbol per support push each other and the B symbol per support wins is executed. Which one to execute is selected, for example, when deciding to execute the support promotion fanning effect.
In addition, when the support promotion fanning effect is executed in the special figure variation display game in which the result is "B per support", and the symbol to be temporarily stopped is the B symbol per support, the B symbol per support is provisionally. During the stop display, as the support promotion promotion effect, the effect that the B symbol per support and the C symbol per support are pressed against each other and the B symbol per support wins is executed.

In addition, when the support promotion fanning effect is executed in the special figure variation display game in which the result is "C per support", and the symbol to be temporarily stopped is the A symbol per support, the provisional A symbol per support is provided. During the stop display, as the support promotion promotion effect, the A symbol per support and the B symbol per support are pressed against each other, and the B symbol per support wins, and then the B symbol per support and the C symbol per support are pressed against each other to C per support. One of the effect of pressing the symbols and the effect of pressing the A symbol per support and the C symbol per support and pushing the C symbol per support is executed. Which one to execute is selected, for example, when deciding to execute the support promotion fanning effect.
In addition, in the case of executing the support promotion fanning effect in the special figure variation display game in which the result is "C per support", and the symbol to be temporarily stopped is the B symbol per support, the provisional B symbol per support is provided. During the stop display, as the support promotion incitement effect, an effect is executed in which the B symbol per support and the C symbol per support are pressed against each other and the C symbol per support wins.

Further, in the special figure variation display game in which the result is "C per support", the symbol that is temporarily stopped may be the C symbol per support, but in that case, the support promotion promotion effect cannot be executed. That is, the maximum number of times of support is 1000, and since the symbol per support to which this maximum value is assigned is the C symbol per support, the rank is higher than the C symbol per support (the number of assigned supports is large). There is no design per support. Therefore, when the symbol to be temporarily stopped is the C symbol per support, the symbol per support cannot be promoted any more, so that the support promotion fanning effect may not be executed.

For example, at the start of the support hit game, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute the support hit fanning effect and whether or not to execute the support promotion fanning effect. Of the support-hit fanning effect and the support promotion fanning effect, the other may be executed regardless of whether or not one is executed, and when one is executed, the other may be executed without fail. However, if one is not executed, the other may be executed without fail.
Further, the effect control device 300 also determines whether or not to execute the support hit fanning effect even at the start of the special figure variation display game other than the support hit game. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not to execute the support hit fanning effect even at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "off" and the reach fluctuation (for example, SP reach fluctuation) occurs. Will be done. At that time, there are three types of patterns: a pattern of whether or not the A symbol per support is temporarily stopped, a pattern of whether or not the B symbol per support is temporarily stopped, and a pattern of whether or not the C symbol per support is temporarily stopped. You may choose which of the patterns to execute. If the result is "missing", no matter which pattern is selected, the symbol per support will not be temporarily stopped, and the missing symbol will be temporarily stopped.

In the example shown in FIG. 87, for convenience, the illustration of a special effect such as a battle effect executed during the reach variation (for example, the SP reach variation) is omitted, but during the reach variation, it is parallel to the support per-support effect. The special effect may be executed, or the special effect may not be executed when the support hitting effect is executed. When a special effect is executed in parallel with the support hit fan effect, at least a part of the display area of the special effect is the display area of the support hit fan effect (for example, the medium fluctuation display area of the first decorative game display unit 81). It may be overlapped in the front and back, or all of them may not overlap in the front and back with the display area of the fanning effect per support.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 87, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (g), when the support promotion fanning effect is started, in order to ensure the visibility of the support promotion fanning effect, the display mode of the support number suggestion image 88 ( The display mode of the numerical value shown in the support count suggestion image 88 is also included) and the display position of the support count suggestion image 88 has changed. In addition, in FIGS. 87 (g) and 87 (h), the display area of the support count notification effect (display area of the support count suggestion image 88) is entirely the display area of the support promotion fanning effect (first decorative game display unit 81). ), But at least a part of it may overlap with the display area of the support promotion promotion effect.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 87, along with the support promotion promotion effect, a rank-up effect (FIGS. 87 (f) to (i)) that makes the number of support times appear to have increased (added) is executed. The up effect can be executed even when the support promotion incitement effect is not performed.
FIG. 88 shows an example of the rank-up effect to be executed when the support promotion fanning effect is not performed. FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (e) show a temporary stop of "767", which is a stop symbol (common symbol per support) common to "A per support", "B per support", and "C per support". Is a diagram showing the same state as in FIGS. 42 (b) to 42 (f), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 88 (f), the support number number notification effect starts during the temporary stop display of the support hit symbol. Here, the game result is "B per support", and the number of times of support corresponding to "B per support" is 100 times, but it is unclear that the number of times of support is 20 times as a support number notification effect. (For example, an effect of displaying the support number suggestion image 88 described as "20 GET !!") is being executed.
After that, as shown in FIGS. 88 (g) and 88 (h), the suggested number of times of support (the numerical value shown in the support number of times suggestion image 88) increases each time the effect button 25 is pressed. .. As a result, it is possible to make it appear that the number of times of support has increased (added) during the fluctuation time by using the support number of times notification effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Since the maximum number of times that can be actually granted is 1000, if the suggested number of times of support is 1000, the number of times of support cannot be increased any more. Therefore, when the effect button 25 is pressed while the suggested number of times of support is the maximum value, it is shown in the number of times of support (support number of times suggestion image 88), for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (i). The numerical value) is maintained, and the display mode of the support count suggestion image 88 is changed. Although the color of the support count suggestion image 88 has changed in FIG. 88 (i), for example, the shape and size of the support count suggestion image 88 may change, and it is shown in the support count suggestion image 88. The font, color, size, etc. of the numerical value may change.

Then, when the fluctuation time ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 88 (j),
At the same time as the stop display of the symbol per support starts, the mode of the support count notification effect is switched from an unclear mode to a clear mode. Here, since the game result is "B per support" and the number of times of support corresponding to "B per support" is 100 times, the number of times of support is increased from the effect of unclearly informing that the number of times of support is 1000 times. It has been switched to a production that clearly informs that it is 100 times. In this way, when the suggested number of times of support (the number of times of support indicated by the number of support notification effects in an unclear mode) is different from the number of times of support actually given, the number of times of support in a clear form is actually reported. The number of times of support to be given will be shown. Therefore, for example, when the game result is "B per support", the suggestion number of times of support is 20 times without pressing the effect button 25 (the numerical value shown in the support number suggestion image 88 is 20). When the fluctuation time ends in this state, the effect of unclearly notifying that the number of times of support is 20 is switched to the effect of clearly notifying that the number of times of support is 100.

In the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 88, the number of times of support initially suggested is the minimum value (20 times) of the number of times of support that can be actually given, but the number of times of support initially suggested is other than the minimum value (100 times). Or 1000 times). When the number of support times initially suggested is the maximum value (1000 times), the number of times of support cannot be increased any more. Therefore, the number of times of support is maintained from the first pressing of the effect button 25, and the number of times of support is maintained. The display mode of the suggestion image 88 is changed.

Specifically, for example, when the effect button 25 is pressed three times when the number of support times initially suggested is 20, the numerical value displayed in the support number suggestion image 88 is 20 → 100 → 1000. → It changes to 1000.
In addition, when the effect button 25 is pressed three times when the number of times of support initially suggested is 100, the numerical value shown in the image of suggesting the number of times of support changes from 100 to 1000 to 1000 to 1000. ..
In addition, when the effect button 25 is pressed three times when the number of times of support initially suggested is 1000, the numerical value displayed in the image of suggesting the number of times of support changes from 1000 to 1000 to 1000 to 1000. ..
The number of times of support suggested first may be fixed, or the number of times of support suggested first may be selected when deciding the execution of the rank-up effect.

Of course, the number of times the effect button 25 is pressed in the rank-up effect is not limited to three times. In addition, an operation promotion effect that prompts the user to press the effect button 25 may be executed at the start of the rank-up effect.
Further, in the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 88, only the number of times of support that can be actually given (20 times, 100 times, and 1000 times) is used, but other times (for example, 10 times, 50 times, etc.) are also used. You may use it. Specifically, for example, the number of times of support suggested first may be set to 10 times, and the number of times of suggested support may be increased in the order of 10 times → 20 times → 50 times → 80 times → 100 times → 200 times → ... ..

In the example shown in FIG. 88, the number of times of support suggested first is displayed before the effect button 25 is pressed, but the number of times of support suggested first is displayed after the effect button 25 is pressed. It may be displayed. That is, the rank-up effect may be started when the effect button 25 is pressed, and then the rank-up effect may be increased each time the effect button 25 is pressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 88, since the game result is "B per support" and the number of times of support corresponding to "B per support" is 100 times, it is suggested that the number of times of support is 1000 times. It suggests the number of times of support that is larger than the number of times of support given to. Therefore, when the effect button 25 is pressed in a state where the suggested number of supports matches the number of supports actually given, the number of supports is as shown in FIGS. 88 (k) and 88 (l), for example. (The numerical value shown in the support count suggestion image 88) may be maintained, and the display mode of the support count suggestion image 88 may be changed. That is, instead of FIGS. 88 (h) and 88 (i), for example, FIGS. 88 (k) and 88 (l) may be executed.

When the effect button 25 is pressed when the suggested number of supports is the maximum value (or when the suggested number of supports matches the number of supports actually given, the effect button 25 is pressed. In this case), the number of times of support may be maintained so that the display mode of the image of suggesting the number of times of support 88 is not changed.
However, in that case, since the gaming machine does not respond even if the effect button 25 is pressed, there are inconveniences such as the player getting bored and misunderstanding that the effect button 25 is out of order. On the other hand, when the effect button 25 is pressed, instead of changing the display mode of the support count suggestion image 88, a movable member effect, a sound effect, a light effect, or a display effect (support count suggestion image 88). It is possible to avoid such inconvenience by executing (excluding the change in the display mode of).

However, when an effect with a high expectation of a big hit such as an effect by a movable member is executed, the player suggests that the number of times of support is the number of times of support in the chance mode that occurs after the end of the special gaming state (that is, a big hit occurs). There is a risk of misunderstanding. In addition, since the player presses the effect button 25 in anticipation that the number of supports will be ranked up (increased), the player is concentrating on the support number suggestion image 88, which is produced by the movable member, by sound, and by light. There is a possibility that the effect may not be noticed even if the effect or the display effect (excluding the change in the display mode of the support count suggestion image 88) is executed. If you do not notice these effects, it is the same as when the gaming machine does not respond even if you press the effect button 25. Therefore, by executing these effects, the player gets bored, or the effect button 25 is out of order. It is hard to say that inconveniences such as misunderstandings can be reliably avoided.
Therefore, when the effect button 25 is pressed in a state where the suggested number of supports is the maximum value (or, when the suggested number of supports matches the number of supports actually given, the effect button 25 is pressed. When pressed), as shown in FIGS. 88 (i), (k), and (l), the number of support times (numerical value shown in the support number suggestion image 88) is maintained, and the support count suggestion image is maintained. It is preferable to change the display mode of 88. As a result, the player will not be bored or misunderstood, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 88, the number of times of support is ranked up (increased) when the effect button 25 is pressed, but the trigger for the rank up is not limited to the press of the effect button 25. For example, the number of times of support may be increased when a predetermined time has elapsed (that is, automatically).
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 88, the common symbol per support is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the rank-up effect (see FIG. 88 (e)), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the game result is "B per support", the B symbol per support ("656") may be temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the rank-up effect. However, when the B symbol per support (“656”), which is the stop symbol peculiar to “B per support”, is temporarily stopped and displayed, the player grasps the number of times the support is actually given before the execution of the rank-up effect. Since it is possible to do so, there is a risk that the interest of the rank-up production will be reduced. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 88, by temporarily stopping and displaying the common stop symbol per support (“767”), which is the common stop symbol for each “support hit”, the stage before the execution of the rank-up effect is performed. Then, since the number of times of support actually given can be ambiguous, it is possible to improve the interest of the rank-up production.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the gaming value is given to the player. A game machine capable of generating a special game state to be given, the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game, and the game ball. The game control means includes a normal game state and a specific game state (Public game state) in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal game state than the normal game state. Support) and a special game state can be generated, and when the result of the game is a special result (big hit), a specific game state can be generated after the special game state is generated, and the result of the game is When a specific result (per support) different from the special result is obtained, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state, and the effect control means is the specific game before the start of the specific game state. It is possible to configure to execute a notification effect (support frequency notification effect) that suggests or notifies information about the state (see FIG. 86).
Further, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and gives the player a gaming value when the result of the game becomes a special result. A gaming machine capable of generating a gaming state, which is started by winning a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling a game effect, and a game ball. A normal variable winning device 37 that satisfies the conditions is provided, and the game control means includes a normal game state and a specific game state (Public support) in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal game state. , Special game state, and when the result of the game is a predetermined result (big hit) among the special results, the specific game state is generated after the special game state is generated, and the result of the game Is a specific result (per support) different from the special result, the specific game state is generated without generating the special game state, and the effect control means is the specific game before the start of the specific game state. It is possible to configure to execute a notification effect (support frequency notification effect) that suggests or notifies information about the state (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp the information about the specific game state before the start of the specific game state, and the interest of the game is improved.
Of course, even in the so-called 1 type + 2 types of gaming machines in which a special gaming state is generated by winning a prize in the specific area 38h, information on the specific gaming state is suggested or notified before the start of the specific gaming state (Public support). It is possible to configure the notification effect (support number number notification effect) to be executed.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and gives the player a game value when the result of the game becomes a special result. A game machine capable of generating a game state, which is started by winning a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling a game effect, and a game ball. A normal variable winning device 37 that satisfies the conditions is provided, and the game control means includes a normal game state and a specific game state (Public support) in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal game state. , Special game state, and when the result of the game is a predetermined result (big hit) among the special results, the specific game state is generated after the special game state is generated, and the result of the game Is a specific result (per support) different from the special result, the specific game state is generated without generating the special game state, and the effect control means is the specific game before the start of the specific game state. It is possible to execute a notification effect (support count notification effect) that suggests or notifies information about the state, and from the start of the notification effect depending on whether the result of the game is a predetermined result or the result of the game is a specific result. It is possible to configure the periods K1 and K2 until the start of the specific game state to be different (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the length of the period K2 from the start of the notification effect when the result of the game is a predetermined result (big hit) to the start of the specific game state, and the notification effect when the result of the game is a specific result (per support). Since the length of the period K1 from the start to the start of the specific game state is different, the result of the game that triggered the transition to the specific game state (chance mode) depends on the length of the periods K1 and K2. It becomes possible to easily grasp which of these is, and the interest of the game is improved.
The period K1 from the start of the notification effect when the result of the game is a specific result (per support) to the start of the specific game state is from the start of the notification effect when the result of the game is a predetermined result (big hit). The period until the start of the specific game state may be shorter or longer than K2. Alternatively, the period K1 from the start of the notification effect when the result of the game is a specific result (per support) to the start of the specific game state is from the start of the notification effect when the result of the game is a predetermined result (big hit). The period until the start of the specific game state may be the same as K2.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) in which the identification information is changed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the player is given a game. A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives value, a game control means (game control device 100) that controls the game, an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect of the game, and a game. A normal variable winning device 37 in which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a ball is provided, and the game control means is a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than in the normal game state ( (Public support) and special game state can be generated, and if the result of the game is a specific result (per support) different from the special result, the specific game state is not generated and the special game state is not generated. Is generated, and the effect control means is configured to be able to execute a notification effect (support number of times notification effect) that suggests or notifies information on a specific game state while the identification information is fluctuating (for example, during temporary stop display). It is possible (see FIG. 86 (a)).
Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient time to inform the player of the information regarding the specific game state, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

The notification effect that suggests or notifies information about the specific game state is not limited to the support number number notification effect. That is, the information regarding the specific game state is not limited to the number of times of support (the number of time reduction fluctuations and the number of time reductions), and can be changed as appropriate.
For example, the notification effect that suggests or informs the information regarding the specific gaming state may be a support-hit fanning effect (see FIG. 87 (d)). In this case, it is possible to suggest or notify "there is a possibility that a specific gaming state (general electric support) may occur" as information regarding the specific gaming state.
Further, the notification effect that suggests or informs the information regarding the specific game state may be a support promotion promotion effect (see FIG. 87 (g)). In this case, it is possible to suggest or notify that "the symbol per support may be promoted (the symbol per support to which a larger number of supports is assigned may stop)" as the information regarding the specific game state.

Further, in each embodiment, when the support hit is derived, the number of support times corresponding to the support hit type is set (steps A451, A491, A821), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the loss is continuous. The number of times of support corresponding to the number of times derived (so-called number of fits) may be set.
Specifically, for example, the game control device 100 is provided with a continuous execution number counter that counts the number of times that a missed game (a special figure variation display game whose result is "missing") is continuously executed. Then, when the support hit is derived, if the value of the continuous execution number counter is less than the first value (for example, 300), the support number of the first number (for example, 100 times) is set, and the continuous execution number counter is set. If the value of is greater than or equal to the first value and less than the second value (for example, 900), the support count for the second number of times (for example, 200 times) is set, and if the value of the continuous execution count counter is greater than or equal to the second value, the second value is set. It may be configured to set the number of times of support of 3 times (for example, until the next big hit).

With this configuration, the number of times the chance mode (Public power support) is supported can be determined by the value of the continuous execution number counter. Therefore, for example, the larger the value of the continuous execution number counter, the larger the number of times of support to be given, and in that case, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest due to the continuous loss.
In addition, when the number of times of support is not determined according to the type per support as in the case of this configuration, the type per support may be one type. That is, there may be only one type of symbol per support.
Of course, it is also possible to adopt this configuration for a gaming machine from which support hits are derived only in the normal mode. In that case, the chance mode (Public Den) depends on the value of the continuous execution count counter in the normal mode. Since the number of times of support (support) can be determined, there is no sense of unfairness and the interest of the game is improved.

The continuous execution count is not limited to counting the number of consecutive executions of the out-of-game, for example, a game that does not generate a special gaming state (a special figure variation display game in which the result is "out-of-order", the result. The special figure variation display game in which is "per support" may be counted, or the game in which the first special gaming state is not generated (the special figure in which the result is "missing") may be counted. The variable display game, the special figure variable display game whose result is "support hit", and the special figure variable display game whose result is "small hit") may be counted in succession.

Further, the value of the continuous execution count counter may not be used to determine the number of times of support for the specific gaming state (Public power support), but may be used as an opportunity to shift to the specific game state (Public power support). Specifically, in addition to (or instead) when the result of the game is a specific result (per support) different from the special result, when the value of the continuous execution count counter reaches the specific value, the special game A specific game state (Public power support) may be generated without generating a state. That is, a so-called ceiling function may be installed.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the gaming value is given to the player. A game machine capable of generating a special game state to be given, the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game, and the game ball. The game control means includes a normal game state and a specific game state (Public game state) in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal game state than the normal game state. Support) and a special game state can be generated, and when the result of the game is a special result (big hit), a specific game state can be generated after the special game state is generated, and the result of the game is When a specific result (per support) different from the special result is obtained, or when the number of times the game is executed satisfies a predetermined condition, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state, and the effect control means Can be configured to execute a notification effect that suggests or informs information about the specific game state before the start of the specific game state.
Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp the information about the specific game state before the start of the specific game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and gives the player a gaming value when the result of the game becomes a special result. A game machine capable of generating a game state, which is started by winning a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling a game effect, and a game ball. A normal variable winning device 37 that satisfies the conditions is provided, and the game control means includes a normal game state and a specific game state (Public support) in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal game state. , Special game state, and when the result of the game is a predetermined result (big hit) among the special results, the specific game state is generated after the special game state is generated, and the result of the game Is a specific result (per support) different from the special result, or when the number of times the game is executed satisfies a predetermined condition, the specific game state is generated without generating the special game state, and the effect control means Can be configured to execute a notification effect that suggests or informs information about the specific game state before the start of the specific game state.
Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp the information about the specific game state before the start of the specific game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

Here, the "number of times the game is executed" is, for example, (1) the number of times the off-game is continuously executed, (2) the number of times the game that does not generate a special gaming state is continuously executed, and (3) the first special. It may be any of the number of times the game that does not generate the gaming state is continuously executed.
Further, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied" here means, for example, when (1) the number of times the game is executed after the end of the jackpot game state (first special game state) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). , (2) When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the small hit game state (second special game state) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times), (3) the chance mode generated when the support hit symbol is stopped. When the number of times the game is executed after the number of times of support (for example, 100 times) ends in (Public support) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times), (4) the number of times the game is executed after the power is turned on is the predetermined number of times. When (for example, 900 times), (5) the number of times the game is executed in the normal gaming state becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times), (6) the number of times the game is executed in the low probability state is the predetermined number of times. When it becomes (for example, 900 times), it may be any of.

In addition, when the result of the game is a specific result (per support) different from the special result, the function to generate the specific game state without generating the special game state and the number of times the game is executed satisfy the predetermined conditions. It is possible to have a configuration in which only one of the functions (ceiling function) that generates a specific gaming state without generating a special gaming state is provided, or a configuration that has both functions. Is also possible.

[Decoration identification information (large design)]
In each embodiment, the decoration identification information Z (large symbol) displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 of the display device 41 is composed of a number image Z1 and a frame image Z2 (see FIG. 89 (a)). ) Is not limited. The decoration identification information Z (large symbol) may be, for example, one composed of a numerical image Z1 and a character image Z3 (see FIG. 89 (b)).

The decoration identification information Z composed of the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3 may be at least composed of the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3. That is, in the decoration identification information Z composed of the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3, in addition to the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3, the frame image Z2 and the frame decorative image Z3 for decorating the frame image Z2 are included in the decoration identification information Z. A character decorative image to be decorated (for example, an image of a weapon or an item possessed by the character), an emphasized image for emphasizing the numerical image Z1 (for example, an effect image applied around the numerical value) or the like may be included.
In the decoration identification information Z composed of the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3, the character image Z3 can be erased while leaving the numerical image Z1. That is, in the display mode of the decoration identification information Z composed of the number image Z1 and the character image Z3, the character mode in which the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 are displayed and the number image Z1 are in the display state. The character image Z3 has a non-displayed character.

89 (b), (c) and 90 show a case where a game for variable display of decorative identification information Z composed of a number image Z1 and a character image Z3 is executed as a decorative special figure variable display game. FIG. 89 (c) is an example of the timing chart and the change in visibility, and FIGS. 89 (b) and 90 are examples of the display on the display device 41.
As shown in FIG. 89B, when the special figure variation display game is finished, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. Here, the character-oriented decoration identification information Z is stopped and displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the first decoration game display unit 81.

When the next special figure variation display game starts from this state, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the variation display of the identification information starts on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (t130). ). The fluctuation display on the first decoration game display unit 81 is performed in the order of, for example, low speed fluctuation → high speed fluctuation → low speed fluctuation → temporary stop, and as the first low speed fluctuation, the left, middle, and middle of the first decoration game display unit 81. An erasing effect for erasing the character image Z3 is executed in each of the variable display areas on the right (t130 to t132). The erasing effect is an effect using the decoration identification information Z. For example, as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (c), the stop-displayed decoration identification information Z is axially rotated and displayed, and the decoration identification information is displayed. This is an effect of erasing the character image Z3 of Z.
Here, the axis rotation display is a "variable display mode in which the disk rotates about an axis along the radial direction". That is, in the axis rotation display of the decoration identification information Z, for example, a virtual disk on which the character-shaped decoration identification information Z is drawn on the front surface and the character-less decoration identification information Z is drawn on the back surface is the virtual circle. The display is such that the axis rotates about the axis along the radial direction of the plate.

In the axis rotation display for erasing the character image Z3, the virtual disk is rotated around the axis so that only the surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the decorative identification information Z of the character mode is drawn) can be seen. After the state in which only the side surface of the virtual disk can be seen, the state is converted into a state in which only the back surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the character-shaped decorative identification information Z is drawn) can be seen. When only the side surface of the virtual disk becomes visible (t131), the character image Z3 disappears, and after that, the character non-morphological decoration identification information Z is displayed. Therefore, as the state approaches that only the side surface of the virtual disk can be seen, the visibility of the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3 (decorative identification information Z) gradually decreases (t130 to t131), and only the side surface of the virtual disk can be seen. At that time, the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3 (decorative identification information Z) become invisible (t131), and then, as the state approaches that only the back surface of the virtual disk can be seen, the numerical image Z1 (decorative identification information Z) becomes visible. Visibility is gradually improved (t131 to t132).

In this way, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as the player erroneously recognizing the effect and the character image Z3 becoming an obstacle to the high-speed fluctuation by making the character non-morphic when starting the high-speed fluctuation. ..
Further, when switching the display mode of the decoration identification information Z composed of the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3 from the character morphological state to the character non-morphological state, that is, when converting the character image Z3 from the display state to the non-display state. In addition, since the character image Z3 can be naturally erased by executing the erasing effect that gradually reduces the visibility of the character image Z3, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the erasure of the character image Z3. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to feel a sense of discomfort when the character image Z3 is hidden, and the decorativeness of the game and the world view are not impaired, so that it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.
Further, the erasing effect is an effect using the decoration identification information Z, and can be said to be a variation mode different from the normal variation mode (in the case of this embodiment, the mode of scrolling from top to bottom). Therefore, at the start of the variable display, the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information Z can be emphasized by executing the erasing effect (the decorative identification information Z is variablely displayed in a variable mode different from the normal variable mode). It will be possible.

When the character image Z3 disappears, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), high-speed fluctuation of the decoration identification information Z starts in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas of the first decoration game display unit 81 (t132). .. Since the numerical image Z1 (decorative identification information Z) fluctuates at high speed, the visibility of the numerical image Z1 (decorative identification information Z) is lowered (t132 to t133).
In this embodiment, the number image Z1 drawn on the back surface of the virtual disk is larger in size than the number image Z1 drawn on the front surface of the virtual disk. That is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (c), the number image Z1 in the character-shaped decoration identification information Z is an enlargement of the number image Z1 in the character-shaped decoration identification information Z. The enlarged numerical image Z1 is adapted to fluctuate at high speed. This makes it possible to emphasize the start of high-speed fluctuation of the decoration identification information Z.

Then, as shown in FIG. 90 (e), the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative identification information Z ends in the left fluctuation display area and the low-speed fluctuation starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 90 (f), the left fluctuation display area. The low-speed fluctuation of the decorative identification information Z ends and the temporary stop starts. Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (f), the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative identification information Z ends in the right fluctuation display area and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t133), and then, as shown in FIG. 90 (g), the right When the low-speed fluctuation of the decorative identification information Z ends in the fluctuation display area and the temporary stop starts, the reach state is reached (t134).

In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 90 (e) and 90 (f), when the decoration identification information Z ends the high-speed fluctuation (starts the low-speed fluctuation), the display mode of the decoration identification information Z is changed to no character. It is designed to switch from the mode to the character mode. That is, the high-speed fluctuation is performed in a characterless manner, and the subsequent low-speed fluctuation and temporary stop are performed in a character-like manner. In addition, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during low-speed fluctuation. Therefore, during the low-speed fluctuation, the visibility of the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3 (decorative identification information Z) is gradually improved (t133 to t134).
Further, in this way, by becoming the character mode at the end of the high-speed fluctuation, the decoration identification information Z during the low-speed fluctuation and the temporary stop are performed rather than the decoration identification information Z during the high-speed fluctuation due to the decoration effect of the character image Z3. It is possible to make the decoration identification information Z of the above stand out.

In FIG. 89C, for convenience, the timing and visibility of the number image Z1 are shown as the timing and visibility of the number image Z1 displayed in the right variation display area, and the timing and visibility of the character image Z3 are right variation. It shows the timing and visibility of the character image Z3 to be displayed in the display area. Therefore, in FIG. 89 (c), “t133” is the timing to end the high-speed fluctuation (start the low-speed fluctuation) in the right fluctuation display area, and the timing to end the high-speed fluctuation (start the low-speed fluctuation) in the left fluctuation display region. Is before "t133" (see FIG. 6 (e)). Further, "t134" is the timing to end the low speed fluctuation (temporary stop) in the right fluctuation display area, and the timing to end the low speed fluctuation (start the temporary stop) in the left fluctuation display area is before "t134". (See FIG. 6 (f)).

Then, when the SP reach state is developed, as shown in FIGS. 90 (h) to 90 (j), the first superimposed effect of displaying the first superimposed image 89a superimposed on the decoration identification information Z on the display device 41 is performed. It is executed (t135-t137).
In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 90 (i), the display mode of the decoration identification information Z is switched from the character mode to the character non-mode during the execution of the first superimposition effect (t136). ). Therefore, when the first superimposed effect is started and the first superimposed image 89a overlapping the decoration identification information Z is displayed on the front side of the decoration identification information Z, the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3 (decoration identification information Z) are displayed. ) Decreases the visibility (t135), and then the character becomes invisible during the execution of the first superimposition effect (t136), the character image Z3 becomes invisible (t136), and the first superimposition effect ends and the first By eliminating the superimposed image 89a, the visibility of the numerical image Z1 (decorative identification information Z) is improved (t137).

In this way, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as the player erroneously recognizing the effect and the character image Z3 interfering with the SP reach effect by becoming invisible when the character develops into the SP reach state. It becomes.
Further, when switching the display mode of the decoration identification information Z composed of the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3 from the character morphological to the character non-morphological, that is, when converting the character image Z3 from the display state to the non-display state. In addition, by executing the first superimposition effect that reduces the visibility of the decoration identification information Z, the player can be directed to the first superimposition effect, so that the player is not aware of the erasure of the character image Z3. It becomes possible to. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to feel a sense of discomfort when the character image Z3 is hidden, and the decorativeness of the game and the world view are not impaired, so that it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

When the first superimposed image 89a disappears, it develops into an SP reach state (t137) as shown in FIG. 90 (j). Here, as the SP reach effect, an effect of slowly changing the decorative identification information Z in the medium variation display area is executed. The SP reach effect may be, for example, an effect of transforming the decoration identification information Z into different decoration identification information Z (see FIG. 53).
After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (k), the low-speed fluctuation of the decorative identification information Z ends in the medium fluctuation display area, and the temporary stop starts. As a result, the characterless decoration identification information Z is temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the first decoration game display unit 81 (t138).

During the temporary stop display of the decoration identification information Z, as shown in FIGS. 90 (l) to 90 (n), a second superimposition effect of displaying the second superimposition image 89b superimposed on the decoration identification information Z on the display device 41 is performed. It is executed (t139 to t141).
In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 90 (m), the display mode of the decoration identification information Z is switched from the character non-morphological to the character modal mode during the execution of the second superimposition effect (t140). ). Therefore, the visibility of the numerical image Z1 (decorative identification information Z) is obtained by displaying the second superimposed image 89b that overlaps with the decorative identification information Z on the front side of the decorative identification information Z when the second superimposed effect is started. (T139), and then the character image Z3 becomes visible (t140) by becoming a character during the execution of the second superimposition effect, the second superimposition effect is completed, and the second superimposition image 89b is displayed. By disappearing, the visibility of the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3 (decorative identification information Z) is improved (t141).

In this way, when the display mode of the decoration identification information Z composed of the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3 is switched from the character non-mode to the character mode, that is, the character image Z3 is converted from the non-display state to the display state. At that time, by executing the second superimposition effect that reduces the visibility of the decoration identification information Z, the player can be directed to the second superimposition effect, so that the player is aware of the appearance of the character image Z3. It is possible to prevent it from being caused. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to feel a sense of discomfort when the character image Z3 is in the display state, and the decorativeness of the game and the world view are not impaired, so that it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the interest of the game.

When the second superimposed image 89b disappears, as shown in FIG. 90 (n), the visibility of the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3 (decorative identification information Z) is improved (t141). After that, the temporary stop of the decoration identification information Z ends, the variable display stops, and the stop display time is reached. As shown in FIG. 90 (o), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 The identification information is stopped and displayed (t142).

In FIGS. 90 (h) and 90 (i), the first decorative game display unit 81, the second decorative game display unit 82, the standby storage display unit 83, the running storage display unit 84, and the start storage number display units 85a and 85b. The portion that overlaps with the first superimposed image 89a can be visually recognized through the first superimposed image 89a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it overlaps with the first superimposed image 89a of the first decorative game display unit 81, the second decorative game display unit 82, the standby storage display unit 83, the running storage display unit 84, and the start storage number display units 85a and 85b. An opaque image may be displayed as the first superimposed image 89a so that the portion is invisible by the first superimposed image 89a.

Further, the first superimposed image 89a may be an image superimposed on at least a part of the decoration identification information Z. Here, "superimposing" means overlapping in a state of being located on the front side (player side). That is, the image superimposed on at least a part of the decoration identification information Z is an image displayed on the front side of the decoration identification information Z and overlaps with at least a part of the decoration identification information Z. Therefore, even if the image overlaps the decoration identification information Z before and after, the image displayed behind the decoration identification information Z is not an image superimposed on the decoration identification information Z.

Specifically, in FIG. 90, the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on the entire first decorative game display unit 81, but the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on a part of the first decorative game display unit 81. It may be an superimposed image.
Further, in FIG. 90, the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on a part of the second decorative game display unit 82, but the first superimposed image 89a is an image superimposed on the entire second decorative game display unit 82. It may be, or an image that is not superimposed on the entire second decorative game display unit 82 (an image displayed behind the second decorative game display unit 82, or an entire image of the second decorative game display unit 82). Images that do not overlap) may be used.

Further, in FIG. 90, the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on the entire standby storage display unit 83, but the first superimposed image 89a is an image superimposed on a part of the standby storage display unit 83. Alternatively, an image that does not overlap all of the standby storage display unit 83 (an image that is displayed behind the standby storage display unit 83 or an image that does not overlap all of the standby storage display unit 83) may be used. There may be.
Further, in FIG. 90, the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on a part of the running storage display unit 84, but the first superimposed image 89a is an image superimposed on the entire running storage display unit 84. Alternatively, an image that does not overlap all of the running memory display unit 84 (an image that is displayed behind the running storage display unit 84 or an image that does not overlap all of the running storage display unit 84) may be used. There may be.
Further, in FIG. 90, the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on a part of the start storage number display units 85a and 85b, but the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on all of the start storage number display units 85a and 85b. An image that is not superimposed on all of the start memory number display units 85a and 85b (an image displayed behind the start memory number display units 85a and 85b, or a start memory number display unit 85a). , An image that does not overlap all of 85b).

In FIGS. 90 (l) and 90 (m), a portion of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the start memory number display units 85a and 85b that overlaps with the second superimposed image 89b is visually recognized through the second superimposed image 89b. It is possible, but not limited to this. For example, as the second superimposed image 89b, the portion of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the start memory number display units 85a and 85b that overlaps with the second superimposed image 89b is made invisible by the second superimposed image 89b. An opaque image may be displayed.

Further, the second superimposed image 89b may be an image superimposed on at least a part of the decoration identification information Z.
Specifically, in FIG. 90, the second superimposed image 89b is superimposed on the entire first decorative game display unit 81, but the second superimposed image 89b is superimposed on a part of the first decorative game display unit 81. It may be an superimposed image.
Further, in FIG. 90, the second superimposed image 89b is not superimposed on the entire second decorative game display unit 82, but the second superimposed image 89b is superimposed on at least a part of the second decorative game display unit 82. It may be an image.
Further, in FIG. 90, the second superimposed image 89b is superimposed on a part of the start storage number display units 85a and 85b, but the second superimposed image 89b is superimposed on all of the start storage number display units 85a and 85b. The image may be an image that is not superimposed on all of the start memory number display units 85a and 85b.

Further, when the second superimposed image 89b is displayed during the display of the standby storage display unit 83, the second superimposed image 89b may be an image superimposed on at least a part of the standby storage display unit 83. It may be an image that is not superimposed on all of the standby storage display units 83.
Further, when the second superimposed image 89b is displayed during the display of the executing storage display unit 84, the second superimposed image 89b may be an image superimposed on at least a part of the executing storage display unit 84. It may be an image that is not superimposed on all of the execution storage display unit 84.

The effect control device 300 executes the erase effect at the first timing (for example, at the start of the variable display) for converting the character image Z3 from the display state to the non-display state, and changes the character image Z3 from the display state to the non-display state. The first superimposition effect is executed at the second timing of conversion (for example, at the time of development to SP reach), and the third timing at the third timing (for example, at the end of SP reach) of converting the character image Z3 from the hidden state to the displayed state. 2 Perform superimposition effect.
Therefore, since the pattern of the effect (hereinafter referred to as "non-display effect") executed when the character image Z3 is converted from the display state to the non-display state is different between the first timing and the second timing, the player can use the player. The pattern of the non-display effect makes it possible to easily grasp whether the current time is the first timing (for example, at the start of variable display) or the second timing (for example, at the time of development to SP reach).
In addition, since there are a plurality of hidden production patterns, the interest of the game is improved.

It is also possible to execute the first superimposed effect as a non-display effect at the start of the variable display (first timing), but in that case, since the decoration identification information Z does not move in the first superimposed effect, the variable display is displayed. If is not started, the player may misrecognize it. On the other hand, by executing the erasing effect as a non-display effect at the start of the variable display (first timing), the character image Z3 can be erased while performing the effect using the decoration identification information Z. That is, since the character image Z3 can be erased while indicating that the variable display is in progress, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation.

It is also possible to execute the erasing effect as a non-display effect at the time of development to SP reach (second timing), but in that case, since the decoration identification information Z moves in the erasing effect, the decoration during the temporary stop display is displayed. If the identification information Z changes (the reach symbol changes), the player may erroneously recognize it. On the other hand, by executing the first superimposition effect as a non-display effect at the time of development to SP reach (second timing), the character image Z3 is erased while performing an effect using an image different from the decoration identification information Z. can do. That is, since the character image Z3 can be erased while indicating that the game is being reached, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation.

For example, there are 12 types of decoration identification information Z, a general symbol (designs 1 to 9) and a special symbol (designs A to C), and when a different character image Z3 is added to each of the 12 types, an effect of erasing effect is produced. There are 12 types of modes. Further, the character image Z3 may not be added to some symbols (for example, non-probability variation symbols), and since the decoration identification information Z to which the character image Z3 is not added has no character aspect, the decoration identification without adding the character image Z3. The erasing effect using the information Z is not executed. Therefore, when the decoration identification information Z has 12 types of general symbols (designs 1 to 9) and special symbols (designs A to C), the effect mode of the erasing effect is 12 types at the maximum. That is, there is a limit to the number of types of effect modes of the erasure effect. In this embodiment, there are 12 types of erasing effects.

In FIG. 90, a rectangular image with rounded corners is displayed as the first superimposed image 89a, but the display mode (shape, color, size, etc.) of the first superimposed image 89a is not limited to this. Further, the first superimposed image 89a may be a still image or a moving image. Therefore, there is no limit to the number of types of the first superposed effect. In this embodiment, any one of 15 types of first superimposed images 89a is displayed. Which one is displayed is selected, for example, when determining the execution of the first superimposed effect.
Therefore, in this embodiment, there are 15 types of effects of the first superimposed effect. Since there are 12 types of erasing effects, the first superimposing effect has more effects than the erasing effects. Although there is a limit to the number of types of the effect mode of the erasure effect, there is no limit to the number of types of the effect mode of the first superimposed effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a wide variety of effects as non-display effects, and the interest of the game is improved.

The mode of the erasing effect is not limited to 12 types. Further, the production mode of the first superimposed effect is not limited to 15 types. Further, the effect mode of the first superimposed effect may be more than the effect mode of the erase effect, may be less than the effect mode of the erase effect, or may be the same number as the effect mode of the erase effect.
Further, the degree of expectation of a big hit or the like may be suggested by the production mode of the first superimposition effect (display mode of the first superimposition image 89a).

In this embodiment, the time required for non-display required for the character image Z3 to be in the non-display state at the start of the variable display (first timing), that is, from the start of the erasing effect to the non-display state of the character image Z3. Time (t130 to t131) is the time required for hiding the character image Z3 to be hidden at the time of development to SP reach (second timing), that is, the character image Z3 from the start of the first superimposition effect. Is shorter than the time until is hidden (t135 to t136).
Further, the execution time T2 of the non-display effect performed at the start of the variable display (first timing), that is, the time from the start to the end of the erase effect (t130 to t132) is the time of development to SP reach (second timing). It is shorter than the execution time T4 of the non-display effect, that is, the time from the start to the end of the first superimposed effect (t135 to t137).

By making the execution time T2 shorter than the execution time T4 in this way, it is possible to smoothly start high-speed fluctuations. Further, by making the execution time T4 longer than the execution time T2, it is possible to secure a sufficient time as a time for executing an effect that raises the expectation of the player toward the development of SP reach. That is, in this embodiment, the non-display required time T1 and T3, which is the time from the start of the non-display effect to the non-display state of the character image Z3, and the execution times T2 and T4 of the non-display effect are used for the game progress. Since the time is set according to the time, the fun of the game is improved.
The non-display required time T1 may be shorter than the non-display required time T3, may be longer than the non-display required time T3, or may be the same length as the non-display required time T3.
Further, the execution time T2 may be shorter than the execution time T4, may be longer than the execution time T4, or may be the same length as the execution time T4.

In FIG. 90, an image imitating a cloud is displayed as the second superimposed image 89b, but the display mode (shape, color, size, etc.) of the second superimposed image 89b is not limited to this. Further, the second superimposed image 89b may be a still image or a moving image. Therefore, there is no limit to the number of types of the second superimposed effect. In this embodiment, the second superimposed image 89b is one type.
Therefore, in this embodiment, there is only one type of effect of the second superimposed effect. Since there are 15 types of production modes of the first superimposition effect, the second superimposition effect has fewer production modes than the first superimposition effect. The first superimposed effect not only has the role of lowering the visibility of the decoration identification information Z, but also has the role of raising the player's expectation toward the development of SP reach. Will increase. On the other hand, the role of the second superimposition effect is to reduce the visibility of the decoration identification information Z, and there is no other role (role to raise the expectation of the player, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the limited storage capacity by reducing the effect mode of the second superimposed effect as compared with the effect mode of the first superimposed effect. Further, by setting the effect mode of the second superimposed effect to one type, the process of selecting the effect mode of the second superimposed effect can be omitted, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the display mode of the first superimposed image 89a and the display mode of the second superimposed image 89b are different, the player can use the superimposed image at the present time to develop the second timing (for example, SP reach). It is possible to easily grasp whether it is the time) or the third timing (for example, at the end of SP reach).
The production mode of the second superimposed effect is not limited to one type, and may be a plurality of types. Further, the production mode of the first superimposed effect is not limited to 15 types. Further, the effect mode of the second superimposed effect may be less than the effect mode of the first superimposed effect, may be more than the effect mode of the first superimposed effect, and is the same number as the effect mode of the first superimposed effect. You may. Further, the effect mode of the second superimposed effect may be more than the effect mode of the erase effect, may be less than the effect mode of the erase effect, or may be the same number as the effect mode of the erase effect.

In this embodiment, the execution time T5 of the superimposition effect performed at the end of the SP reach (third timing), that is, the time from the start to the end of the second superimposition effect (t139 to t141) is the time of development to the SP reach (third timing). It is shorter than the execution time T4 of the superimposition effect performed at the second timing), that is, the time from the start to the end of the first superimposition effect (t135 to t137).
By making the execution time T5 shorter than the execution time T4 in this way, it is possible to smoothly start the stop display. Further, by making the execution time T4 longer than the execution time T5, it is possible to secure a sufficient time as a time for executing an effect that raises the expectation of the player toward the development of SP reach. That is, in this embodiment, since the execution times T4 and T5 of the superimposition effect are the times corresponding to the progress of the game, the interest of the game is improved.
The execution time T5 may be shorter than the execution time T4, may be longer than the execution time T4, or may be the same length as the execution time T4. Further, the execution time T5 may be shorter than the execution time T2, may be longer than the execution time T2, or may be the same length as the execution time T2.

The first superimposed image 89a may be an image in which the transparency gradually decreases, as shown in FIG. 91, for example. As a result, as shown in, for example, t135 to t137 in FIG. 91, the visibility of the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3 is gradually lowered by the first superposition effect, and the character image Z3 can be erased more naturally. Become.
Further, the second superimposed image 89b may be an image in which the transparency gradually increases, as shown in FIG. 91, for example. As a result, as shown in, for example, t139 to t141 in FIG. 91, the visibility of the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z3 is gradually improved by the second superposition effect, and the more natural character image Z3 can appear. Become.

The second superimposition effect executed after the first superimposition effect (effect in which the transparency of the first superimposition image 89a gradually decreases) shown in FIG. 91 is the second superimposition effect (effect of the second superimposition image 89b) shown in FIG. The effect is not limited to the effect in which the transparency gradually increases), and may be, for example, the second superimposed effect shown in FIG. 89 (c) (the effect in which the transparency of the second superimposed image 89b does not change).
Further, the first superimposition effect executed before the second superimposition effect (effect in which the transparency of the second superimposition image 89b gradually increases) shown in FIG. 91 is the first superimposition effect (first superimposition) shown in FIG. The effect is not limited to the effect in which the transparency of the image 89a gradually decreases), and may be, for example, the first superimposed effect shown in FIG. 89 (c) (the effect in which the transparency of the first superimposed image 89a does not change).

The erasing effect may be any effect as long as it gradually reduces the visibility of the character image Z3, and is not limited to the effect of rotating and displaying the decoration identification information Z.
As shown in FIG. 92, for example, the erasing effect may be an effect of rotating and displaying only the character image Z3. Specifically, the virtual disk is rotated around the axis to convert from a state in which only the surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the character image Z3 is drawn) can be seen to a state in which only the side surface of the virtual disk can be seen. It may be a production. In this case, for example, as shown in t130 to t131 of FIG. 92, the visibility of the character image Z3 gradually decreases as it approaches the state where only the side surface of the virtual disk can be seen, so that only the side surface of the virtual disk can be seen. At that point (t131), the character image Z3 becomes invisible. Therefore, the visibility of the character image Z3 is changed by the execution of the erasing effect shown in FIG. 92, but the visibility of the numerical image Z1 is not changed.

Further, in the erasing effect shown in FIG. 92, the conversion from the state where only the side surface of the virtual disk can be seen to the state where only the back surface of the virtual disk can be seen is not performed. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 92, the length of the erasing effect execution time T2 is the non-display required time T1 required for the character image Z3 to be hidden at the start of the variable display (first timing). It will be the same as the length.
Further, in the erasing effect shown in FIG. 92, the display mode of the numerical image Z1 does not change depending on the execution of the erasing effect. That is, in the erasing effect shown in FIG. 89 (c) (the effect of rotating and displaying the entire decoration identification information Z on the axis), the size of the numerical image Z1 was expanded during the erasing effect, but the erasing effect (character) shown in FIG. In the effect of rotating and displaying only the image Z3), the size and the like of the numerical image Z1 do not change during the execution of the erasing effect. Therefore, when the erasing effect shown in FIG. 92 is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 92, the numerical image Z1 is gradually enlarged during the period from the end of the erasing effect to the start of the high-speed fluctuation (t131 to t132). May be performed so that the enlarged numerical image Z1 fluctuates at high speed.
Alternatively, when the erasing effect shown in FIG. 92 is executed, the high-speed fluctuation may be started immediately after the erasing effect is completed. That is, the start timing of the high-speed fluctuation may be set to "t131", which is the time when the character becomes inhomogeneous.

Further, the erasing effect may be, for example, an effect in which the character image Z3 moves from the vicinity of the numerical image Z1 to the outside of the display area and disappears. In this case, the visibility of the character image Z3 decreases as the character image Z3 moves (moves), and the visibility of the character image Z3 gradually increases as the portion of the character image Z3 located outside the display area increases. After that, the character image Z3 becomes invisible when the entire character image Z3 is located outside the display area. Therefore, during the execution of this erasing effect, the visibility of the character image Z3 changes, but the visibility of the numerical image Z1 does not change.

Further, in FIGS. 89 (c), 91, and 92, the timing at which the character image Z3 is switched to the non-display state is during the execution of the first superimposition effect (t136), but the character image Z3 is in the non-display state. The timing of switching to may be the start of the first superimposition effect (t135) or the end of the first superimposition effect (t137). When the timing at which the character image Z3 is switched to the non-display state is the end of the first superimposition effect (t137), the character image Z3 is in the non-display state at the time of development to SP reach (second timing). The length of the required non-display required time T3 and the length of the execution time T4 of the first superimposed effect are the same.
Further, in FIGS. 89 (c), 91, and 92, the timing at which the character image Z3 is switched to the display state is during the execution of the second superimposition effect (t140), but the character image Z3 is switched to the display state. The timing may be at the start of the second superimposition effect (t139) or at the end of the second superimposition effect (t141).

From the above, the game machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (decorative special figure variation display game) for displaying identification information (decorative identification information Z) in the display area of the display device 41, and the result of the game is obtained. It is a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a game value to a player when a special result is obtained, and the identification information includes a first component (character image Z3) and a second component (numerical image). Z1) and can be configured to hide the first component while displaying the identification information (see FIG. 90).
Therefore, while the identification information is being displayed, the first component is in the display state or in the non-display state, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which identification information (decorative identification information Z) is variablely displayed in the variable display area of the display device 41 based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a gaming value to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, and the identification information includes the first component (character image Z3) and the second. It is possible to hide the first component while displaying the identification information, including the component (numerical image Z1), and to produce (non-display) when the first component is hidden. The display effect) can be executed, and the mode (pattern) of the effect can be configured to be different depending on the timing at which the first component is hidden (see FIG. 90).
Specifically, for example, the effect (non-display effect) executed when the first component is hidden includes an erase effect (first mode (first pattern)) and a first superimposition effect (second). There is an aspect (second pattern)), the erasing effect (first aspect (first pattern)) is executed at the first timing, and the first superimposition effect (second aspect (second pattern)) is executed at the second timing. Will be done.

Therefore, by executing the effect (non-display effect) when the first component is hidden, the first component can be naturally erased or the player's consciousness can be distracted from the deletion of the first component. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to feel a sense of discomfort when the first component is hidden, and the decorativeness and world view of the game are not impaired, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting. ..
Further, since the mode (pattern) of the effect executed when the first component is hidden is different depending on the timing when the first component is hidden, at any timing depending on the mode of the effect. It is possible to suggest whether there is.
Further, since there are a plurality of modes (patterns) in the effect executed when the first component is hidden, the interest of the game is improved as compared with the case where there are no plurality of modes.

The effect (non-display effect) executed when the first component is hidden is not limited to the erase effect and the first superimposed effect. That is, the effect (non-display effect) executed when the first component is hidden may be, for example, an effect using the display device 41 such as an erase effect or a first superimposed effect. The effect may be an effect using a board effect device 44 that can move forward of the display device 41, or an effect using a display board 350 arranged so as to cover the front surface of the game board 30.
Further, the mode of the non-display effect is not limited to the two types of the first mode and the second mode, and may be three or more types.
Moreover, the mode of the non-display effect may be one kind. Specifically, for example, the erasing effect may be executed as a hidden effect at both the first timing and the second timing, or the first superimposed effect may be performed as a hidden effect at both the first timing and the second timing. You may do it. In that case, since the non-display effect of the same aspect is executed regardless of the timing, the player can easily grasp that the first component (character image Z3) disappears due to the non-display effect. .. Further, when there is only one type of non-display effect, the execution time T2 of the non-display effect performed at the first timing can be reused at the first timing and the second timing. And, it is preferable that the execution time T4 of the non-display effect performed at the second timing is the same length.
Further, the first timing is not limited to the start of the variable display. Also, the second timing is not limited to the development to SP reach.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which identification information (decorative identification information Z) is variablely displayed in the variable display area of the display device 41 based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a gaming value to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, and the identification information includes the first component (character image Z3) and the second. It is possible to convert the state of the first component into a display state and a non-display state while displaying the identification information, including the component (numerical image Z1), and when the state of the first component is changed. It is possible to execute an effect that reduces the visibility of the identification information, and the mode (pattern) of the effect is when the state is changed from the display state to the non-display state and when the state is changed from the non-display state to the display state. Can be configured differently (see FIG. 90).
Specifically, for example, the effect of reducing the visibility of the identification information includes a first superimposed effect (first aspect (first pattern)) and a second superimposed effect (second aspect (second pattern)). , The first superimposition effect (first aspect (first pattern)) is executed when the state is changed from the display state to the non-display state, and the second superimposition effect (second aspect (second pattern)) is from the non-display state. It is executed when the state is changed to the display state.

Therefore, it is possible to distract the player's consciousness from the state conversion of the first component by executing an effect of reducing the visibility of the identification information when the state conversion of the first component is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the first component to feel uncomfortable when the state is changed, and the decorativeness of the game and the view of the world are not impaired, so that it is possible to prevent the game from deteriorating.
Further, since the mode (pattern) of the effect of reducing the visibility of the identification information differs between the time of state conversion to the non-display state and the time of state conversion to the display state, the state of the non-display state is changed depending on the mode of the effect. It is possible to suggest whether the conversion or the state conversion to the display state is performed.
Further, since there are a plurality of modes (patterns) in the effect of reducing the visibility of the identification information, the interest of the game is improved as compared with the case where there is no plurality of modes.

The effect of reducing the visibility of the identification information (hereinafter referred to as "visibility reduction effect") is not limited to the superimposed effect (first superimposed effect, second superimposed effect).
The visibility reduction effect performed when the state is changed from the display state to the non-display state may be, for example, an effect of changing only the display mode of the character image Z3 in the decoration identification information Z. Examples of the effect of changing only the display mode of the character image Z3 include an effect of rotating and erasing only the character image Z3 and an effect of moving the character image Z3 from the vicinity of the numerical image Z1 to the outside of the display area and erasing it. Examples thereof include an effect in which the transparency of the character image Z3 gradually decreases, and an effect in which the character image Z3 explodes and is decomposed into a plurality of small pieces and disappears. By changing only the display mode of the character image Z3 and not changing the display mode of the numerical image Z1, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing when the decoration identification information Z during the temporary stop display changes.
Further, the visibility reduction effect performed when the state is changed from the display state to the non-display state is not limited to the effect using the display device 41, and for example, a board effect device 44 that can move to the front of the display device 41 is used. It may be an effect that has been used, or an effect that uses a display board 350 arranged so as to cover the front surface of the game board 30.

Further, the visibility reduction effect performed when the state is changed from the non-display state to the display state is, for example, an effect in which only the character image Z3 is axially rotated and displayed (the virtual disk is axially rotated and the virtual disk is rotated). It may be a state in which only the side surface of the virtual disk is visible to a state in which only the surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the character image Z3 is drawn) can be seen), or the character image Z3 is a number from outside the display area. It may be an effect of moving to the vicinity of the image Z1, an effect of gradually increasing the transparency of the character image Z3, or an effect in which the disassembled small pieces are assembled to form the character image Z3. It may be a production that forms.
Further, the visibility reduction effect performed when the state is changed from the non-display state to the display state is not limited to the effect using the display device 41, and for example, a board effect device 44 that can move to the front of the display device 41 is used. It may be an effect that has been used, or an effect that uses a display board 350 arranged so as to cover the front surface of the game board 30.
Further, the timing (third timing) for executing the visibility reduction effect performed when the state is changed from the non-display state to the display state is not limited to the end of SP reach.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and mainly different parts will be described below. The game machines of the present embodiment mainly differ in the content of the production.

As shown in FIG. 93, the game board 30 of the present embodiment includes an upper movable accessory 44a and a lower movable accessory 44b as a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating.
The upper movable accessory 44a moves up and down between the position of the upper part of the display device 41 provided on the upper part of the center case 40 and the position indicated by the dotted line, which is the position on the center side of the display device 41 from this position. It is possible.
The lower movable accessory 44b is provided at the lower part of the center case 40, and rotates between the position of the lower part of the display device 41 and the position indicated by the dotted line, which is the position on the center side of the display device 41 from this position. Is possible.

Further, a jackpot notification unit 630 that can be turned on in the case of a special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on the jackpot (first special result) is provided in the lower right portion of the center case 40. The big hit notification unit 630 does not light in the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

FIG. 94 shows an example of the effect of the gaming machine of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 94A, a first decoration game display unit 81 for displaying the first decoration game among the decoration special figure variation display games is provided in the center of the display area of the display device 41. The first decorative game display unit 81 displays the decorative special figure variation display game by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left variable display area 81a, the medium variable display area 81b, and the right variable display area 81c, and then stopping and displaying the display. ..

Further, in the lower center of the display area of the display device 41, a start memory display unit 90 that mainly displays information related to the start memory is provided.
The start memory display unit 90 includes a standby storage display unit 83 capable of displaying a decorative special figure start memory display 83a corresponding to the stored start memory, and a start memory corresponding to the currently running special figure variation display game. An in-execution storage display unit 84 that displays information about the above is provided.

The standby storage display unit 83 has a decorative special figure start memory display 83a corresponding to the start memory (first start memory or second start memory) that is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Is displayed. The decorative special figure start memory display 83a displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 has a one-to-one correspondence with the start memory that is the execution right of the special figure variation display game, and the leftmost decorative special figure start memory display 83a is the first. The decorative special figure start memory display 83a corresponding to the start memory stored in is displayed side by side in the order of memory, and shifts to the left each time the earliest start memory is digested.
That is, the decorative special figure start memory display 83a performs the first display displayed when the start memory exists, and the standby memory display unit 83 displays the second display regardless of the presence or absence of the start memory. Make a memory. Further, the standby storage display unit 83 can be said to be a second display that can be displayed regardless of whether or not the special figure variation display game is executed.

In addition, the standby memory display unit 83 has a decorative special figure start memory display 83a corresponding to the start memory (first start memory) which is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game. Only one of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a corresponding to the start memory (second start memory) may be displayed.
Further, the standby memory display unit 83 suggests the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a corresponding to the start memory. Is possible.

The standby storage display unit 83 is provided with a game information display unit 91 that displays information about the game.
In this game information display unit 91, information about the game is displayed by scrolling so that the characters flow to the left, and here, the character string "XXX stage is extremely hot !!" is scrolled and displayed. Has been done.
The decorative special figure start memory display 83a and the game information display unit 91 are arranged side by side in the same direction as the direction in which characters flow and the direction in which the decorative special figure start memory display 83a moves when the decoration special figure start memory display 83a is digested. It has become. As a result, even when one of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a and the game information display unit 91 is focused on, it is possible to easily grasp the other information with the same line-of-sight flow.

The information to be displayed on the game information display unit 91 can be arbitrarily set, and as shown here, information that is not related to the running special figure variation display game or the current production mode, which is the current game status. It may display a game description, a game-related display that gives suggestions or notifications about a running special figure variation display game, or a start memory-related display that gives suggestions or notifications about start memory. May be displayed, or a game state display explaining the current effect mode, probability state, and the like may be displayed.
The information to be displayed is not limited to character information, and may be an image such as a character display.
Further, for example, the display color, font, scroll direction, etc. may be defined for each of the game description, the game-related display, the start memory-related display, and the game state display.

On the left side of the standby storage display unit 83, an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. The decorative special figure start memory display 83a at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84 at the start of the special figure variation display game, and is displayed as the running memory display 84a. ing.
Further, the executing storage display unit 84 suggests the result of the special figure variation display game currently being executed, the variation pattern, and the like by the display mode of the executing storage display 84a displayed on the executing storage display unit 84. Is possible.
That is, the running memory display unit 84 makes a second display that can be displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the start memory.
Further, the executing memory display unit 84 can be said to be a second display that can be displayed regardless of whether or not the special figure variation display game is being executed, and the executing memory display 84a is displayed only when the special figure variation display game is being executed. It can be said that it is done.

The running storage display unit 84 is provided with a second decoration game display unit 82 that displays the second decoration game among the decoration special figure variation display games. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display unit 82 has identification information in each area of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, similarly to the first decoration game displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81. Is displayed in a variable manner, then stopped and the result is displayed. The second decorative game display unit 82 displays identification information (small symbol) that is relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbol) displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81.
The direction of the variable display of the second decoration game is different from the direction in which the decoration special figure start memory display 83a moves, and the difference in the movement direction makes it easier to recognize the second decoration game. ing.

Further, the execution memory display unit 84 is provided with a launch direction indicating unit for instructing the launch direction of the game ball. The launch direction indicating unit 92 indicates the launch direction by the direction of the arrow, and in FIG. 94 (a), it instructs to launch to the left (left-handed).
Further, the execution storage display unit 84 is provided with an effect mode notification unit 93 for notifying the current effect mode. The effect mode notification unit 93 displays the name of the effect mode, and FIG. 94 (a) shows that the effect mode is “aaa mode”. In this aaa mode, an image imitating the sun is displayed as a background image.
In this way, the executing memory display unit 84 displays various information regarding the special figure variation display game being executed.

In the upper left portion of the display area of the display device 41, a first start memory number display unit 85a for displaying the first start memory number (special figure 1 hold number) and a second start memory number (special figure 2 hold number) are displayed. A second start storage number display unit 85b for displaying is provided. These display units display the number of start-up memories numerically.
In the upper right portion of the display area of the display device 41, a stock number display unit 99 indicating the stock number of the right to execute a predetermined effect is provided.
Here, a maximum of three execution rights can be stocked, and as will be described later, the display mode changes according to the stocked number.

When the special figure variation display game is started from the state shown in FIG. 94 (a), the left variation display area 81a, the middle variation display area 81b, and the right of the first decorative game display unit 81 are shown in FIG. 94 (b). The variable display of the identification information is started in each of the variable display areas 81c. Further, the second decorative game display unit 82 also starts variable display of the identification information.
Further, the decorative special figure start storage display 83a at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 shifts to the running storage display unit 84 and is displayed as the running storage display 84a, and the other decorative special figure start storage display 83a is on the left. Move to.

As shown in FIG. 94 (c), the right end portion of the standby storage display unit 83 can be opened so that the door can be opened, from which the character 631 can appear.
The character 631 here is a character that suggests a change in the effect mode, suggests that the effect mode is changed to the "bbb mode", and the shape of the character 631 is related to the background image in the bbb mode. It is a character that imitates the moon.
Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (d), the effect mode is changed so that the background image becomes a background image imitating the moon in the bbb mode, and the display of the effect mode notification unit 93 is also changed to "bbbb".
The appearance direction of the character 631 is different from the moving direction of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a and the scrolling direction of the game information display unit 91. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the appearance of the character 631.

As shown in FIG. 94 (e), when a reach state occurs, it is possible to change the display content of the game information display unit 91. Here, "△△ reach is highly expected !!" The character string is scrolled. This display content suggests the content of the SP reach that develops after that, and as shown in FIG. 94 (f), it subsequently develops into the SP reach and the Δ△ reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 94 (f), when the SP reach state is reached, the standby storage display unit 83 is erased from the start storage display unit 90, and only the execution storage display unit 84 is used.
The portion hidden by the standby storage display unit 83 in the running storage display unit 84 functions as the second game information display unit 94, and here, the reliability that is a special result is displayed. ..
Of course, the information displayed on the second game information display unit 94 is not limited to the reliability that is a special result, and can be arbitrarily set.
Further, the period for erasing the standby storage display unit 83 is not limited to the period in the SP reach state, and can be erased at any timing.

By displaying various information on the start memory display unit 90 as described above, the area of the start memory display unit 90 can be utilized. In addition, during the game, the player can check the occurrence status of the start memory and also check the information about other games, so that the information can be grasped efficiently and the game can be concentrated. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The display mode of the start memory display unit 90 is not limited to that described above. For example, in the above example, the decorative special figure start memory display 83a is displayed on the upper part of the standby memory display unit 83, and the running memory display 84a is displayed on the upper part of the running memory display unit 84. The decorative special figure start memory display 83a or the execution memory display 84a may be displayed inside, sideways, or below the middle memory display unit 83 or the execution memory display unit 84.
That is, the standby storage display unit 83 may be a portion connected to a portion where the decorative special figure start storage display 83 can be displayed, and the executing storage display unit 84 is connected to a portion where the execution storage display 84a can be displayed. Any part is fine.

Further, the arrangement of the game information display unit 91, the second decorative game display unit 82, the launch direction instruction unit 92, the effect mode notification unit 93, and the second game information display unit 94 can be arbitrarily set. Further, the information to be displayed is not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily set, and it is sufficient that at least a portion for displaying information about the game is arranged around the decorative special figure start memory display 83a.
Information about the game includes explanation of the game, explanation of the story of the production, expectation of special results, number of starting memories, second decoration game, type of production mode, firing direction, number of time reductions, probability state, game state, special game. The number of game balls acquired in the state, the history of the game, etc. can be arbitrarily selected.
The importance of the information to be displayed may be divided between the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84, and important information may be displayed to the running storage display unit 84 as in the above example. Alternatively, on the contrary, important information may be displayed on the standby storage display unit 83.

Further, the game information display unit 91, the second decorative game display unit 82, the launch direction instruction unit 92, the effect mode notification unit 93, and the second game information display unit 94 start, end, or display information at arbitrary timings, respectively. You may change it. By changing or terminating the display of information, the player's attention can be directed to the remaining information.
The start, end, or change timing of the display may be one that corresponds to the progress status of the special figure variation display game, or may be irrelevant to the progress status of the special figure variation display game. Examples of the progress of the special figure variation display game include the start and end of the variation, the start of the reach state, the start of the SP reach state, and the execution of a specific effect.

Further, the start, end, or change timing of the display may be different depending on the importance of the information. For example, the more important the information, the later or the end timing may not be.
Further, it is also possible to suggest or notify the special figure variation display game or the start memory being executed depending on the difference in the start, end, or change timing of the information display. For example, if the SP reach suggestion is displayed on the game information display unit 91 before the reach state is reached, the SP reach can be achieved more than when the SP reach suggestion is displayed on the game information display unit 91 after the reach state is reached. You may try to increase the sex.

The scroll direction of the game information display unit 91 and the movement direction of other displays may be the same or different.
Other display movement directions include the moving direction of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a, the appearance direction of the character 631, the variable display direction of the second decoration game, the running memory display 84a, and the decorative special figure start memory display 83a. The movement direction of the animation to be performed can be mentioned.
Further, the moving direction of other displays may be combined with the firing direction, and may be moved to the left in the case of a left-handed hit and to the right in the case of a right-handed hit. Alternatively, the direction may be opposite to the firing direction.

Further, when the standby storage display unit 83 is erased as shown in FIG. 94 (f), the decorative special figure start storage display 83a may be displayed without being erased.
In this case, the pedestal may be displayed at a position where the decorative special figure start memory display 83a is not displayed but can be displayed due to the occurrence of the start memory. In the example of FIG. 94 (f), the three decorative special figure start memory display 83a may be displayed, and the pedestal may be displayed at a place where the fourth decorative special figure start memory display 83a can be displayed.
This makes it possible to easily grasp the number of start-up memories that can be generated.

Further, when the visibility of the start memory display unit 90 is deteriorated due to the overlapping display of other images on the start memory display unit 90, the decorative special figure start memory display 83a, the running memory display 84a, and the standby memory are displayed. The degree of decrease in visibility may be different for each of the display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84. The difference in the degree of deterioration of visibility can be made different by the difference in the size of the area where the other images overlap, the difference in the transparency of the other images, and the like.
For example, the visibility of the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84 may be higher than the visibility of the decorative special drawing start storage display 83a and the running storage display 84a. Since information about the game is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84, the degree of deterioration in visibility may be reduced so as not to interfere with the visibility of this information.

Further, regarding the display on the game information display unit 91, the moving direction of the display may be different depending on the information to be displayed.
For example, in the case of a game explanation that explains the contents of the reach and stage, the information moves to the left, and in the case of displaying numerical information such as the number of support, the number of consecutive villas, the number of acquired game balls, and the winning history, The information may be moved to the right. It is also possible to move information in the vertical direction, so that it is selected according to the type of information.

Further, the type of the character 631 that appears and the content suggested by the character 631 can be arbitrarily set.
For example, it may indicate a change in the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a or the running memory display 84a, or the special figure variation display during execution such as the occurrence of a reach state or the reliability as a special result. It may be a suggestion about the game.
Further, the appearance direction and the appearance position of the character 631 appearing from the start memory display unit 90 can be arbitrarily set. Further, the appearance direction and the appearance position may be different depending on the suggested content.
For example, when the effect mode is changed, it appears from the right end of the standby memory display unit 83 to the right, and when a pre-reading effect is suggested, the standby memory display unit 83 is directed toward the corresponding decorative special figure start memory display 83a. It may appear upward from.
Further, when the character 631 appears, information indicating that the character 631 appears may be displayed on the game information display unit 91. In this case, the moving direction of the information on the game information display unit 91 may be the same as the appearance direction of the character 631.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result.
A production control means (effect control device 300) that controls the production of a game, and
A display means (display device 41) capable of displaying information related to the game, and
Starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) where a game ball can win,
A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit of start memories, which is the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area, is provided.
The effect control means
The start memory display unit 90 capable of displaying information related to the start memory can be displayed on the display means.
The start memory display unit 90 has a start memory display unit 90.
The first display (decorative special drawing start memory display 83a) displayed when the start memory exists, and
There is a second display (standby storage display unit 83) that can be displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the start memory.
Information about the game can be displayed on the second display.
Therefore, the area of the start memory display unit 90 can be utilized. In addition, during the game, the player can check the occurrence status of the start memory and also check the information about other games, so that the information can be grasped efficiently and the game can be concentrated. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect control means is
As the first display, the standby memory display (decorative special figure start memory display 83a) corresponding to the start memory one-to-one is generated, and the start memory is generated with the standby memory display corresponding to the earliest start memory as the head. They are displayed in a line in order, and move to the first direction, which is the direction in which the order is raised each time the earliest start memory is digested.
In the second display, the information is scrolled and displayed in the first direction.
Therefore, the moving direction of the line of sight is the same direction, which makes it easier to grasp the information.

Further, the effect control means is
Information can be presented by the character 631 appearing from the second display.
The appearance direction of the character 631 is different from the first direction.
Therefore, the character 631 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the effect control means is
As the first display, it is possible to display the execution memory display 84a that displays information on the start memory corresponding to the game being executed.
The second display includes a portion corresponding to the running storage display 84a and a portion corresponding to the standby storage display.
Information about the running game can be displayed in the portion corresponding to the running memory display 84a.
Therefore, it is possible to collectively display information about the special figure variation display game being executed, and it is possible to easily grasp the information.

FIG. 95 also shows an example of the effect of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. This effect makes it possible to stock the right to execute a predetermined effect.
The predetermined effect described here is for suggesting or notifying the game, and for example, suggesting or notifying various changes such as the occurrence of a reach state, the change of the temporarily stopped identification information, the revariation display, and the start of the look-ahead effect. It is possible to do.
Therefore, there is a high possibility that a situation will change to a situation that is advantageous to the player if the stock number of the execution right of the predetermined effect is large, and the player becomes interested in the stock number. There is.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to stock three execution rights of a predetermined effect, and as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the stock number display unit 99 of the number of stockable rights is displayed. Has been done.
In the state shown in FIG. 95 (a), the number of stocks is 0, and as a display mode indicating that none of the stock number display units 99 are stocked, the flat heart-shaped display is stopped facing the front. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 95 (b), when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the execution right of the predetermined effect is acquired, the acquisition display 632, which is a display to that effect, is performed. Then, the acquisition display 632 moves to the first stock number display unit 99.
In the stock number display unit 99 to which the acquisition display 632 has been moved as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the display mode indicating that the acquisition display 632 is stocked is located closer to the center of the display area than the display mode when the acquisition display 632 is not stocked. At the same time, the heart-shaped display is three-dimensionally displayed so as to project toward the front side, and the display mode is further rotated.
That is, the stock number display unit 99 is set so that the display position and the display mode differ depending on whether or not the stock is stocked.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (d), when a new predetermined condition is satisfied and the right to execute the predetermined effect is acquired, the acquisition display 632, which is a display to that effect, is performed. Then, the acquisition display 632 moves to the second stock number display unit 99.
In the stock number display unit 99 in which the acquisition display 632 has been moved as shown in FIG. 95 (e), the display mode indicating that the acquisition display 632 is in stock is a display mode in which the three-dimensional heart-shaped display is rotated.
The operation of the second stock number display unit 99 at this time is a movement synchronized so as to have the same rotation phase as the movement of the first stock number display unit 99, which is already set to rotate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 95 (f), when a predetermined condition is newly satisfied and the execution right of the predetermined effect is acquired, the acquisition display 632, which is a display indicating that fact, is performed. Then, the acquisition display 632 moves to the third stock number display unit 99.
In the stock number display unit 99 to which the acquisition display 632 has moved as shown in FIG. 95 (g), the display mode indicating that the acquisition display 632 is stocked is a three-dimensional heart-shaped display rotation display mode.
At this time, the operation of the third stock number display unit 99 is also a synchronized movement so as to have the same rotation phase as the movement of the first and second stock number display units 99, which are already set to rotate. It is said that.

Then, at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 95 (h), a plurality of heart-shaped displays are emitted from the corresponding stock number display unit 99 as a predetermined effect. The predetermined effect here is an effect of notifying that the reach state is reached, and the reach state occurs as shown in FIG. 95 (i).
With the execution of the predetermined effect, the display of the third stock number display unit 99 becomes a display mode indicating that the stock is not stocked.

By displaying the stock number display unit 99 of the stockable number in advance in this way, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the stockable number.
In particular, the player can easily grasp the upper limit of the number of stocks, and the closer to the upper limit, the higher the expectation, and the more interesting the game can be.
In addition, the stock number display unit 99 that is not stocked is also displayed, but the player can easily identify it by making the display position and display mode different from the stock number display unit 99 that is stocked, and misidentify it. Can be prevented.

FIGS. 96 and 97 also show an example of the effect of the gaming machine of the present embodiment.
This effect displays a movement display 95 that moves within the display area of the display device 41, and executes a related effect based on the movement display 95 reaching a predetermined position.
As shown in FIG. 96 (a), the movement display 95 is an image imitating a fish, and moves so as to swim in the display area.
As shown in FIGS. 96A to 96D, a plurality of movement displays 95 can be displayed, and the larger the number of movement displays 95 displayed, the higher the possibility of reaching a predetermined position. The number of displays 95 displayed suggests a high possibility of executing the related effect.

As shown in FIG. 96B, the movement display 95 can overlap with the identification information being displayed in the variable display on the first decorative game display unit 81, but is displayed on the front side of the identification information. There is.
Further, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), the movement display 95 can overlap with the identification information during the stop display on the first decorative game display unit 81, but in this case, the identification information is displayed on the front side. It is supposed to be done.
The stopped display identification information is an important display showing the result of the special figure variation display game, and is displayed in front of the movement display 95 so as not to reduce the visibility.
If the special figure variation display game ends and the next special figure variation display game does not start for a predetermined period, the movement display 95 may be displayed in front of the stopped display identification information.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 96 (b) to 96 (d), the movement display 95 can overlap with the various displays of the start memory display unit 90, the running memory display 84a, and the decorative special figure start memory display 83a. The movement display 95 is displayed on the front side of the movement display 95, and these displays can be visually recognized through the movement display 95.
Since the various displays of the start memory display unit 90, the running memory display 84a, and the decorative special figure start memory display 83a rarely change during the execution of the special figure variation display game, even if the visibility is temporarily reduced, there is no effect. At least, the movement display 95 is displayed so as to overlap the front side. However, it is designed so that it can be visually recognized through the movement display 95 so that the visibility is not significantly reduced.

The second decorative game display unit 82 is changed to display the identification information in a variable manner, but the variable display is simply continued until the result is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative game display unit 81 is displayed. Since it is visible, there is no problem even if the visibility is lowered.
Further, although the game information display unit 91 is changed to display the information, the game explanation and the like are not necessary information immediately, and the same information is repeatedly displayed, so that a problem occurs even if the visibility is lowered. No.

Further, as shown in FIG. 96 (d), the movement display 95 can overlap with the start storage number display units 85a and 85b and the background image, but the movement display 95 is displayed on the front side of these and moves. These displays can be visually recognized through the display 95.
Further, as shown in FIG. 96 (d), the movement display 95 can overlap with the stock number display unit 99, but is displayed on the front side of the stock number display unit 99 and is transparent to the movement display 95. The display of the stock number display unit 99 can be visually recognized.
These displays do not cause any problem even if the visibility is lowered.

Then, at a predetermined timing, an effect of notifying whether or not the related effect can be executed is started.
The related effects include a first related effect in which the upper movable accessory 44a operates and a second related effect in which the lower movable accessory 44b operates, and each of them has an effect of notifying whether or not it can be executed.
As shown in FIG. 96E, the effect of notifying whether or not the first related effect can be executed displays the effect display 96 imitating a waterfall from a position adjacent to the upper movable accessory 44a, and the movement display 95 displays the waterfall. The first related effect is started when the vehicle reaches a position adjacent to the upper movable accessory 44a and disappears.
Here, as shown in FIGS. 96 (e) and 96 (f), the movement display 95 climbs the waterfall, then climbs up the waterfall and reaches a position adjacent to the upper movable accessory 44a and disappears. When the movement display 95 reaches a position adjacent to the upper movable accessory 44a and disappears, the effect display 633 is performed at the position of the upper movable accessory 44a as shown in FIG. 96 (g), and FIG. 96 (h) shows. As shown, the first related effect in which the upper movable accessory 44a operates is executed.

In this effect, the movement display 95 may drop off from the effect display 96 that imitates a waterfall and may not reach the position adjacent to the upper movable accessory 44a. In this case, the first related effect is not executed. The movement display 95 dropped from the effect display 96 may be moved in the display area again, or may be erased from the display area.

Further, the effect of notifying whether or not the second related effect can be executed can be moved downward as shown in FIG. 97 (b) from the state where the movement display 95 is moving in the display area as shown in FIG. 97 (a). When a predetermined number of movement displays 95 are gathered at a position adjacent to the accessory 44b and disappear, the second related effect is started.
Here, a predetermined number of movement displays 95 are gathered at a position adjacent to the lower movable accessory 44b, and then disappear. Based on this, the effect display 634 is performed at the position of the lower movable accessory 44b as shown in FIG. 97 (c), and the second related effect in which the lower movable accessory 44b operates is executed as shown in FIG. 97 (d). Will be done.

In this effect, the movement display 95 may not be collected in a predetermined number or may not be extinguished even if the predetermined number is collected. In this case, the second related effect is not executed. If a predetermined number is not collected or disappears, the movement display 95 is separated and the display area is moved again.

As described above, by notifying whether or not the related effect can be executed by the operation of the movement display 95, it is possible to suggest the possibility of executing the related effect even before the related effect is executed. You can improve your interest. Further, a decorative effect can be expected due to the presence of the moving display 95 in the display area.
Further, since the movement display 95 can be a trigger for both the first related effect and the second related effect, it is not known which related effect is executed when the movement display 95 is displayed, and the hobby of the game is enjoyed. Can be improved.
In addition, as a result of the effect of notifying whether or not the related effect can be executed, the movement display 95 remains in the display area even if the related effect is not executed, so that a feeling of expectation for the execution of the next related effect can be left. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The shape of the movement display 95 is not limited to the one imitating a fish and may be any shape. Further, although the morphology can be changed by performing the swimming motion of the fish here, the morphology may not change even if the fish moves.
Further, the color, shape, and the like may be changed during the movement of the movement display 95 to change to another type of movement display 95.
Further, the movement display 95 may be generated or deleted at an arbitrary timing, or may be generated or deleted when a predetermined condition related to the progress of the game such as the start of the special figure variation display game or the occurrence of the reach state is satisfied. You may want to erase it.
Further, it may be erased when it is moved to a predetermined position in the display area.

As a case where the movement display 95 is newly generated, for example, in the effects shown in FIGS. 96 (e) and 96 (f), the movement display 95 drops off from the waterfall-like effect display 96 and reaches the position of the upper movable accessory 44a. Even if it did not exist. That is, there may be a case where the execution of the first related effect is denied in the effect of notifying whether or not the execution of the first related effect is possible.
By doing so, the movement display 95 that triggers the execution of the first related effect is increased by denying the execution of the first related effect, and the possibility of executing the first related effect is increased. It can be performed, the expectation of the player can be raised, and the interest of the game can be improved.
Further, it may be the case that the execution of the second related effect is denied in the effect of notifying whether or not the execution of the second related effect is possible.

Further, the number of movement displays 95 may be 0, and the number of movement displays may be set to 0 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. As predetermined conditions, for example, power-on with RAM clear, power-out recovery without RAM clear, big hit, small hit, support hit, predetermined effect (specific reach, etc.) are executed. That was done, and that the lottery to erase the movement display 95 was won.
Further, the number of the movement display 95 may be a specific number (initial value) or a randomly selected number when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
In particular, if the movement display 95 is set to 0 or a specific number when the power is turned on with RAM clear, it is possible to show the possibility that the RAM was cleared due to the change in the probability set value, and the player can show the possibility. It can be used as a clue when selecting a game table, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the probability setting value may be suggested or notified according to the mode of the movement display 95. For example, the appearance probability of the movement display 95 of a specific color may be different depending on the probability setting value.
Further, the probability setting value may be suggested or notified by the number of movement displays 95. In this case, a display for notifying the number of the displayed movement displays 95 may be displayed on the display device 41. Further, the display device 41 may display a display for notifying the number of movement displays 95 in the customer waiting state.

Further, the number of moving displays 95 may be used to suggest or notify the degree of expectation that will be a special result.
Further, with respect to the first related effect and the second related effect, the degree of expectation of the special result suggested by the execution of each may be different or the same.

Further, in the effect of notifying whether or not the related effect can be executed, the position where the movement display 95 reaches is set as the position of the board effect device 44, but the position is not limited to this. For example, an arbitrary position such as the center of the display area can be set.
Further, the content of the effect for notifying whether or not the related effect can be executed is not limited to that shown here, and may be any as long as the movement display 95 is used.

Further, although the movement display 95 is displayed so as to be overlapped on the rear side of the stop-displayed identification information, it may be displayed so as to be overlapped on the front side of the stop-displayed identification information.
Further, for information other than the stop-displayed identification information, the movement display 95 is displayed so as to overlap the front side, but the movement display 95 may be displayed so as to overlap the rear side.
Further, depending on the type and situation of the information, the movement display 95 may be displayed overlapping the front side or the rear side. For example, for the decorative special figure start memory display 83a, the movement display 95 is normally displayed so as to overlap the front side, and when a look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a is executed, the movement display 95 is moved. The display 95 may be displayed so as to overlap the rear side.

Further, although the board effect device 44 that operates at the position where the movement display 95 reaches is suggested, the variable winning device that is opened depending on the position where the movement display 95 reaches may be suggested or notified. For example, which of the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the normal variable winning device 37 is opened is suggested or notified by the position where the movement display 95 reaches.

Further, the launch direction may be suggested or notified by the operation of the movement display. For example, in the case of right-handed striking, it may be moved to the right side or clockwise movement of the display area, and in the case of left-handed striking, it may be moved to the left side or counterclockwise movement of the display area. ..

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result.
A production control means (effect control device 300) that controls the production of a game, and
A display means (display device 41) that is controlled by the effect control means and displays information about the game is provided.
The effect control means
The movement display 95 can be displayed so as to move the display area of the display means.
The first related effect can be executed based on the movement display 95 reaching the first position.
The second related effect can be executed based on the movement display 95 reaching the second position.
Therefore, it is possible to notify whether or not the related effect can be executed by the operation of the movement display 95, and it is possible to suggest the possibility of executing the related effect even before the related effect is executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be done.

Further, as a movable accessory that can be moved by being controlled by the effect control means, a first movable accessory (upper movable accessory 44a) and a second movable accessory (lower movable accessory 44b) are provided. ,
The effect control means
The first movable accessory can be operated in the first related effect.
The second movable accessory can be operated in the second related effect.
Therefore, the movement display 95, which is the display of the display device 41, and the operation of the accessory can be linked, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means is
The first position is set to a position adjacent to the first movable accessory.
The second position is a position adjacent to the second movable accessory.
Therefore, it is possible to suggest an accessory that may move, and it is possible to make the production easy to understand.

Next, an example of the operation and effect of the special variable winning device when the special gaming state occurs will be described.
FIG. 98 shows a case where a specific big hit (first special result) occurs and a case where a small hit (second special result) occurs among the big hits. In this figure, the case of a specific big hit and the case of a small hit are described on the same time axis.

When the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes a specific big hit or small hit ends and the fluctuation display ends (t202), the stop display time for displaying the result is reached (t202 to t203).
When this stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game ends, and the first special game state (big hit game state) based on a specific big hit or the second special game state (small hit game state) based on a small hit is started. (T203).
When the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state is started, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the firing direction is right-handed. It is started (t203).

If the result is a small hit, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened after the fanfare period (t203 to t204) has elapsed from the start of the second special gaming state (t204).
After that, it is opened for a predetermined opening time (t204 to t205) and closed as the opening time elapses (t205).
The closing condition of the first special variable winning device 38 is until either the opening time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, but since the opening time is short, it is opened in most cases. It will be closed over time.
Further, in the case of a small hit, the jackpot notification unit 630, which is executed when the jackpot is a big hit, is turned on, and the second launch instruction notification, which is executed only in the case of a big hit, is not performed.
In the case of a small hit, after that, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again to end the special game state.

If the result is a specific jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened after the fanfare period (t203 to t204) has elapsed from the start of the first special gaming state (t204).
The fanfare period is the same for specific big hits and small hits, and in the case of specific big hits and small hits, the first special variable winning device 38 will be released at the same timing from the start of the special game state. Become.
That is, at this point, it is not possible to determine whether the result is a specific big hit or a small hit from the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the opening of the first special variable winning device 38, a jackpot notification effect for notifying that the jackpot is a jackpot is started (t205).
The start timing of this big hit notification effect is the same as the timing at which the first special variable winning device 38 closes due to the passage of the opening time in the case of a small hit.
That is, the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 differs between the specific big hit and the small hit at this timing, and the result is either a specific big hit or a small hit from the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38. It becomes possible to determine whether or not. Therefore, from this timing, the jackpot notification unit 630 is turned on to notify that the jackpot is a jackpot.
Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the jackpot notification effect, the second launch instruction notification for instructing a right-handed strike is started (t206).
From the above, it is possible to determine whether the big hit notification effect, the lighting of the big hit notification unit, the second launch instruction notification, and the small hit notification effect are in the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state. Eggplant.

In the case of a big hit, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for an opening time longer than the opening time in the case of a small hit, so that many prize balls are easily won by the game ball. That is, the first special gaming state based on the big hit is more valuable to the player than the second special gaming state based on the small hit.

In addition, regarding the production of the game, in the special figure variation display game in which a specific big hit or small hit is performed, a predetermined time at which the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends after the game production corresponding to each special figure variation display game is executed. The specific effect is started from the front (t201).
The specific effect is continuously executed even if the special figure variation display game ends and the special game state is started, and as described above, the behavior of the first special variation winning device 38 differs between the specific big hit and the small hit. It is continued until the timing (t205) becomes.
This specific effect is a common effect in the case of a specific big hit and the case of a small hit, and it is difficult to determine whether it is a specific big hit or a small hit from the content of the effect.
After the specific effect is completed, the big hit effect is executed in the case of a specific big hit, and the small hit effect is executed in the case of a small hit.

99 and 100 show an example of a specific effect.
After the game effect corresponding to each special figure variation display game is executed as shown in FIG. 99 (a), and before the predetermined time when the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends as shown in FIG. 99 (b). Then, a common specific effect is started in the case of a specific big hit and the case of a small hit (t201 in FIG. 98).
In the specific effect, the first decoration game display unit 81 is erased and only the second decoration game display unit 82 is displayed for the decoration special figure variation display game.

As shown in FIG. 99 (c), a common specific effect is executed until the end of the fluctuation time, and when the fluctuation time ends and the stop display time is reached (t202 in FIG. 98), the result is a specific jackpot. As shown in 99 (d), the first special result (here, "444") is displayed on the second decorative game display unit 82, the first launch instruction notification 635 for instructing a right-handed strike is started, and the lower movable accessory. 44b works.
When the result is a small hit, it is the same as the case of a big hit except that the second special result (here, "241") is displayed on the second decorative game display unit 82 as shown in FIG. 99 (e).
Then, with the start of the special game state, the second decorative game display unit 82 is erased as shown in FIG. 99 (f) (t203 in FIG. 98). Other indications and the position of the lower movable accessory 44b are maintained.

In the cases of the specific big hit and the small hit in FIGS. 99 (b) to 99 (f), the content of the specific effect is the same, but the result mode displayed on the second decorative game display unit 82 is different.
However, the time for displaying the result mode on the second decorative game display unit 82 is a short time, and since it is displayed as a small symbol and is displayed in the corner of the display area, it is inconspicuous, and the player determines the result. It is said to be difficult.
Further, it is difficult to discriminate the result by concentrating the player's line of sight on the center and the lower part of the display area by displaying the character or moving the lower movable accessory 44b.

When the special gaming state progresses and the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 differs between the specific big hit and the small hit (t205 in FIG. 98), the specific big hit is as shown in FIG. 100 (a). The jackpot effect is started as a notification effect, and the lighting of the jackpot notification unit 630 is also started. Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the second launch instruction notification 636 for instructing a right-handed strike is started.

After that, when the special game state based on a specific jackpot ends, the next special figure variation display game can be started. At this time, different result modes are used between the result mode corresponding to the specific jackpot displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the result mode corresponding to the specific jackpot displayed on the second decorative game display unit 82. Further, as the result mode of the first decorative game display unit 81, a result mode including a special symbol "special" which is not used in other result modes is used.
The same result mode may be displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82.

When the result is a small hit, when the behavior of the first special variation winning device 38 is different between the big hit and the small hit (t205 in FIG. 98), the small hit effect is produced as a notification effect as shown in FIG. 100 (d). Is started. Further, the jackpot notification unit 630 does not light up, and the second launch instruction notification 636 for instructing a right-handed strike is not performed.
After that, when the special game state based on the small hit ends, the next special figure variation display game can be started. At this time, the same result mode corresponding to the small hit displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the result mode corresponding to the small hit displayed on the second decorative game display unit 82 are used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (e), when the firing direction returns to left-handed due to the end of the special gaming state, a third firing instruction notification 637 for instructing left-handed is performed.
At this time, a notification sound instructing left-handed hitting is output at the first volume, and then right-handed hitting is performed by detecting a game ball at the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the general winning opening 35 on the right side. Is detected, the notification sound is output at a second volume higher than the first volume.
In the case of FIG. 100 (c), the time is shortened after the end of the special game state, and the firing direction is left to be right-handed, so that the third launch instruction notification is not performed, but as shown in FIG. 100 (e). Similarly, the third launch instruction notification may be performed.

As described above, by making the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 the same for the specific big hit and the small hit until the middle of the special gaming state and executing a common specific effect, the special figure variation display game It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a specific big hit and a small hit from before the end to the middle of the special game state, and it is possible to execute a novel effect that the result is not clear even after the special figure variation display game ends. Can improve the interest of.

The timing at which the behavior of the first special variation winning device 38 differs between the specific big hit and the small hit (t205 in FIG. 98), the end timing of the specific effect, and the lighting timing of the big hit notification unit 630 are set to the same timing, but at least The end timing of the specific effect and the lighting timing of the big hit notification unit 630 may be set to be after the timing when the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 is different between the specific big hit and the small hit.
Further, the start timing of the first launch instruction notification 635 may be the same as the opening timing of the first special variable winning device 38. Further, the start timing of the first launch instruction notification 635 may be later than the opening timing of the first special variable winning device 38, and the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 differs between a specific big hit and a small hit. It may be after that.

Further, the start timing of the specific effect may be set to after the start of the special gaming state. In this case, in the special figure variation display game that is a specific big hit or small hit, the specific big hit and the small hit are made the same by making the result mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 the same. It is preferable to make it difficult to distinguish.
Further, the end timing of the specific effect may be set to a timing after the timing in which the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 differs between the specific big hit and the small hit.

Further, the result mode displayed on the second decorative game display unit 82 is common to the case of a specific big hit and the case of a small hit, and from the result displayed on the second decorative game display unit 82, a specific big hit and a small hit are obtained. May be indistinguishable. As the result mode in this case, it is preferable to use a result mode other than doublet so that a small hit is not mistaken as a big hit. Further, the second decorative game display unit 82 may not be displayed.
Further, the result mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 corresponding to a specific jackpot is set to the result mode including a special symbol that is not used in other result modes, but the result mode of the second decorative game display unit 82 is special. The result mode may include a symbol.
Further, the result mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the result mode of the second decorative game display unit 82 corresponding to the small hit may be the result mode including the special symbol.

Further, by shortening the period from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game to the opening of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 as much as possible, it is possible to prevent grasping the result mode by checking the special figure displays 51 and 52. Can be done.
As a method of shortening the above period, for example, the stop display time for displaying the result (t202 to t203 in FIG. 98) is set to the same time as the stop display time when the result is out of order or a time shorter than the stop display time. Or, the time may be shorter than the stop display time when the result is a big hit other than a specific big hit.
Further, the fanfare time (t203 to t204 in FIG. 98) may be shorter than the fanfare time in the case where the result is a big hit other than a specific big hit.

Further, although it is difficult to distinguish a specific big hit from a small hit as described above, it may be difficult to distinguish all big hits from a small hit. Further, it may be difficult to distinguish a specific small hit among the small hits from a specific big hit as described above.
Further, although the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a specific big hit and small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 may be opened.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result.
A production control means (effect control device 300) that controls the production of a game, and
A special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) that is opened in the special gaming state is provided.
The special results include a first special result (big hit) and a second special result (small hit).
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state that is executed when the first special result is derived, and a first special gaming state that is executed when the second special result is derived, and is more than the first special gaming state. There is a second special gaming state, which has a low value given to the player,
The operation mode of the special variable winning device in the first special game state and the second special game state is the same operation mode for a certain period from the start of the special game state.
The effect control means
During the fixed period in the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state, it is possible to execute a specific effect which is the same effect.
Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a big hit and a small hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect control means is
In the game that results in the first special result or the second special result, the specific effect can be started from a predetermined timing before the end of the game.
Therefore, it is possible to execute a novel effect that the result is not clear even after the special figure variation display game is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect control means is
After the end of the specific effect, it is possible to perform a notification effect capable of determining which of the first special game state and the second special game state is.
Therefore, the player can clearly grasp the result mode.

Further, the effect control means is
With the start of the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state, the first launch instruction notification for instructing the launch direction in which a prize can be won is given to the special variable winning device.
Along with the end of the specific effect in the first special gaming state, a second launch instruction notification for instructing the launch direction in which a prize can be won is given to the special variable winning device.
Therefore, in the case of a big hit, the game ball can be reliably won in the special variable winning device.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can be combined with the configurations of other embodiments and modifications.
For example, the information of the variation selection table group shown in FIG. 9 may be displayed on the game information display unit 91 or the effect mode notification unit 93. The information to be displayed includes the suggestion or notification of the currently set fluctuation information table group, the suggestion or notification of the fluctuation selection table group set next, the suggestion or notification of the previously set fluctuation selection table group, and the fluctuation selection. Suggestions or notifications of changes in the table group can be mentioned.
Further, the form of the start storage display unit 90, the form of the movement display 95, and the like may be different depending on the selected variable selection table group.
Further, the variable selection table group may be changed when the movement display 95 reaches a specific position.

Further, the game information display unit 91 may display the information regarding the reset of the number of times of support shown in FIGS. 10 and 11. Examples of the information to be displayed include suggestion or notification of information that the reset has been performed, and suggestion or notification of information on the remaining number of times of support.
Further, the form of the start storage display unit 90, the form of the movement display 95, and the like may be different depending on the remaining number of times of support.
Further, the support count may be reset when the movement display 95 reaches a specific position.

Further, the display on the start memory display unit 90 or the movement display may be used for the effect of hitting the support shown in FIG. 42 or the like. For example, the game information display unit 91 may suggest or notify the derivation of the support hit, or the support hit may be derived when the movement display 95 reaches a specific position.

In addition, a specific effect common to the special figure variation display game that is a support hit and the special figure variation display game that is out of order may be executed.
As this specific effect, it is possible to start from a predetermined time before the end of the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game, which is an off or hit, and end during the fluctuation time of the next special figure variation display game.
The timing at which the specific effect ends may be a predetermined time after the start of the next special figure variation display game, or may be until the timing at which the normal variation winning device 37 opens in the case of a support hit.

Further, regarding the notification of the number of times of support given as shown in FIG. 50 or the like, the information on the number of times of support given may be displayed on the game information display unit 91, or is given at the position where the movement display 95 reaches. The number of times of support may be notified.
Further, with respect to the change in visibility shown in FIG. 52 and the like, the visibility of the other display may be changed by overlapping the movement display 95 with the other display.

[Time saving ceiling]
As described above, the gaming machine of each embodiment may be equipped with a so-called ceiling function. That is, in addition to the case where the game result is a support hit (or instead), when the number of times the predetermined game is executed reaches the ceiling number n, the specific game state (Public Den) without generating the special game state. Support) may be generated. The predetermined game here may be an out-of-figure game (a special figure variation display game in which the result is "out of place") or a game in which a special gaming state is not generated (a special figure variation display game in which the result is "out of place"). , The special figure variation display game in which the result is "per support"), or the game in which the first special gaming state is not generated (the special figure variation display game in which the result is "missing"), the result is "per support". The special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is a "small hit") may be used.

The number of ceilings n is a number of times determined based on a probability value (a probability value that gives a special result in a special figure variation display game). The number of ceilings n is preferably an integer satisfying 2.0P ≦ n ≦ 4.0P (P is the reciprocal of the probability value), and more preferably 2.5P ≦ n ≦ 3.0P (P is the reciprocal of the probability value). It is an integer that satisfies.
In addition, the number of support times (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction number N") in the chance mode (Public electricity support) triggered by reaching the ceiling number n is also determined based on the probability value (probability value that will be a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game). The number of times it is done. The time reduction frequency N is preferably an integer satisfying 0.1P ≦ N ≦ 4.0P (P is the reciprocal of the probability value), and more preferably 0.4P ≦ N ≦ 3.8P (P is the reciprocal of the probability value). It is an integer that satisfies.

In this embodiment, the number of times determined based on the probability value corresponding to the lowest probability setting value (setting 1) is set as the number of ceilings n. Therefore, even if the probability setting value is changed, the number of ceilings n does not change. The number of ceilings n is not limited to the number of times based on the probability value corresponding to the lowest probability setting value, but is the number of times based on the probability value corresponding to other probability setting values (for example, the highest probability setting value). Is also good.
Further, the number of times determined based on the probability value of the first special result (big hit) is set as the number of ceilings n, but is not limited to this. That is, the number of ceilings n may be the number of times based on the probability value of the first special result (big hit), or the number of times based on the probability value of the second special result (small hit). The number of times may be based on the total probability of the probability value of the first special result and the probability value of the second special result.

Further, the number of times determined based on the probability value in the low probability state is set as the number of ceilings n, but is not limited to this. That is, the number of ceilings n may be the number of times based on the probability value in the low probability state or the number of times based on the probability value in the high probability state.
Further, the number of ceilings n may be of a plurality of types, and for example, the number of times determined based on the probability value corresponding to the currently selected probability setting value may be set as the number of ceilings n. This makes it possible to suggest the probability setting value currently selected by the number of ceilings n.

In this embodiment, the number of times determined based on the probability value corresponding to the lowest probability setting value (setting 1) is set as the time saving number N. Therefore, even if the probability setting value is changed, the time reduction number N does not change. Note that the time reduction number N is not limited to the number of times based on the probability value corresponding to the lowest probability setting value, but is the number of times based on the probability value corresponding to other probability setting values (for example, the highest probability setting value). Is also good.
Further, the number of times determined based on the probability value of the first special result (big hit) is set as the time saving number N, but is not limited to this. That is, the time reduction number N may be the number of times based on the probability value of the first special result (big hit), or may be the number of times based on the probability value of the second special result (small hit). The number of times may be based on the total probability of the probability value of the first special result and the probability value of the second special result.

Further, the number of times determined based on the probability value in the low probability state is set as the time saving number N, but is not limited to this. That is, the time saving number N may be the number of times based on the probability value in the low probability state, or may be the number of times based on the probability value in the high probability state.
Further, there may be a plurality of types of time reduction times N, and for example, the number of times determined based on the probability value corresponding to the currently selected probability setting value may be set as the time reduction number N. This makes it possible to suggest the probability setting value currently selected by the time reduction number N.
Further, the number of ceilings n and the number of time reductions N are determined based on the probability values corresponding to the same probability setting value, but are not limited thereto. That is, the probability value for determining the number of ceilings n and the probability value for determining the number of time reductions N may be the same or different.

The timing to clear the measurement of the number of times a predetermined game has been executed (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times the game has been executed"), that is, the beginning of the measurement is the chance mode (1) when the RAM is cleared and (2) when the number of ceilings reaches n. There are four ways: (Public power support), (3) When the condition device is operating (Big hit game state), and (4) Chance mode (Public power support) triggered by a support hit. Further, when the ceiling function is mounted on the 1 type + 2 types of gaming machines, in addition to these four ways, the measurement of the number of times the game is executed may be cleared even in the small hit game state. The timing for clearing the measurement of the number of times the game is executed can be changed as appropriate. For example, any one or a plurality of these four ways may be used, or the timing may be changed when the RAM is cleared. It may be when the power is turned on.
Further, among the RAM clearing, the measurement of the number of game executions may be cleared when the RAM is cleared without changing the setting, and the measurement of the number of game executions may not be cleared when the RAM is cleared with the setting change. The time when the RAM is cleared without changing the setting is, for example, when the power is turned on while the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 152. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to determine that the setting has been changed by not clearing the measurement of the number of times the game has been executed when the RAM is cleared with the setting change.

The number of game executions is always measured in the low-probability state regardless of the presence or absence of normal power support, and the measurement is interrupted in the high-probability state. In addition to (or instead of) the high-probability state, the measurement of the number of game executions should be interrupted in other game states (for example, the first special game state, the second special game state, or the state where there is a general electric support). You can do it. Further, the number of times the game is executed may be constantly measured regardless of the game state.
The number of times the game is executed is the total of the number of times the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. In the measurement of the number of game executions, only one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, only the main fluctuation) may be measured.

In addition, depending on the game state, the total number of times the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the total number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is measured as the number of game executions, and the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The number of times and the special figure 2 The state in which only one of the number of times the variable display game is executed is measured as the number of times the game is executed may be switched. Specifically, for example, in the state where there is Fuden support, the total number of times the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is measured as the number of game executions, and in the normal game state, the total number of times the game is executed is measured. , Only the number of times the main fluctuation is executed may be measured as the number of times the game is executed. In this case, the game control device 100 stores the total number of times the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the total number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed as the normal probability fluctuation number region (described later). The number-of-times area and the second normal probability fluctuation number-of-times area that stores only one of the number of times the special figure 1 variation display game is executed and the number of times the special figure 2 variation-display game is executed (the number of times the main variation is executed) are stored. In addition, the first normal probability fluctuation number region and the second normal probability fluctuation number region may be used properly according to the game state.

The measurement timing of the number of times the game is executed is after the end of the variation time of the special figure variation display game (for example, at the end of the stop display time). Further, the transition timing to the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n is set after the end of the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game that causes the number of game executions to reach the number of ceilings n (for example, at the end of the stop display time). .. Therefore, for example, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time and the number of ceilings n is 300, the 300th rotation (long variation) starts in special figure 2. If the 301st rotation starts and ends in the special figure 1 before the 300th rotation of the special figure 2 ends, the number of game executions is measured (updated) after the variation of the 301st rotation of the special figure 1 ends. The number of ceilings n will be reached.
That is, since the special figure variation display game (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling reaching game") that causes the game execution number to reach the ceiling number n is the 301st rotation of the special figure 1, there is a chance after the variation of the 301st rotation of the special figure 1 is completed. The mode occurs.

The measurement timing of the number of game executions is not limited to after the end of the variation time of the special figure variation display game (for example, at the end of the stop display time), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the variation of the special figure variation display game. It may be at the end of the time (that is, at the start of the stop display time), or at the start of the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game.
Further, the timing of transition to the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the ceiling number n is not limited to after the end of the fluctuation time of the ceiling arrival game (for example, at the end of the stop display time), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the ceiling. It may be at the end of the variation time of the arrival game (that is, at the start of the stop display time), or at the start of the variation time of the ceiling arrival game.
Further, the transition timing to the chance mode triggered by the support hit is set after the end of the fluctuation time of the support hit game (for example, at the end of the stop display time), but is not limited to this, and for example, the support hit game. It may be at the end of the fluctuation time (that is, at the start of the stop display time), or at the start of the fluctuation time of the game per support.

When the chance mode ends when the ceiling count reaches n, (1) the lottery related to the operation of the condition device is performed a specified number of times (that is, when the time reduction number N is exhausted), and (2) the condition device is activated. There are two cases (that is, when a big hit game state occurs). That is, the end trigger of the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n is the same as the end trigger of the chance mode triggered by the support hit. The end trigger of the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n may be different from the end trigger of the chance mode triggered by the support hit.

In the chance mode triggered by reaching the ceiling number n, various times such as the normal figure probability (probability of winning the normal figure fluctuation display game), the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the opening / closing pattern of the ordinary electric accessory are There is one type for each. It should be noted that, in the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n, there may be a plurality of types of opening / closing patterns of the normal electric accessory, various times such as the normal figure probability, the variable time of the normal figure variation display game, and the like. You may select from a plurality of types based on the symbol displayed last (that is, the stop symbol of the ceiling reaching game) and the like.
Further, the probability of the normal map in the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n may be the same as or different from the probability of the normal map in the chance mode triggered by the support hit.
Further, the various times such as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game in the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n are the same as the various times such as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game in the chance mode triggered by the support hit. It may be, or it may be different.
Further, the opening / closing pattern of the ordinary electric accessory in the chance mode triggered by reaching the ceiling number n may be the same as or different from the opening / closing pattern of the ordinary electric accessory in the chance mode triggered by the support hit. Is also good.

When the result of the ceiling reaching game is a support, the game shifts to the chance mode triggered by reaching the ceiling number n, and the time saving number N is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, if the first condition that the number of game executions reaches the ceiling number n and the second condition that the result of the game is a support are satisfied at the same time, the first condition may be prioritized. The second condition may be prioritized, or which one may be prioritized may be selected each time.

A lottery for each support is performed during the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n and / or during the chance mode triggered by the hit of the support, and if the lottery is won, the hit of the support is derived (the symbol per support). (Display) On the other hand, the chance mode triggered by the support hit does not occur, but it is not limited to this. That is, during the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n and / or the chance mode triggered by the support hit, a new chance mode triggered by the support hit may not be generated, or the support hit may be generated. A new chance mode may be generated as an opportunity. Further, during the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n and / or the chance mode triggered by the support hit, the lottery per support may not be performed (the support hit may not be derived).

In 1 type + 2 types of gaming machines, if the result of the ceiling reaching game is a small hit with support (a small hit where the number of supports is set to other than 0), the chance mode is entered when the number of ceilings reaches n. It is decided to shift and set the time saving number N, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, if the first condition that the number of game executions reaches the ceiling number n and the second condition that the result of the game is a small hit with support are satisfied at the same time, the first condition may be prioritized. However, the second condition may be prioritized, or which one may be prioritized may be selected each time.

In 1 type + 2 types of gaming machines, during the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n and / or during the chance mode triggered by the small hit with support, it is possible to derive the small hit with support, while the support is present. The chance mode triggered by a small hit does not occur, but it is not limited to this. That is, during the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n and / or the chance mode triggered by the small hit with support, a new chance mode triggered by the small hit with support may not be generated. , There may be a new chance mode triggered by a small hit with support. Further, during the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n and / or the chance mode triggered by the small hit with support, the small hit with support may not be derived.

For the fluctuation pattern of the ceiling reaching game, a dedicated fluctuation pattern will be selected. Specifically, for example, in a gaming machine in which the number of ceilings n is 900, the special figure variation display game at the 900th rotation is counted as the number of game executions (for example, the result is "missing"". In the case of the special figure variation display game), a dedicated variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game at the 900th rotation.
The dedicated fluctuation pattern is, for example, a fluctuation pattern in which reach does not occur, and a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time is set long enough to execute a chance mode entry notification effect for notifying the entry into the chance mode. be. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute the chance mode entry notification effect during the fluctuation time of the ceiling reaching game, and it is possible to have a connection with the effect (fanfare effect, etc.) executed at the start of the chance mode. ..

On the other hand, if the special figure variation display game at the 900th rotation is a special figure variation display game in which the game is not counted as the number of times the game is executed (for example, a special figure variation display game in which the result is a "big hit"), the special figure variation display game at the 900th rotation is a special figure. Figure variation display During the variation time of the game, a part of the chance mode entry notification effect (for example, the first half part) is executed, and then a reach state is generated (or the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed).
In this way, regardless of whether or not the transition to the chance mode is triggered by the special figure fluctuation display game at the 900th rotation, at least a part of the chance mode entry notification effect is executed in the special figure fluctuation display game at the 900th rotation. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the result of the special figure variation display game is grasped in the first half of the special figure variation display game at the 900th rotation, and the interest of the game is improved.

For example, if the transition timing to the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the ceiling number n is at the start of the fluctuation time of the ceiling arrival game, the chance mode entry notification effect is executed after the transition to the chance mode. Become. Further, in this case, since the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game after shifting to the chance mode becomes a dedicated fluctuation pattern, the rotation speed control is not complicated and simpler control becomes possible.
In this embodiment, after the end of the fluctuation time of the ceiling reaching game, the mode shifts to the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the ceiling number n, so that the fluctuation pattern of the last special figure fluctuation display game before the transition to the chance mode is , It becomes a dedicated fluctuation pattern.

The special figure fluctuation display game executed during the chance mode triggered by reaching the ceiling number n and / or during the chance mode triggered by the support hit becomes the first special result, and the first special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is set. When it occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), the caution image G1 regarding the prevention of sinking in the first special game state is displayed.
In the example shown in FIG. 101 (a), the attention alert image G1 is displayed at the end of the first special game state, specifically during the ending time of the jackpot, but the display timing of the alert image G1 is It can be changed as appropriate during the first special gaming state (during the first special gaming state), and may be displayed, for example, during the big hit fanfare time.

In addition, the jackpot game (special figure variation display game whose result is "big hit") executed during the chance mode triggered by reaching the ceiling number n and / or the chance mode triggered by the support hit shifts to the chance mode. Then, only in the case of the first big hit game, the caution image G1 may be displayed in the first special game state based on the big hit game. Further, only when the jackpot game executed during the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n and / or the chance mode triggered by the support hit is the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable), the jackpot game is concerned. The caution image G1 may be displayed in the first special game state based on the above. Further, only when the jackpot game executed during the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n and / or the chance mode triggered by the support hit is the special figure 1 variable display game (irregular fluctuation), the jackpot The alert image G1 may be displayed during the first special game state based on the game.
In addition, the alert image G1 may not be displayed during the first special game state based on the jackpot game executed during the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n and / or the chance mode triggered by the support hit. .. In addition, the alert image G1 is displayed during a period other than the first special game state based on the jackpot game executed during the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the ceiling number n and / or the chance mode triggered by the support hit. You can do it.

FIGS. 101 (b) to 101 (d) show an example of a probability value (big hit probability) corresponding to each probability set value, an example of the number of ceilings n, and an example of the number of times of support.
In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), the number of ceilings n is set to 900 times, which is three times the reciprocal of the probability value (1/300) in the low probability state corresponding to setting 1. ing.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (d), the number of times of support (that is, the number of time reductions N) in the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n is the probability value (1/300) in the low probability state corresponding to the setting 1. ) Is set to 1000 times, which is about 3.3 times the reciprocal of). Further, the number of times of support in the chance mode triggered by the big hit, that is, the chance mode via the big hit gaming state is 100 times or 1000 times. Specifically, as described above, "100 times" is the number of times the normal jackpot is supported, and "1000 times" is the number of times the probability variation A jackpot is supported. In addition, the number of times of support in the chance mode triggered by the support hit is 20, 100, or 1000 times. Specifically, as described above, "20 times" is the number of times A is supported per support, "100 times" is the number of times B is supported per support, and "1000 times" is the number of times C is supported per support. be.

[Processing during special figure display]
In the gaming machine equipped with the ceiling function, the game control device 100 executes the special figure display processing shown in FIGS. 102 and 103 instead of the special figure display processing shown in FIGS. 29 and 30. In this special figure display processing, as shown in FIG. 102, when the game result is a big hit (step A707; Y or step A708; Y), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A726) Before, the initial value (900 in this case) is saved in the normal probability fluctuation frequency region (step A761). As a result, the measurement of the normal probability fluctuation number (game execution number) is cleared at the start of the jackpot game state (first special game state). It should be noted that the time when the condition device is activated (in the big hit game state) among the timings for clearing the measurement of the number of times the game is executed is not limited to the start of the big hit game state, and can be changed as appropriate during the big hit game state. For example, it may be at the end of the jackpot game state.

Further, in this special figure display processing, as shown in FIG. 103, when the game result is a small hit (step A727; Y or step A728; Y), before the effect mode information check process (step A732). In addition, the normal probability fluctuation number update process (step A762) is performed.
Further, when the game result is per support (step A740; Y or step A741; Y), the time reduction variation number update process (step A763) and the normal probability variation are performed before the support operation setting process (step A742). The number of times update process (step A764) is performed. In step A763, for example, the time reduction variation number update process shown in FIG. 31 is executed.
If the game result is out of alignment (step A741; N), the normal probability fluctuation number update process (step A765) is performed before the effect mode information check process (step A745).

In the special figure display processing shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, a game that does not generate the first special gaming state (a special figure variation display game in which the result is "missing", and a special figure variation in which the result is "support hit"". The number of times the display game and the special figure variation display game in which the result is a "small hit" is executed is counted as the number of times the game is executed.
When counting the number of times a game that does not generate a special game state (a special figure variation display game whose result is "off", a special figure variation display game whose result is "per support") is counted as the number of game executions, Of the processes shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the process of step A762 is not executed.
Further, when the number of times the off-game is executed is counted as the number of times the game is executed, the processes of steps A762, A763, and A764 among the processes shown in FIGS. 102 and 103 are not executed, and in step A742, FIG. The support operation setting process shown in 35 is executed.

[Normal probability fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 104 shows a normal probability fluctuation number update process (steps A762, A764, A765) in the above-mentioned special figure display process. In this normal probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (step A61), and when the special figure is in high probability (step A61; Y). Ends the normal probability fluctuation number update process. As a result, the measurement of the normal probability fluctuation number (game execution number) is interrupted in the high probability state.
On the other hand, when the probability of the special figure is not high (step A61; N), the normal probability fluctuation number is updated by -1 (step A62). As a result, the normal probability fluctuation number (game execution number) is measured (updated) at the end of the stop display time of the special figure variation display game.

Next, the normal probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the normal probability fluctuation number is prepared (step A63), and the effect command setting process (step A64) is performed. As a result, a normal probability fluctuation number command for notifying the normal probability fluctuation number (game execution number) is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
Next, it is determined whether the number of normal probability fluctuations is "0" (step A65), and if the number of normal probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A65; N), the normal probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of normal probability fluctuations becomes "0" (step A65; Y), the initial value (900 in this case) is saved in the normal probability fluctuation number region (step A66). As a result, the measurement of the normal probability fluctuation number (game execution number) is cleared at the start of the chance mode (Public power support) triggered by the arrival of the ceiling number n. It should be noted that the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the ceiling number n in the timing of clearing the measurement of the number of game executions is not limited to the start of the chance mode, and can be changed as appropriate during the chance mode, for example, a chance. It may be at the end of the mode.

Next, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A67), and the initial value for the time reduction ceiling (here, 1000) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation frequency area (step A68). When the normal probability fluctuation number update process is the process of step A764, that is, when the result of the ceiling reaching game is a support, the process of step A67 is executed to start the change (when the stop symbol is set). The time reduction determination data (steps A451 and A491) set in is cleared, and the time reduction number N is set as the time reduction fluctuation number (support number) by executing the process of step A68. As a result, when the first condition that the number of game executions reaches the ceiling number n and the second condition that the result of the game is a support are satisfied at the same time, the first condition is prioritized.

Next, the signal related to the start of the time reduction (for example, 2 jackpot signals are turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A69), and the signal related to the start of the time reduction (for example, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is turned ON). Special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal ON, ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal ON) test signal output data area Save to (step A70).

Next, the number with the time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A71), the normal figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the normal figure gate mode flag area (step A72), and the probability state flag is maintained. In order to reduce the time required, a special figure time saving flag is synthesized in the special figure game mode flag area (step A73).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A74), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56a) is turned on. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A75), and the normal probability fluctuation number update process is completed.

[Support operation setting process]
In the gaming machine equipped with the ceiling function, the game control device 100 executes the support operation setting process shown in FIG. 105 instead of the support operation setting process shown in FIG. 35. In this support operation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A843). When the time reduction determination data area is not cleared (step A843; N), that is, when the process of step A67 is not executed in the immediately preceding normal probability change number update process (step A764), the normal probability change number area The initial value (900 in this case) is saved in (step A844). As a result, the measurement of the normal probability fluctuation number (game execution number) is cleared at the start of the chance mode (Public power support) triggered by the support hit. After that, the processes of steps A821 to A828 are performed, and the process proceeds to the process of steps A829.
It should be noted that the chance mode triggered by the support hit in the timing of clearing the measurement of the number of times the game is executed is not limited to the start of the chance mode, and can be changed as appropriate during the chance mode, for example, in the chance mode. It may be at the end.

On the other hand, when the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A843; Y), that is, when the processes of steps A66 to A75 are executed in the immediately preceding normal probability fluctuation number update process (step A764), the immediately preceding process is performed. Since the process corresponding to steps A844 and A821 to A828 has already been executed in the normal probability fluctuation number update process (step A764) of the above, the process proceeds to step A829 without performing the process of steps A844 and A821 to A828. ..

[Ceiling suggestion production]
In a gaming machine equipped with a ceiling function, the effect control device 300 can execute a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests information regarding the number of times the game is executed (the number of times the game is executed, the number of remaining rotations up to the number of times the ceiling is n, and the like).
In this embodiment, the effect control device 300 determines, for example, whether or not the measurement interruption period of the number of game executions (for example, in a high probability state) is set at the start of the special figure variation display game, and determines that it is not the measurement interruption period. In this case, it is determined whether or not the number of times the game is executed is equal to or greater than a specific number of times, and if it is determined that the number of times the game is executed is equal to or greater than the specific number of times, the ceiling suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation display game. Further, in this embodiment, the specific number of times is set to 599 times.

In this embodiment, the number of game executions is measured (updated) after the end of the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game. Therefore, when the number of game executions is 599 times or more, the ceiling suggestion effect is executed to perform the 600th rotation. It is possible to execute the ceiling suggestion effect in each of the above special figure variation display games. That is, when the remaining rotation speed up to the ceiling number n reaches 300 rotations (the reciprocal of the probability value (1/300) in the low probability state corresponding to the setting 1), the execution of the ceiling suggestion effect is lifted.
The specific number of times is not limited to 599 times and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be 0 times. That is, the execution of the ceiling suggestion effect is not prohibited until the remaining number of rotations up to the number of ceilings n becomes "the reciprocal of the probability value in the low probability state corresponding to setting 1". It may be possible to execute the ceiling suggestion effect regardless of the number of rotations.

In the ceiling suggestion effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), a light emitting member (LED or the like) provided in the board effect device 44 is emitted in a light emitting mode (light emitting color) corresponding to the number of times the game is executed. It is a production that makes you let. Therefore, by executing the ceiling suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest that the remaining rotation speed up to the ceiling number n is 300 rotations or less (information regarding the number of times the game is executed), and further, the light emitting mode of the board effect device 44 (corresponding to the above). The effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect) can suggest the approximate number of times the game has been executed (information about the number of times the game has been executed) at the present time.

When a plurality of light emitting members are provided in the board effect device 44, all of the plurality of light emitting members may be made to emit light in the ceiling suggestion effect, or a part of the plurality of light emitting members may be made to emit light. You may let me. Further, the light emitting member arranged at a position corresponding to the number of times the game is executed among the plurality of light emitting members may be made to emit light. Information about the number of times the game has been executed) can be suggested.
Further, when the gaming machine 10 is provided with a plurality of board effect devices 44, all of the plurality of board effect devices 44 may be made to emit light in the ceiling suggestion effect, or the plurality of board effect devices 44 may be made to emit light. A part of the light may be emitted. Further, the board effect device 44 corresponding to the number of times the game is executed among the plurality of board effect devices 44 may be made to emit light. (Information about the number of times the game is executed) can be suggested.
Further, in the ceiling suggestion effect, instead of (or in addition to) the board effect device 44, another effect device such as the model name display unit 16, the frame decoration device 18, or the board decoration device 46 may be made to emit light. Further, the effect device corresponding to the number of times the game is executed among a plurality of effect devices such as the board effect device 44, the model name display unit 16, the frame decoration device 18, and the board decoration device 46 may be made to emit light. In that case, it is possible to suggest the approximate number of times the game has been executed (information about the number of times the game has been executed) at the present time by the light emitting effect device.

Further, the ceiling suggestion effect is not limited to the effect of causing the effect device to emit light.
The ceiling suggestion effect may be an effect of displaying the meter image G2 on the display device 41 or the like, for example, as shown in FIG. 106 (c). According to this ceiling suggestion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), the meter image G2 is displayed in a display mode (meter value) corresponding to the number of times the game is executed, so that the display mode of the meter image G2 (the ceiling). It is possible to suggest the approximate number of times the game has been executed (information about the number of times the game has been executed) at the present time, depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. In the example shown in FIG. 106 (c), since the meter value of the meter image G2 is "2", it can be seen that the number of times the game is executed is any of 699 times to 798 times.

In the special figure fluctuation display game less than the 600th rotation (special figure fluctuation display game that is not the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect), the meter image G2 is not hidden, for example, the meter value is "0". The meter image G2 may be displayed.
Further, the meter value of the meter image G2 may decrease as the number of game executions increases, instead of increasing the meter value of the meter image G2 as the number of game executions increases.

Further, the ceiling suggestion effect may be an effect of displaying the rotation speed image G3 on the display device 41 or the like, for example, as shown in FIG. 106 (e). According to this ceiling suggestion effect, the number of rotations of the special figure variation display game being executed (information on the number of times the game is executed) is determined by the display mode of the rotation speed image G3 (the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect). Can be suggested. In the example shown in FIG. 106 (e), since the numerical value of the rotation speed image G3 is "800", it can be seen that the special figure variation display game being executed is the 800th rotation.
In the special figure variation display game less than the 600th rotation (a special figure variation display game that is not the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect), the rotation speed image G3 is not hidden, for example, "? Game eye" or the like. The rotation speed image G3 in a mode in which the numerical value of the above is not clearly displayed may be displayed.

Further, the ceiling suggestion effect may be an effect of displaying the remaining rotation number image G4 on the display device 41 or the like, for example, as shown in FIG. 106 (f). According to this ceiling suggestion effect, the remaining rotation speed (information regarding the number of times the game is executed) up to the number of ceilings n can be suggested by the display mode of the remaining rotation speed image G4 (the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect). In the example shown in FIG. 106 (f), since the numerical value of the remaining rotation speed image G4 is "200", it can be seen that the remaining rotation speed up to the ceiling number n is 200 rotations.
In the special figure fluctuation display game less than the 600th rotation (special figure fluctuation display game that is not the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect), the remaining rotation number image G4 is not hidden, for example, "remaining? Game". The remaining rotation number image G4 in a mode in which the numerical values such as the above are not clearly displayed may be displayed.

Further, the ceiling suggestion effect may be an effect of displaying the point image G5 on the display device 41 or the like, for example, as shown in FIG. 106 (g). According to this ceiling suggestion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 106 (h), the point image G5 is displayed in a display mode (point value) corresponding to the number of times the game is executed, so that the display mode of the point image G5 (the ceiling). It is possible to suggest the number of times the game has been executed (information about the number of times the game has been executed) at the present time, depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect.
In the special figure fluctuation display game less than the 600th rotation (special figure fluctuation display game that is not the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect), the point image G5 is not hidden, for example, the point value is "0". The point image G5 may be displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 106 (h), the point addition value (value added to the point value each time the special figure variation display game is executed) is in the range of 599 times to 699 times of game execution. It is 10, and the point addition value is 30 in the range of 6999 to 799 game executions, and 60 is the point addition value in the range of 799 to 899 game executions. That is, the point value tends to increase as the number of game executions increases (approaches the number of ceilings n), but the point value is not limited to this, and for example, the point value may not increase easily as the number of game executions increases. , The point addition value may be constant regardless of the number of times the game is executed.
Further, of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the point addition value when one is executed and the point addition value when the other is executed may be different. Specifically, for example, even if the value added to the point value each time the main fluctuation is executed is larger than the value added to the point value each time the irregular fluctuation is executed. good. As a result, by giving a privilege (a privilege that the point value is likely to increase) when the main fluctuation is executed, it is possible to encourage the player to play a game according to the game method designed by the gaming machine.

Further, the point addition value when the specific effect is executed and the point addition value when the specific effect is not executed may be different. Specifically, for example, the value added to the point value each time the target game of the reach effect (the special figure variation display game in which the reach state occurs) is executed is the special figure variation that is not the target game of the reach effect. It may be larger than the value added to the point value each time the display game (special figure variation display game in which the reach state does not occur) is executed. As a result, by giving a privilege (a privilege that the point value is likely to increase) when the reach effect is executed, the player's disappointment when the reach effect is executed but the jackpot is not achieved is reduced. It becomes possible.
Further, the point value of the point image G5 may decrease as the number of game executions increases, instead of increasing the point value of the point image G5 as the number of game executions increases.

Further, the ceiling suggestion effect may be an effect of displaying the effect image G6 on the display device 41 or the like, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (a). According to this ceiling suggestion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the effect image G6 is displayed in a display mode (color or shape) corresponding to the number of times the game is executed. The effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect) can suggest the approximate number of times the game has been executed (information about the number of times the game has been executed) at the present time.
In the example shown in FIG. 107 (a), the effect image G6 is displayed around the character image, but this ceiling suggestion effect may be an effect of displaying both the character image and the effect image G6. , The effect of displaying only the effect image G6, that is, the effect of displaying the effect image G6 around the character image displayed by the effect other than the ceiling suggestion effect may be used.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 107 (a), the effect image G6 is displayed around the character image displayed on the display device 41, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the character image displayed on the display device 41 is displayed. The effect image G6 may be displayed around an image other than (for example, a character image), or the effect image G6 may be displayed around an effect device (for example, a board effect device 44) located at a position overlapping the display area of the display device 41. You may.

Further, the ceiling suggestion effect may be an effect of displaying the serif image G7 on the display device 41 or the like, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (c). According to this ceiling suggestion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the dialogue image G7 is displayed in a display mode (type of dialogue) corresponding to the number of times the game is executed. It is possible to suggest the approximate number of times the game has been executed (information about the number of times the game has been executed) at the present time, depending on the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect.
In the example shown in FIG. 107 (c), the dialogue image G7 is displayed around the character image, but this ceiling suggestion effect may be an effect of displaying both the character image and the dialogue image G7. , The effect of displaying only the dialogue image G7, that is, the effect of displaying the dialogue image G7 around the character image displayed by the effect other than the ceiling suggestion effect may be used.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 107 (c), the serif image G7 is displayed around the character image displayed on the display device 41, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the character image displayed on the display device 41 is displayed. The serif image G7 may be displayed around an image other than the above, or the serif image G7 may be displayed around the effect device located at a position overlapping the display area of the display device 41.

Further, the ceiling suggestion effect may be an effect of displaying the character image G8 on the display device 41 or the like, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (e). According to this ceiling suggestion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (f), the character image G8 is displayed in a display mode (character type) corresponding to the number of times the game is executed. The effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect) can suggest the approximate number of times the game has been executed (information about the number of times the game has been executed) at the present time.
The characters that can be displayed in this ceiling suggestion effect (for example, the four types of characters shown in FIG. 107 (f)) may be characters dedicated to the ceiling suggestion effect, or may be a character that is also used for other effects (for example,). It may be a character that suggests a jackpot expectation (such as a character).

Further, the ceiling suggestion effect may be an effect of outputting the effect sound (sound effect) from the speakers 19a, 19b or the like, as shown in FIG. 107 (g), for example. According to this ceiling suggestion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (h), the effect sound is output in a sounding mode (type of effect sound) corresponding to the number of times the game is executed. The effect mode of the suggestion effect) can suggest the approximate number of times the game has been executed (information about the number of times the game has been executed) at the present time.
The effect sounds that can be output by this ceiling suggestion effect (for example, the four types of effect sounds shown in FIG. 107 (h)) may be the effect sounds dedicated to the ceiling suggestion effect, or may be used in combination with other effects. It may be a directing sound (for example, a fluctuating sound, a sound effect at the time of reach, a button operation sound waiting for a customer, etc.).
Further, the approximate number of times the game is executed (information about the number of times the game is executed) at the present time may be suggested by the number of times the effect sound is repeated (the number of times the same sound is repeated) instead of the type of the effect sound. Specifically, for example, as the number of times the game is executed increases, the number of times the "pico" sound is repeated may increase.

In the example shown in FIG. 106, at the start of the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect (specifically, after the fluctuation time of the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect starts, the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the target game starts. The ceiling suggestion effect is executed (until the variable display starts), but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 107, the ceiling suggestion effect is produced during the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect (specifically, during the high-speed fluctuation of the decoration identification information (large symbol)). Is running, but is not limited to this. That is, the execution period of the ceiling suggestion effect can be changed as appropriate.
Specifically, for example, the ceiling suggestion effect may be continuously executed from the start to the end of the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect (from the start of the fluctuation time to the end of the stop display time), or the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect. The ceiling suggestion effect may be executed during a period other than a predetermined period from the start to the end (for example, during the SP reach effect), or a predetermined period from the start to the end of the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect (at the start). (For example, the period from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display), midway (for example, the period from the start to the end of the variable display), and the end (for example, the period from the start to the end of the stop display time)) You may also perform a ceiling suggestion effect.

The above-mentioned ceiling suggestion effects can be combined as appropriate.
Specifically, for example, a ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 106 (a)) that causes the effect device to emit light and a ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 107 (a)) that displays the effect image G6 are combined to correspond to the number of times the game is executed. An effect image G6 in a display mode corresponding to the number of times the game is executed may be displayed around the effect device in the light emitting mode (for example, the board effect device 44).
Further, for example, a ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 107 (c)) for displaying the dialogue image G7 and a ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 107 (e)) for displaying the character image G8 are combined to display a display corresponding to the number of times the game is executed. A dialogue image G7 in a display mode corresponding to the number of times the game is executed may be displayed around the character image G8 in the mode.
Further, for example, a ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 106 (c)) for displaying the meter image G2 and a ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 107 (g)) for outputting the effect sound are combined to display a display mode corresponding to the number of times the game is executed. In addition to displaying the meter image G2 of the above, the effect sound of the pronunciation mode corresponding to the number of times the game is executed may be output.
Of course, the combination of ceiling suggestion effects is not limited to these combinations and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is not limited to the condition that "the number of times the game is executed is a specific number of times (for example, 599 times) or more".
The execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect may be, for example, the condition that "a specific effect has been executed". Examples of the specific effect include an out-of-reach effect, an out-of-reach effect, a stage change effect, and the like.

When the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is "execution of the out-of-reach effect (specific effect)", the effect control device 300 may, for example, perform a measurement interruption period (for example, high probability) of the number of times the game is executed at the start of the special figure variation display game. It is determined whether or not the game is in the state), and if it is determined that the measurement is not interrupted, it is determined whether or not the reach effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation display game. Then, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, and when it is determined to be out of alignment, for example, FIGS. 108 (d) to 108 (e) are shown. As shown, the ceiling suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation display game and after the execution of the reach effect.

Specifically, when the special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), the variation display of the identification information starts on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. After that, when the special figure variation display game is a target game for the reach effect, a reach state occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. 108 (b).
Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, when the reach effect ends and the stop display time starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), the first decorative game display unit 81 and The result mode of the big hit is stopped and displayed on the second decorative game display unit 82. In this case, the ceiling suggestion effect is not executed.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, when the reach effect ends and the stop display time starts, for example, as shown in FIGS. 108 (d) to 108 (e), the first decoration game As a result of the deviation, the display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are stopped and displayed, and the ceiling suggestion effect is executed. This ceiling suggestion effect starts, for example, at the start of the stop display time of the target game of the reach effect, and ends at the end of the stop display time. Here, a ceiling suggestion effect for displaying the meter image G2 is executed, and the effect mode (meter value of the meter image G2) is changed in the middle of the ceiling suggestion effect.

If the ceiling suggestion effect has already been executed between the time when the measurement of the number of game executions was last cleared and the current time, that is, the ceiling suggestion effect to be executed this time clears the measurement of the number of game executions and is the first ceiling suggestion effect. If not, first, the meter image G2 having the same meter value as the meter image G2 displayed in the previous ceiling suggestion effect is displayed (FIG. 108 (d)), and then the meter value corresponding to the current number of game executions is displayed. The meter image G2 of the above is displayed (FIG. 108 (e)).
Also, if the ceiling suggestion effect has not been executed even once between the time when the measurement of the number of game executions was last cleared and the present time, that is, the ceiling suggestion effect to be executed this time is the first to clear the measurement of the number of game executions. In the case of the ceiling suggestion effect, first, a meter image G2 having a meter value different from the meter value corresponding to the current number of game executions (for example, a meter value lower than the current meter value) is displayed (FIG. 108). (D)), after that, the meter image G2 of the meter value corresponding to the current number of game executions is displayed (FIG. 108 (e)).
It is possible to display the meter image G2 of the meter value corresponding to the current number of game executions from the beginning, but by performing an effect of changing (increasing) the meter value, the player can see how the meters are accumulated. Since it is possible to visually recognize the game, the fun of the game is improved.

If the display mode (meter value) displayed in the previous ceiling suggestion effect and the display mode (meter value) corresponding to the current number of game executions are the same, the meter image G2 has the same display mode as the previous time. May be displayed so that the meter value is not changed, or the meter image G2 is displayed in a display mode different from the previous time (for example, a meter value lower than the previous meter value) to change the meter value. good.
When the player grasps the display mode displayed in the previous ceiling suggestion effect, the display mode (meter value) changes without knowing by displaying the meter image G2 in a display mode different from the previous display mode. There is a risk of giving a feeling of distrust if it was done. Therefore, when the interval between the previous ceiling suggestion effect and the current ceiling suggestion effect is short, specifically, for example, the number of game executions between the previous ceiling suggestion effect and the current ceiling suggestion effect is less than a predetermined number of times. In some cases, the meter image G2 is displayed in the same display mode as the previous time so that the effect of changing the meter value is not performed, and if the interval between the previous ceiling suggestion effect and the current ceiling suggestion effect is long, it is concrete. For example, when the number of times the game is executed between the previous ceiling suggestion effect and the current ceiling suggestion effect is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, the meter image G2 is displayed in a display mode different from the previous time and the meter value is displayed. You may try to change the effect.

In addition, when the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is "executed the reach out-of-reach effect (specific effect)" or "executed the SP reach out-of-reach effect (specific effect)", the game is performed by executing the ceiling suggestion effect. It suggests that the result is out of order. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 108, by executing the ceiling suggestion effect during the stop display time, the inconvenience that the game result is grasped by the ceiling suggestion effect before the game result is stopped and displayed is avoided.
If the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is "executed the reach off effect (specific effect)" or "executed the SP reach off effect (specific effect)", the ceiling suggestion is performed before the start of the stop display time. It is also possible to perform a production. In that case, it is preferable that the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect is a production mode that is also used as another effect (for example, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit). By setting the production mode of the ceiling suggestion effect to be a production mode that is also used as another effect, even if the ceiling suggestion effect is executed, whether the currently executed effect is the ceiling suggestion effect or another effect. Since it becomes difficult to discriminate, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game result is grasped by the ceiling suggestion effect. In addition, by also using the production mode, it is possible to reduce the amount of data, the development cost, and the like.

When the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is "executed the reach off effect (specific effect)" or "executed the SP reach off effect (specific effect)", the ceiling is before the start of the stop display time. Even when the suggestion effect is not executed (for example, the ceiling suggestion effect is executed during the stop display time), the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect can be set to the effect mode that is also used as another effect.
In addition, even if the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is an execution condition other than "execution of reach out-of-reach effect (specific effect)" or "execution of SP reach out of effect (specific effect)", the effect of ceiling suggestion effect The mode can be an effect mode that is also used as another effect.
Further, an effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect other than the ceiling suggestion effect for displaying the meter image G2, for example, a ceiling suggestion effect for causing the effect device to emit light (FIG. 106 (a)) and a ceiling suggestion effect for displaying the effect image G6 (FIG. 107). (A)), Ceiling suggestion effect for displaying the dialogue image G7 (FIG. 107 (c)), Ceiling suggestion effect for displaying the character image G8 (FIG. 107 (e)), Ceiling suggestion effect for outputting the effect sound (FIG. 107). The production mode such as (g)) can also be a production mode that is also used as another production.

Further, for example, when the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is "execution of the stage change effect (specific effect)", the effect control device 300 may, for example, stop the measurement of the number of times the game is executed at the start of the special figure variation display game. It is determined whether or not it is (for example, in a high probability state), and when it is determined that it is not the measurement interruption period, it is determined whether or not to execute the stage change effect during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and the stage change effect is performed. When it is determined to be executed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 (c) to 109 (d), the ceiling suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation display game and after the stage change effect is executed.

Specifically, in the state where the previous special figure variation display game is completed, the identification information is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (a). Has been done.
Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, the variation display of the identification information starts on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. Then, when the special figure variation display game is the target game of the stage change effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), when the stage change effect is executed and the stage change effect is completed, for example, FIG. As shown in 109 (c) to (d), the stage shifts to a new stage and the ceiling suggestion effect is executed. This ceiling suggestion effect starts, for example, at the end of the stage change effect (at the start of a new stage), and ends at the end of the stop display time of the target game of the stage change effect. Here, a ceiling suggestion effect for displaying the meter image G2 is executed, and the effect mode (meter value of the meter image G2) is changed in the middle of the ceiling suggestion effect.

That is, first, the meter image G2 having a meter value of "0" is displayed (FIG. 109 (c)), and then the meter image G2 having a meter value of "2" is displayed (FIG. 109 (d)). .. Therefore, from the ceiling suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 109 (c) to 109 (d), the meter value of the meter image G2 displayed in the previous ceiling suggestion effect is "0", or the ceiling suggestion effect this time is a game. It can be seen that it is the first ceiling suggestion effect by clearing the measurement of the number of executions.
In a gaming machine in which the stage may not shift (the stage does not change) even if the stage change effect is executed, the ceiling suggestion effect may be executed only when the stage change effect is executed and the stage shifts. However, the ceiling suggestion effect may be executed only when the stage change effect is executed and the stage does not shift, or the ceiling suggestion effect is performed when the stage change effect is executed regardless of whether or not the stage shifts. You may do it. That is, the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect may be "execution of a stage change effect (specific effect) that is not a ghost effect" or "execution of a stage change effect (specific effect) that is a ghost effect". It may be "a stage change effect (specific effect) has been executed".

Further, the ceiling suggestion effect to be executed when the execution condition "execution of the specific effect" is satisfied is not limited to the ceiling suggestion effect for displaying the meter image G2, and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the specific effect does not have to be one type, and may be a plurality of types. Specifically, for example, there may be three types of specific effects: reach-off effect, reach support hit effect, and reach small hit effect. This suggests a ceiling when the reach effect is executed but does not result in a big hit. Since the production is executed, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player.

Further, the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect may be, for example, the condition that "the number of times the game is executed is the specified number of times". In this case, the effect control device 300 determines, for example, whether or not the measurement interruption period of the number of game executions (for example, in a high probability state) is set at the start of the special figure variation display game, and determines that the measurement interruption period is not present. When it is determined whether or not the number of times the game is executed is the specified number of times, and when it is determined that the number of times the game is executed is the specified number of times, for example, as shown in FIGS. Perform a ceiling suggestion effect.

Specifically, in the state where the previous special figure variation display game is completed, the identification information is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (e). Has been done.
Next, when the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game at the specified rotation speed (= specified number of times + 1) starts, a transition effect of shifting the decorative special figure start memory display is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (f). Is executed and the ceiling suggestion effect starts. Then, when the variable display of the identification information is started on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (g), the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect (here, the meter image). When the G2 meter value) changes and, for example, the stop display time of the special figure fluctuation display game at the specified rotation speed (= specified number of times + 1) ends, the ceiling suggestion effect ends.

For example, when the specified number of times is 99 times, 299 times, 599 times, and 899 times, the ceiling is used in each of the 100th, 300th, 600th, and 900th rotations of the special figure variation display game. The suggestion effect is executed. Then, in this case, in the special figure fluctuation display game at the 100th rotation, the ceiling suggestion effect in which the meter value of the meter image G2 changes from "0" to "1" is executed in the middle, and the special figure at the 300th rotation is executed. In the fluctuation display game, the ceiling suggestion effect that the meter value of the meter image G2 changes from "1" to "2" is executed in the middle, and in the special figure fluctuation display game at the 600th rotation, the meter value of the meter image G2 is in the middle. The ceiling suggestion effect that changes from "2" to "3" is executed, and in the special figure fluctuation display game at the 900th rotation, the meter value of the meter image G2 changes from "3" to "4" in the middle. The production is executed.
It is possible to display the meter image G2 of the meter value corresponding to the current number of game executions from the beginning, but by performing an effect of changing (increasing) the meter value, the player can see how the meters are accumulated. Since it is possible to visually recognize the game, the fun of the game is improved.

The specified number of times does not have to be a plurality of types, and may be only one type.
Further, the ceiling suggestion effect to be executed when the execution condition that "the number of times the game is executed is the specified number of times" is satisfied is not limited to the ceiling suggestion effect for displaying the meter image G2, and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the ceiling suggestion effect in which the effect mode changes on the way is not limited to the ceiling suggestion effect for displaying the meter image G2, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, when the ceiling suggestion effect to be executed is a ceiling suggestion effect that causes the effect device to emit light, a light emission mode different from the light emission mode corresponding to the current number of game executions (for example, the previous ceiling suggestion effect). After the effect device is made to emit light in the same light emitting mode), the effect device may be made to emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the current number of game executions.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 109 (e) to 109 (g), the ceiling suggestion effect is started at the start of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game at the specified rotation speed (= specified number of times + 1). The ceiling suggestion effect may be executed before the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game at the specified rotation speed (= specified number of times + 1) starts, for example. That is, the ceiling suggestion effect may be started before the start of the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect (for example, during the execution of the special figure variation display game immediately before the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect).
Further, even when the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is a condition other than "the number of times the game is executed is the specified number of times", the ceiling suggestion effect may be started before the start of the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect.

When the ceiling suggestion effect is started before the start of the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect, the ceiling suggestion effect is preferably a ceiling suggestion effect in which the effect mode changes in the middle, and the change in the effect mode is the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect. Is preferably in progress. When the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect changes in the middle, the effect mode after the change is the actual effect mode, and the player can use the information suggested by the ceiling suggestion effect according to the effect mode after the change (information about the number of times the game is executed. Specifically, the number of game executions, the number of remaining rotations up to the number of ceilings n, etc.) are grasped. That is, the effect mode after the change suggests information about the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect (information about the number of times the game is executed), and is about the special figure variation display game before the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect. Since it does not suggest information (information about the number of times the game is executed), if the changed production mode appears before the start of the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect, the information corresponding to the changed production mode (about the number of game executions) There may be a period of difference between the information) and the actual information (information about the number of times the game has been executed). Therefore, it is possible to make the changed production mode appear during the execution of the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect (after the start of the fluctuation time of the target game of the ceiling suggestion effect) so that such a difference period does not occur. preferable. On the other hand, since the role of the effect mode before the change is mainly to enhance the effect of the ceiling suggestion effect, the information corresponding to the effect mode before the change (information about the number of times the game is executed) is the actual information (of the game). It may be different from the information about the number of executions).

Further, the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect may be, for example, the condition that "a special lottery dedicated to the ceiling suggestion effect has been won". This special lottery may be executed by the game control device 100 or the effect control device 300. When the game control device 100 executes a special lottery, the game control device 100 transmits a variation command (information on a variation pattern of the special figure variation display game) to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special figure variation display game. As a command including), a variable command capable of determining the result of the special lottery (whether or not the ceiling suggestion effect is executed) may be transmitted, or a command for notifying the result of the special lottery may be produced separately from the variable command. It may be transmitted to the control device 300.

In a gaming machine whose execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is "winning a special lottery dedicated to the ceiling suggestion effect", a special figure variation display game that is not counted as the number of game executions and a special figure variation that is counted as the number of game executions. The winning probability of the special lottery may be different depending on the display game. In that case, the ceiling suggestion effect is executed during the stop display time, or the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect is used in combination with another effect (for example, an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation). Is preferable.
For example, if the special figure variation display game that is counted as the number of game executions has a higher probability of winning the special lottery than the special figure variation display game that is not counted as the number of game executions, the ceiling suggestion effect can be executed. , It suggests that the game result is unlikely to be a big hit. Therefore, by executing the ceiling suggestion effect during the stop display time, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the ceiling suggestion effect is likely to grasp that the game result is not a big hit before the game result is stopped and displayed. It will be possible. Alternatively, by setting the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect to be an effect mode that is also used as another effect, even if the ceiling suggestion effect is executed, whether the currently being executed effect is the ceiling suggestion effect or another effect. Is difficult to discriminate, so it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of knowing that there is a high possibility that the game result is not a big hit by the ceiling suggestion effect. In addition, by also using the production mode, it is possible to reduce the amount of data, the development cost, and the like.

Further, the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect may be, for example, the condition that "the game is a special figure variation display game counted as the number of times the game is executed". In this case, by executing the ceiling suggestion effect, it is suggested that the game result is not a big hit. Therefore, the ceiling suggestion effect is executed during the stop display time, or the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect is set. It is preferable to use an effect mode that is also used with other effects (for example, an effect that suggests a jackpot expectation).
Further, the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect may be, for example, the condition that "it is the first special figure variation display game after waiting for a customer".

Further, the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect may be, for example, the condition that "it is the first special figure variation display game after the power is turned on". The effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect executed in the first special figure variation display game after the power is turned on is determined based on, for example, the normal probability variation number command transmitted in steps X42 and X46.
As shown in FIG. 13, when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on without clearing the RAM), a command for power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step X42). In the gaming machine equipped with the ceiling function, in step X42, a normal probability fluctuation number command for notifying the normal probability fluctuation number (game execution number) is also transmitted. Therefore, the number of times indicated by the last normal probability fluctuation number command transmitted before the power is turned off and the first normal probability fluctuation number command transmitted after the power is turned on (the normal probability fluctuation number command transmitted in step X42) are indicated. The number of times is the same.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, when the RAM is cleared (when the power is turned on with the RAM clear), the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45), and at the time of RAM initialization. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step X46). In the gaming machine equipped with the ceiling function, the initial value (900 in this case) is also saved in the normal probability fluctuation number region in step X45. As a result, the measurement of the normal probability fluctuation number (game execution number) is cleared when the RAM is cleared. Further, in the gaming machine equipped with the ceiling function, in step X46, a normal probability fluctuation number command for notifying the normal probability fluctuation number (game execution number) is also transmitted. Therefore, the first normal probability fluctuation count command (normal probability fluctuation count command transmitted in step X46) after clearing the RAM is a command indicating an initial value (ceiling count n).

Further, the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect may be, for example, a condition that "the current date and time has reached a predetermined date and time". The current date and time (date, day of the week, time, etc.) can be determined based on the information from RTC338. The predetermined date and time may be set (changed) for each game store, and in that case, the date and time at which the game store wants to increase the number of customers can be selected as the predetermined date and time.
Further, even if the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is, for example, "the number of detected all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game has reached a predetermined number". good. Alternatively, it may be a condition that "the number of detected safe spheres has reached a predetermined number", a condition that "the number of detected out spheres has reached a predetermined number", or "a safe sphere or The condition may be that the number of out balls detected has reached a predetermined number.

Further, the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect may be, for example, a condition that "a predetermined operation means is operated in a predetermined period". Examples of the predetermined period include waiting for customers, during a special figure variation display game, and during execution of a special figure variation display game that is not a target game of an operation effect in which a player's operation is intervened. Further, as the predetermined operation means, for example, an effect button 25, a cross key 29, and the like can be mentioned as an example.
For example, when the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is "the effect button 25 (predetermined operation means) is operated during the execution (predetermined period) of the special figure variation display game that is not the target game of the operation effect", the effect control For example, the device 300 determines whether or not the measurement interruption period of the number of game executions (for example, in a high probability state) is set at the start of the special figure variation display game, and if it is determined that the measurement interruption period is not reached, the special figure variation display is displayed. When it is determined whether or not to execute the operation effect during the execution of the game and it is determined not to execute the operation effect, the ceiling is suggested after the effect button 25 is operated while the special figure variation display game is being executed. Perform the production.

When the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is "a predetermined operation means was operated during the execution of the special figure variation display game (a predetermined period)", the predetermined operation means during the execution of the target game of the operation effect. The execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is also satisfied when is operated. Therefore, when the operation means for satisfying the execution condition of the operation effect and the operation means (predetermined operation means) for satisfying the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect are the same, the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect and the execution of the operation effect are executed. Conditions may be met at the same time. In that case, the operation effect may be prioritized (the operation effect is executed without executing the ceiling suggestion effect), or the ceiling suggestion effect may be prioritized (the ceiling suggestion effect is executed without executing the operation effect). Alternatively, both the operation effect and the ceiling suggestion effect may be performed.

The execution conditions for the ceiling suggestion effect may be a combination of the above-mentioned execution conditions as appropriate. Specifically, for example, the ceiling suggestion effect may be executed when both the condition that "the number of times the game is executed is a specific number of times or more" and the condition that "the specific effect is executed" are satisfied. The ceiling suggestion effect may be executed when either the condition that "the number of times the game is executed is equal to or greater than a specific number of times" or the condition that "the specific effect is executed" is satisfied. Of course, the combination of execution conditions is not limited to the combination of the condition that "the number of times the game is executed is a specific number of times or more" and the condition that "the specific effect is executed", and can be changed as appropriate.

It is also possible to execute the ceiling suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect. That is, before the start of the special figure variation display game, a look-ahead ceiling suggestion effect that suggests information at the start time of the special figure variation display game (information regarding the number of times the game is executed) may be executed.
As shown in FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b), for example, the look-ahead ceiling suggestion effect is a feature in which the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is satisfied among the decorative special figure start memory displays displayed on the standby storage display unit 83. This is an effect of adding the rotation speed image G3 to the decorative special figure start memory display (hereinafter referred to as “target hold”) corresponding to the figure variation display game.

For example, when the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is "the number of times the game is executed is the specified number of times", the decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game which is the specified number of rotations (= specified number of times + 1). The rotation speed image G3 is added to the display. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the number of rotations of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display to which the rotation speed image G3 is added.
In the example shown in FIG. 110A, the rotation speed image G3 is added to the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83, and the numerical value of the rotation speed image G3 is “600”. Therefore, it can be seen that the special figure variation display game (that is, the next special figure variation display game) corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display is the 600th rotation.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 110 (b), the rotation speed image G3 is added to the newly appearing decoration special figure start memory display, and the numerical value of the rotation speed image G3 is "600". It can be seen that the special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure start memory display is at the 600th rotation.

For example, when the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is "execution of the specific effect", the rotation speed image G3 is added to the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the target game of the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to suggest the number of rotations of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display to which the rotation speed image G3 is added, and the special figure variation display game is the target game of the specific effect. It can be suggested that there is.

The display timing of the rotation speed image G3 (start timing of the look-ahead ceiling suggestion effect) can be appropriately selected. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 110A, the display of the rotation speed image G3 may be started when the target hold is located at a predetermined position (for example, the left end) of the standby storage display unit 83, for example, FIG. 110. As shown in (b), the display of the rotation speed image G3 may be started when the target hold appears as a new decorative special figure start memory display. Further, the display timing of the rotation speed image G3 (start timing of the look-ahead ceiling suggestion effect) may be predetermined or may be selected each time.
The display position of the rotation speed image G3 is not limited to the periphery of the target hold and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the rotation speed image G3 is displayed at a position overlapping the target hold on the front side of the target hold. You may.

Further, the look-ahead ceiling suggestion effect is not limited to the effect of adding the rotation speed image G3 to the target hold. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 110, the ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 106 (e)) displaying the rotation speed image G3 is applied to the look-ahead effect, but each of the above-mentioned ceiling suggestion effects can be applied to the look-ahead effect. Is.
For example, when the ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 106 (a)) that causes the effect device to emit light is applied to the look-ahead effect, and the target hold appears as a new decorative special figure start memory display, or the target hold is on standby, the memory display unit 83 The predetermined effect device may be made to emit light when it is located at the predetermined position. In this case, the approximate number of times the game is executed (information about the number of times the game is executed) at the start of the special figure variation display corresponding to the target hold is displayed according to the light emitting mode of the predetermined effect device. Can be suggested before the game starts.

Further, for example, when the ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 106 (c)) for displaying the meter image G2 is applied to the look-ahead effect and the target hold appears as a new decorative special figure start memory display, or the target hold is on standby. When the display unit 83 is located at a predetermined position, the meter image G2 may be added to the target hold. In this case, depending on the display mode (meter value) of the meter image G2, the approximate number of game executions (information regarding the number of game executions) at the start of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the target hold can be determined by the special figure corresponding to the target hold. It can be suggested before the start of the figure variation display game. Alternatively, an image having a scale is displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display, and depending on the display mode (meter value) of the target hold, the approximate number of game executions (of the game) at the start of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the target hold. Information on the number of executions) may be suggested before the start of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the target hold.

Further, for example, when the ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 106 (f)) for displaying the remaining rotation speed image G4 is applied to the look-ahead effect, the target hold appears as a new decorative special figure start memory display, or the target hold waits. When the middle storage display unit 83 is located at a predetermined position, the remaining rotation speed image G4 may be added to the target hold. In this case, depending on the display mode (numerical value) of the remaining rotation speed image G4, the remaining rotation speed (information regarding the number of times the game is executed) up to the number of ceilings n at the start of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the target hold is held. It can be suggested before the start of the special figure variation display game corresponding to.

Further, for example, when the ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 106 (g)) for displaying the point image G5 is applied to the look-ahead effect and the target hold appears as a new decorative special figure start memory display, or the target hold is on standby. When the display unit 83 is located at a predetermined position, the point image G5 may be added to the target hold. In this case, depending on the display mode (point value) of the point image G5, the number of game executions (information about the number of game executions) at the start of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the target hold is changed to the special figure variation corresponding to the target hold. It can be suggested before the start of the display game.

Further, for example, when the ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 107 (a)) for displaying the effect image G6 is applied to the look-ahead effect and the target hold appears as a new decorative special figure start memory display, or the target hold is on standby. The effect image G6 may be added to the target hold when the display unit 83 is located at a predetermined position. In this case, depending on the display mode (color and shape) of the effect image G6, the approximate number of game executions (information regarding the number of game executions) at the start of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the target hold corresponds to the target hold. It can be suggested before the start of the special figure variation display game. Alternatively, depending on the display mode (color and shape) of the target hold itself, the approximate number of game executions (information about the number of game executions) at the start of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the target hold can be changed to the special figure corresponding to the target hold. The figure may be suggested before the start of the variable display game.

Further, for example, when the ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 107 (c)) for displaying the dialogue image G7 is applied to the look-ahead effect, and the target hold appears as a new decorative special figure start memory display, or the target hold is on standby. When the display unit 83 is located at a predetermined position, a character image (line image G7 or the like) may be added to the target hold. In this case, depending on the display mode of the character image (type of dialogue, etc.), the approximate number of game executions (information regarding the number of game executions) at the start of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the target hold corresponds to the target hold. It can be suggested before the start of the special figure variation display game.

Further, for example, when the ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 107 (e)) for displaying the character image G8 is applied to the look-ahead effect and the target hold appears as a new decorative special figure start memory display, or the target hold is on standby. The character image G8 may be added to the target hold when the display unit 83 is located at a predetermined position. In this case, depending on the display mode (character type) of the character image G8, the approximate number of game executions (information regarding the number of game executions) at the start of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the target hold corresponds to the target hold. It can be suggested before the start of the special figure variation display game. Alternatively, when the target hold appears as a new decorative special figure start memory display or when the target hold is located at a predetermined position of the waiting storage display unit 83, the target hold is changed to the character image G8 and the target hold is changed. Depending on the display mode (character type) of, the approximate number of game executions (information about the number of game executions) at the start of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the target hold can be determined by the special figure variation display game corresponding to the target hold. It may be suggested before the start.

Further, for example, when the ceiling suggestion effect (FIGS. 107 (g), (h)) that outputs the effect sound is applied to the look-ahead effect, and the target hold appears as a new decorative special figure start memory display, or the target hold is set. When the standby storage display unit 83 is located at a predetermined position, the effect sound may be output from the speakers 19a and 19b. In this case, the approximate number of game executions (information about the number of game executions) at the start of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the target hold corresponds to the target hold, depending on the sounding mode (type of the effect sound) of the effect sound. It can be suggested before the start of the special figure variation display game.

Here, as shown in FIG. 104, for example, the game control device 100 updates the normal probability fluctuation count by -1 (step A62), and the normal probability fluctuation count command (step A63) corresponding to the updated normal probability fluctuation count. ) Is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the effect control device 300 stores the information based on the received normal probability fluctuation number command in the game execution number area in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322), and suggests the ceiling based on the information stored in the game execution number area. Determine the production mode of the production. In addition, when the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is a condition related to the number of game executions such as "the number of times the game is executed is a specific number or more" or "the number of times the game is executed is the specified number of times", the effect control The device 300 determines whether or not the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is satisfied based on the information stored in the game execution number area.

That is, the game control device 100 measures the normal probability fluctuation number (game execution number) by a countdown method. Therefore, the normal probability fluctuation number command transmitted from the game control device 100 is not a command for notifying the number of game executions, but a command for notifying the number of times the game is executed minus the number of times the game is executed.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the normal probability fluctuation number of times from 900 times to 899 times at the end of the stop display time of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first rotation, and shows a normal probability fluctuation of 899 times. Send the command the number of times. Therefore, if the number of times indicated by the normal probability fluctuation count command is stored in the game execution count area as it is, the actual number of game executions is one at the start of the second rotation special figure fluctuation display game, whereas the game execution is performed. The number of times that the number-of-times area stores is 899 times.

For example, the ceiling suggestion effect to be executed is a ceiling suggestion effect (FIGS. 106 (e), 110 (a), (b)) for displaying the rotation number image G3 and a ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 106 (g)) for displaying the point image G5. In a gaming machine that is a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests information about the number of times the game is executed by a count-up method such as)), or in a game machine that the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is a condition related to the number of times the game is executed, the effect control As shown in FIG. 111A, for example, the device 300 converts the number of times indicated by the normal probability fluctuation number command from the game control device 100 (the number of times corresponding to the countdown) into the number of times corresponding to the countup, and then executes the game. It is preferable to store in the number of times area.

In a gaming machine where the ceiling suggestion effect to be executed is a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests information about the number of times the game is executed by a count-up method, or in a game machine where the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is a condition related to the number of times the game is executed, the probability fluctuates normally. It is also possible to store the number of times indicated by the number-of-times command in the game execution number-of-times area without converting it into the number of times corresponding to the count-up. However, in that case, the effect control device 300 determines the number of times the game is executed when determining the effect mode (numerical value of the rotation speed image G3 or the point value of the point image G5) of the ceiling suggestion effect or when determining the establishment of the execution condition. A conversion process must be performed to convert the number of times stored in the area (the number of times corresponding to the countdown) to the number of times corresponding to the countup. Therefore, such a conversion process must be performed at the start of the special figure variation display game, which has a large number of processes, which increases the processing load.
On the other hand, when the normal probability fluctuation count command is received (when stored in the game execution count area), the conversion process is performed, that is, the number indicated by the normal probability fluctuation count command is converted into the number corresponding to the count-up. By storing in the game execution count area, the information stored in the game execution count area can be used without conversion when determining the production mode of the ceiling suggestion effect or when determining the establishment of the execution condition. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load applied at the start of the special figure variation display game.

On the other hand, in a gaming machine, which is a ceiling suggestion effect in which the ceiling suggestion effect to be executed is a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests information on the number of times the game is executed by a countdown method such as the ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 106 (f)) that displays the remaining number of rotations image G4. It is preferable that the effect control device 300 stores the number of times indicated by the normal probability fluctuation number command from the game control device 100 (the number of times corresponding to the countdown) in the game execution number area without converting it into the number of times corresponding to the countup. ..

Further, the ceiling suggestion effect to be executed includes a ceiling suggestion effect that causes the effect device to emit light (FIG. 106 (a)), a ceiling suggestion effect that displays the meter image G2 (FIG. 106 (c)), and a ceiling suggestion effect that displays the effect image G6. The effect (FIG. 107 (a)), the ceiling suggestion effect for displaying the dialogue image G7 (FIG. 107 (c)), the ceiling suggestion effect for displaying the character image G8 (FIG. 107 (e)), and the ceiling suggestion for outputting the effect sound. A gaming machine that is a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests information about the number of times the game is executed without using a numerical value as shown in the effect (FIG. 107 (g)), and a condition that the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is not related to the number of game executions. In the game machine, the effect control device 300 may convert the number of times indicated by the normal probability fluctuation number command from the game control device 100 into a number corresponding to the count-up and then store it in the game execution number area. The number of times indicated by the normal probability fluctuation number command from the control device 100 may be stored in the game execution number area without being converted into the number corresponding to the count-up.

That is, when the number of times indicated by the normal probability fluctuation count command is converted into the number of times corresponding to the count-up and then stored in the game execution count area, as a table used when determining the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect, for example. The number of times corresponding to the count-up as shown in FIGS. 106 (b), (d), 107 (b), (d), (f), and (h) and the effect mode (light emission mode, display mode, sound mode). A table for storing in association with and is stored in the ROM of the effect control device 300. As a result, when determining the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect, the information stored in the game execution number area can be used without conversion.
In addition, when the number of times indicated by the normal probability fluctuation number command is stored in the game execution number area without being converted into the number corresponding to the count-up, it is counted down as a table used when determining the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect. A table for storing the number of times corresponding to the above and the effect mode (light emission mode, display mode, sound mode) in association with each other is stored in the ROM of the effect control device 300. As a result, when determining the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect, the information stored in the game execution number area can be used without conversion.

Further, the game control device 100 updates the time reduction variation number by -1 (step A752), and issues a time reduction variation number command (steps A785, A839, A914) corresponding to the updated time reduction variation number. Send to 300. Then, the effect control device 300 stores the information based on the received time reduction fluctuation number command in the support number area in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322), and based on the information stored in the support number area, the support number notification effect. The production mode of is determined.

As shown in, for example, FIGS. 42, 45 to 47, 50 to 51, 85 to 88, etc., the support number notification effect notifies information on the support number by a countdown method. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 111B, for example, the effect control device 300 converts the number of times indicated by the time reduction variation number command from the game control device 100 (the number of times corresponding to the countdown) into the number of times corresponding to the countup. It is configured to be stored in the support count area without being stored.

The effect control device 300 may be configured to convert the number of times indicated by the time reduction fluctuation number command (the number of times corresponding to the countdown) into the number of times corresponding to the countup and then store it in the support number area. For example, when the support count notification effect to be executed is a support count notification effect that notifies information about the support number by the count-up method, or when the execution condition of the support count notification effect is a condition related to the support number (the number of times corresponding to the count-up). In some cases, by configuring in this way, the information stored in the support count area is used without conversion when determining the production mode of the support count notification effect or when determining the establishment of the execution condition. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 measures the number of game executions and notifies the effect control device 300 of the measurement result, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, of the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300, only the game control device 100 may measure the number of game executions, or the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 each measure the number of game executions. You may.
When the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 each measure the number of game executions, for example, the game control device 100 reaches an initial value (initial value in the RWM) when it is time to clear the measurement of the number of game executions. The value in the value region, for example 900), is saved in the normal probability fluctuation frequency region. As a result, the measurement of the number of times the game is executed is cleared on the game control device 100 side. Further, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the measurement interruption period of the number of game executions (for example, in a high probability state) is reached at the end of the special figure variation display game, and if it is determined that the measurement interruption period is not present, the normal probability variation The number of times (value in the normal probability fluctuation number region) is updated by -1, and it is determined whether the updated normal probability fluctuation number is "0" (whether the ceiling number n has been reached). As a result, the number of game executions is measured (updated) on the game control device 100 side.

When the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 each measure the number of game executions, and the effect control device 300 measures the number of game executions by the count-up method, for example, the effect control device. When the 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100 when it is time to clear the measurement of the number of game executions, the 300 clears the game execution number area to 0. As a result, the measurement of the number of times the game is executed is cleared on the effect control device 300 side. Further, when the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100 at the end of the special figure variation display game, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is a measurement interruption period (for example, in a high probability state) of the number of game executions, and measures the game. If it is determined that the period is not interrupted, the number of game executions (value in the game execution count area) is updated by +1 and the updated game execution count matches the ceiling count (value in the ceiling count area in the RAM, for example 900). (Whether the ceiling count n has been reached) is determined. As a result, the number of game executions is measured (updated) on the effect control device 300 side.

On the other hand, when the game execution number is measured by each of the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 measures the game execution number by the countdown method, for example, the effect control device 300 Receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100 when it is time to clear the measurement of the number of game executions, and stores the number of ceilings (value of the number of ceilings area in the RAM, for example 900) in the game execution number area. do. As a result, the measurement of the number of times the game is executed is cleared on the effect control device 300 side. Further, when the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100 at the end of the special figure variation display game, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is a measurement interruption period (for example, in a high probability state) of the number of game executions, and measures the game. When it is determined that it is not the interruption period, the number of game executions (value in the game execution count area) is updated by -1, and it is determined whether the updated number of game executions is "0" (whether the ceiling count n has been reached). As a result, the number of game executions is measured (updated) on the effect control device 300 side.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of ceilings n is one type, but may be a plurality of types. Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of times based on the probability value corresponding to the setting 1 is set as the ceiling number n regardless of whether the currently selected probability setting value is the setting 1. The number of ceilings is not limited, and for example, the number of times based on the probability value corresponding to the currently selected probability setting value may be set as the ceiling number n.
When the number of times based on the probability value corresponding to the currently selected probability setting value is set as the ceiling number n, the ceiling number table is stored in the ROM (for example, ROM 111B) of the game control device 100. As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the ceiling count table includes the number of times (for example, 900 times) determined based on the probability value corresponding to the setting 1 as the "ceiling count n corresponding to the setting 1" and the "setting 2". The number of times determined based on the probability value corresponding to setting 2 as "the number of ceilings n corresponding to setting 3" (for example, 850 times) and the number of times determined based on the probability value corresponding to setting 3 as "the number of ceilings n corresponding to setting 3" (For example, 850 times), the number of times determined based on the probability value corresponding to setting 4 as "the number of ceilings n corresponding to setting 4" (for example, 800 times), and the number of times set as "the number of ceilings n corresponding to setting 5" 5 The number of times determined based on the probability value corresponding to (for example, 800 times), the number of times determined based on the probability value corresponding to setting 6 as "the number of ceilings n corresponding to setting 6" (for example, 750 times), and "default The number of ceilings n (for example, 900 times) "is stored.

Then, in the game control device 100, for example, in the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (for example, the range of 0 to 5). Is determined. When it was determined that it was within the normal range, the number of ceilings n corresponding to the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM (current probability setting value) was acquired from the ceiling count table, and it was determined that it was not within the normal range. In this case, the default ceiling count n is obtained from the ceiling count table. Then, the ceiling count command for notifying the acquired ceiling count n is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the acquired ceiling count n is saved in the initial value area in the RWM. As a result, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on with RAM clearing), the number of ceilings n corresponding to the currently selected probability setting value is set on the game control device 100 side.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the ceiling count command from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 stores the number of times indicated by the ceiling count command in the ceiling count area in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322). As a result, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on with RAM clearing), the number of ceilings n corresponding to the currently selected probability setting value is set on the effect control device 300 side.
Note that the default number of ceilings n stored in the ceiling number table is shown in FIG. 112 (that is, from the viewpoint of avoiding excessive gambling (that is, frequent chance modes triggered by reaching the number of ceilings n)). As shown in b), it is the same as the number of ceilings n corresponding to the lowest probability setting value (setting 1), that is, the number of ceilings n determined based on the probability value corresponding to the lowest probability setting value (setting 1). Is preferable.
In addition, the model and specifications may be specified by the ceiling count command.

From the above, it is possible to execute a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and to generate a special game state that gives the player a game value when the result of the game becomes a special result. In a game machine, a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling a game effect, and a normal variable winning device in which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball. 37, and the game control means generates a normal game state, a specific game state (Public support) in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal game state, and a special game state. It is possible, and when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of ceilings n), a specific game state can be generated without generating a special game state, and the effect control means is the first after the power is turned on. During the execution of the game, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect) that suggests information about the number of times the game is executed.

Therefore, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times the ceiling is n), a specific game state (Public electricity support) can be generated, so that the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect) can be executed during the execution of the first game after the power is turned on, the player can be motivated to execute the first game after the power is turned on, and the store is opened. It is possible to increase the ability to attract customers at the time.
The ceiling suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the first game after the power is turned on, the ceiling suggestion effect may be executed in the middle of the first game after the power is turned on, or the first after the power is turned on. You may perform a ceiling suggestion effect at the end of the game.

In addition, in a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state in which a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a starting condition and a gaming value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. , A game control means for controlling a game (game control device 100), an effect control means for controlling a game effect (effect control device 300), and a normal variable winning device 37 for which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball. The game control means can generate a normal game state, a specific game state (Public power support) in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal game state, and a special game state. , When the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times the ceiling is n), a specific game state can be generated without generating a special game state, and the effect control means keeps the number of times the game executed within a predetermined range ( For example, when the number of times is 599 or more), it is possible to configure the suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect) that suggests information about the number of times the game is executed.

Even in this configuration, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times the ceiling is n), a specific game state (Public electricity support) can be generated, so that the interest of the game is improved. Further, in this configuration, the suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect) can be executed when the number of times the game is executed is within the predetermined range, so that the game is played until the number of times the game is executed is within the predetermined range. It can motivate the player to do it.
In the above embodiment, the number of times the game is executed is measured (updated) after the end of the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game. Therefore, when the number of times the game is executed is 599 times or more, the ceiling suggestion effect is executed to perform 600 rotations. It is possible to execute the ceiling suggestion effect in each of the special figure variation display games above the eyes. The number of game executions can also be measured (updated) at the start of the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game. In that case, the ceiling suggestion effect is executed when the number of game executions is 600 or more. This makes it possible to execute the ceiling suggestion effect in each of the special figure variation display games at the 600th rotation or higher.

In addition, in a game machine that can generate a special game state in which a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition and a game value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The game includes a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, and a normal variable winning device 37 for which the first starting condition of the starting conditions is satisfied by winning the game ball. The first game (special figure 2 variable display game) executed based on the satisfaction of the conditions, the second game (special figure 1 variable display game) executed based on the satisfaction of the second starting condition among the starting conditions, Depending on the game state, one of the first game and the second game can be defined as the main game (main variation), and the game control means is the number of times the first game is executed and the first game. The first area (first normal probability fluctuation number area) in which the total number of times the two games are executed is measured as the number of times the game is executed, and the second area in which the number of times the main game (main fluctuation) is executed is measured as the number of times the game is executed. A region (second normal probability fluctuation frequency region) is provided, and a normal game state, a specific game state (general support) in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 than the normal game state, and a special game state. When the number of game executions measured in the first area or the second area reaches a predetermined number of times (ceiling number n), a specific game state is generated without generating a special game state. It can be configured to be possible.

In this configuration, the total number of times the first game is executed and the number of times the second game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (ceiling number n), or the number of times the main game (main variation) is executed. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times of ceilings n), a specific game state (Public power support) can be generated, so that the interest of the game is improved. In addition, as the game state, the game state in which the total of the number of times the first game is executed and the number of times the second game is executed is measured as the number of times the game is executed, and the number of times the main game (main variation) is executed is used as the number of times the game is executed. When there is a game state to be measured, the total of the number of times the first game is executed and the number of times the second game is executed is measured as the number of times the game is executed. It can be determined whether or not the number of times n) has been reached, and the number of times the main game (main variation) has been executed is measured as the number of times the game has been executed. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the number of ceilings n) has been reached, it is not necessary to perform a calculation process for calculating the number of game executions at the time of determination, and the processing load can be reduced.

The measurement area for measuring the number of times the game is executed does not have to be divided into a first area and a second area. That is, as the game state, the game state in which the total of the number of times the first game is executed and the number of times the second game is executed is measured as the number of times the game is executed, and the number of times the main game (main variation) is executed is used as the number of times the game is executed. When there is a game state to be measured, the total number of times the first game is executed and the number of times the second game is executed is measured as the number of times the game is executed. The number of executions of the main game (main fluctuation) is measured as the number of executions of the game. In the gaming state, the number of executions of the main game (main fluctuation) is measured in the measurement area. You may.

In addition, in a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state in which a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a starting condition and a gaming value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. , A game control means for controlling a game (game control device 100), an effect control means for controlling a game effect (effect control device 300), and a normal variable winning device 37 for which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball. The game control means can generate a normal game state, a specific game state (Public support) in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal game state, and a special game state. , When the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (ceiling number n), a specific game state can be generated without generating a special game state, and the effect control means is a specific effect (reach effect, SP reach effect). ) Is possible, and when the result of the specific effect is not a specific result (stop display of the jackpot symbol), a suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect) that suggests information on the number of times the game is executed can be executed (figure). 108).

Therefore, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times the ceiling is n), a specific game state (Public electricity support) can be generated, so that the interest of the game is improved. Further, since the suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect) can be executed when the result of the specific effect does not result in a specific result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the result does not result in a specific effect. .. In addition, the suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect) can give the player the motivation to play the game until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (ceiling number n), so that the so-called hyena act can be suppressed. It will be possible.
The specific effect is not limited to the reach effect and the SP reach effect, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the specific result is not limited to the stop display of the jackpot symbol, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the result of the stage change effect (specific effect) does not result in the transition of the stage (specific result), that is, when the stage change effect which is a ghost effect is executed, the suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect) is executed. Is also good.

In addition, in a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state in which a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a starting condition and a gaming value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. , A game control means for controlling a game (game control device 100), an effect control means for controlling a game effect (effect control device 300), and a normal variable winning device 37 for which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball. The game control means can generate a normal game state, a specific game state (Public power support) in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal game state, and a special game state. , At the start of the game (ceiling reaching game) of the predetermined number of executions, it is possible to generate a specific game state without generating a special game state, and the effect control means is a specific game state without generating a special game state. When the above occurs, it is possible to configure the notification effect (chance mode entry notification effect) to notify the occurrence of the specific game state after the occurrence of the specific game state.

In this configuration, a specific game state (Public power support) can be generated at the start of the game (ceiling reaching game) at a predetermined number of executions, so that the interest of the game is improved. That is, for example, when the number of ceilings n is 900, a specific game state (Public power support) can be generated at the start of the special figure variation display game at the 900th rotation, so that the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since it is possible to execute a notification effect (chance mode entry notification effect) for notifying the occurrence of the specific game state after the occurrence of the specific game state (for example, during the execution of the special figure variation display game at the 900th rotation), the specific game can be executed. The game is easier to understand than when the notification effect (chance mode entry notification effect) is executed before the state occurs (for example, during the execution of the special figure variation display game at the 899th rotation).

In addition, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special gaming state that gives the player a game value can be generated. The game control means includes a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and a normal variable winning device 37 for which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball. It is possible to generate a specific game state (Public support) and a special game state in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than in the normal game state, and a variable display game (reaching the ceiling) at a predetermined number of executions. At the start of the game), a specific gaming state can be generated without generating a special gaming state, and a dedicated variation pattern (for example, reach) is used as the variation pattern of the variation display game (ceiling reaching game) at a predetermined number of executions. It can be configured so that it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern in which
In this configuration, a specific game state (Public power support) can be generated at the start of the game (ceiling reaching game) at a predetermined number of executions, so that the interest of the game is improved. Further, since the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game) after shifting to the specific game state becomes a dedicated fluctuation pattern, simpler control becomes possible.

In addition, in a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state in which a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a starting condition and a gaming value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. , A game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win or cannot win, and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win or can win than the closed state. The game control means includes a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted and a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball, and the game control means can win a prize in the normal game state and the normal variable winning device 37 rather than the normal game state. An easy specific game state (Public support) and a special game state can be generated, and when the result of the game is a predetermined result (per support) different from the special result, or the number of times the game is executed is predetermined. When the number of times (ceiling number n) is reached, a specific game state can be generated without generating a special game state, and an area (time) for counting the number of ends (support number) which is a condition for ending the specific game state. The shortened fluctuation frequency area) is defined as a specific game state (chance mode triggered by a support hit) that occurs when the result of the game reaches a predetermined result, and a specific game that occurs when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. The game state (chance mode triggered by the number of ceilings reaching n) and the specific game state (chance mode triggered by the support hit) that occurs when the result of the game becomes a predetermined result, and the game The specific game state (chance mode triggered by reaching the ceiling number n) that occurs when the number of executions reaches a predetermined number, and the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern of the normal electric accessory) and the number of ends of the normal variable winning device 37. It can be configured so that (number of times of support) is different.

In this configuration, when the result of the game is a predetermined result (per support) or when the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times (the number of ceilings n), the specific game state (hobby support) is set. Since it can be generated, the fun of the game is improved. In addition, a specific game state (chance mode triggered by a support hit) that occurs when the result of the game reaches a predetermined result, and a specific game state (ceiling number) that occurs when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. Since the area (time reduction fluctuation number area) for counting the end number (support number), which is a condition for ending the specific game state, is shared with the chance mode triggered by n arrival, the area in the RWM is effectively used. It becomes possible to do. In addition, a specific game state (chance mode triggered by a support hit) that occurs when the result of the game reaches a predetermined result, and a specific game state (ceiling number) that occurs when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. Since the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern of the normal electric accessory) and the number of terminations (number of times of support) of the normal variable winning device 37 are different between the chance mode triggered by reaching n), various specific gaming states may occur. It will be possible.

In addition, in a game machine that can generate a special game state in which a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition and a game value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. , A game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win or cannot win, and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win or can win than the closed state. A normal variable winning device 37 that is convertible and a start condition is satisfied by winning a game ball is provided, and the game control means executes a normal map game (normal map variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. When the result of the normal game is a specific result, a hit state for converting the normal variable winning device 37 to the open state can be generated, and the normal gaming state and the normal variable winning device 37 rather than the normal gaming state can be generated. It is possible to generate a specific game state (Public support) and a special game state where it is easy to win a prize, and when the result of the game is a predetermined result (per support) different from the special result, or the execution of the game When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (ceiling number n), a specific game state can be generated without generating a special game state, and the number of ends (support number) which is a condition for ending the specific game state is counted. The area (time reduction fluctuation frequency area) is defined as a specific game state (chance mode triggered by a support hit) that occurs when the result of the game reaches a predetermined result, and when the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. The specific game state that occurs (chance mode triggered by reaching the ceiling count n) and the specific game state that occurs when the result of the game becomes a predetermined result (chance mode triggered by hitting the support) , The specific game state that occurs when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n), and the probability that the result of the normal figure game will be a specific result (normal figure probability) and It can be configured so that the number of terminations (number of supports) is different.

In this configuration, when the result of the game is a predetermined result (per support) or when the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times (the number of ceilings n), the specific game state (hobby support) is set. Since it can be generated, the fun of the game is improved. In addition, a specific game state (chance mode triggered by a support hit) that occurs when the result of the game reaches a predetermined result, and a specific game state (ceiling number) that occurs when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. Since the area (time reduction fluctuation number area) for counting the end number (support number), which is a condition for ending the specific game state, is shared with the chance mode triggered by n arrival, the area in the RWM is effectively used. It becomes possible to do. In addition, a specific game state (chance mode triggered by a support hit) that occurs when the result of the game reaches a predetermined result, and a specific game state (ceiling number) that occurs when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. Since the probability that the result of the normal figure game will be a specific result (normal figure probability) and the number of ends (number of times of support) are different between the chance mode triggered by reaching n), it is possible to generate various specific game states. It becomes.

The area for counting the number of terminations (time reduction fluctuation frequency area) does not have to be shared. That is, a first count area and a second count area are provided as an area for counting the number of ends (time reduction fluctuation number area), and a specific game state (triggered by a support hit) that occurs when the result of the game is a predetermined result. The first count area is used in the chance mode), and the second count area is used in the specific game state (chance mode triggered by the arrival of the ceiling number n) that occurs when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. You may do so.
In addition, a specific game state (chance mode triggered by a support hit) that occurs when the result of the game reaches a predetermined result, and a specific game state (ceiling number) that occurs when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. The opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern of the ordinary electric accessory) of the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be the same as that of the chance mode triggered by the arrival of n).
In addition, a specific game state (chance mode triggered by a support hit) that occurs when the result of the game reaches a predetermined result, and a specific game state (ceiling number) that occurs when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. The probability that the result of the normal map game will be a specific result (normal figure probability) may be the same as that of the chance mode triggered by the arrival of n).
In addition, a specific game state (chance mode triggered by a support hit) that occurs when the result of the game reaches a predetermined result, and a specific game state (ceiling number) that occurs when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. The chance mode triggered by reaching n) and the number of terminations (number of support) may be the same.

Further, in a game machine that executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game control means (game control device 100) that counts the number of times the game is executed and information output from the game control means are input. When the game control means is in the first game state (game state other than the high probability state), the game control means counts down the number of times the game is executed and counts down. It is possible to output the first number of times information (normal probability fluctuation number of times command) corresponding to, and in the second game state (state with normal electric support), the number of game executions is counted down and the countdown is supported. It is possible to output the second number of times information (time reduction fluctuation number of times command), and when the effect control means receives the first number of times information from the game control means, the first number of times information corresponds to the count-up. When the second number of times information is received from the game control means after being converted into the number of times information and stored (FIG. 111 (a)), the second number of times information is not converted into the number of times information corresponding to the count-up. Store (FIG. 111 (b)).

Therefore, it is possible to notify the number of times (suggest the number of times) by a method according to the game state, and the interest of the game is improved. Specifically, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is output from the game control means (game control device 100) when the game state is the first game state (game state other than the high probability state). Since the number-of-times information is converted into the number-of-times information corresponding to the count-up and stored, in the first game state, the number-of-times notification (for example, ceiling suggestion effect) is performed by the count-up method without converting the stored number-of-times information. It can be performed. Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) outputs the second number of times information output from the game control means (game control device 100) when the game state is the second game state (state in which there is a general electric support). Since it is stored without being converted into the number of times information corresponding to the countup, in the second game state, the number of times notification (for example, the support number of times notification effect) is performed by the countdown method without converting the stored number of times information. Can be done.

Alternatively, the reverse may be performed.
That is, in a game machine that executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, the game control means (game control device 100) that counts the number of times the game is executed and the information output from the game control means are input. When the game control means is in the first game state (game state other than the high probability state), the game control means counts up the number of times the game is executed. It is possible to output the first number of times information (normal probability fluctuation number of times command) corresponding to the count-up, and in the second game state (state with Fuden support), the number of game executions is counted up and the relevant It is possible to output the second number information (time reduction fluctuation number command) corresponding to the count-up, and when the effect control means receives the first number information from the game control means, the effect control means counts down the first number information. When the second number information from the game control means is received, the second number information is stored without being converted into the number information corresponding to the countdown. Is also good.

Also in this case, since it is possible to notify the number of times (suggest the number of times) by a method according to the game state, the interest of the game is improved. Specifically, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is output from the game control means (game control device 100) when the game state is the first game state (game state other than the high probability state). Since the number-of-times information is converted into the number-of-times information corresponding to the countdown and stored, in the first game state, the number-of-times notification can be performed by the countdown method without converting the stored number-of-times information. Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) outputs the second number of times information output from the game control means (game control device 100) when the game state is the second game state (state in which there is a general electric support). Since it is stored without being converted into the number-of-times information corresponding to the countdown, in the second gaming state, the number-of-times notification can be performed by the count-up method without converting the stored number-of-times information.

The first gaming state is not limited to the gaming state other than the high probability state, and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the second game state is not limited to the state in which there is a general electric support, and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the first number information is not limited to the normal probability fluctuation number command and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the second number information is not limited to the time reduction fluctuation number command and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, the ceiling suggestion effect can be executed when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on with RAM clear).
As shown in FIG. 13, when the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, a command for power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step X42). In the gaming machine equipped with the ceiling function, in step X42, a normal probability fluctuation number command for notifying the normal probability fluctuation number is also transmitted.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, when the power is turned on with the RAM cleared, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45), and the command at the time of RAM initialization is sent to the effect control device 300. It is transmitted (step X46). In the gaming machine equipped with the ceiling function, the initial value (900 in this case) is also saved in the normal probability fluctuation number region in step X45, and the normal probability fluctuation number command for notifying the normal probability fluctuation number is also saved in step X46. Will be sent.

Then, when the effect control device 300 receives the normal probability fluctuation number command transmitted in steps X42 and X46, the effect control device 300 transfers the information based on the normal probability fluctuation number command to the game execution number area in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322). Remember. Further, at that time, the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect is determined based on the information stored in the game execution count area, and the ceiling suggestion effect is executed in the determined effect mode, so that the power is turned on (RAM). It is possible to execute the ceiling suggestion effect (including when the power is turned on with clearing).
Alternatively, a game execution count area is provided in FeRAM 323 that can hold the stored contents even when power is not supplied, and the effect control device 300 sets the game execution count area in the game execution count area when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on with RAM clearing). The effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect may be determined based on the stored information (that is, the information stored before the power is cut off), and the ceiling suggestion effect may be executed in the determined effect mode.

The ceiling suggestion effect that is executed during the special figure variation display game or while waiting for customers is an effect that is mainly executed for the player. On the other hand, the ceiling suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling suggestion effect when power is turned on") that is executed when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on with RAM clear) is an effect that is mainly executed for the clerk of the amusement store. ..
In a game store where multiple game machines equipped with a ceiling function are installed, the clerk either checks the detailed data of each machine on the hall computer and selects the game machine that clears the RAM before opening the store. , Clear RAM for all machines. When the RAM is cleared, the number of times the game is executed is reset (the measurement of the number of times the game is executed is cleared), and the number of remaining rotations up to the number of times the ceiling is n increases, so that the ball ejection rate can be adjusted.

However, when confirming the detailed data of each unit with a hall computer, there is a problem that troublesome confirmation work must be performed when preparing to open the store. Also, if you want to clear the RAM for all the units, if you play the game from the opening of the store, none of the units will easily shift to the chance mode triggered by reaching the number of ceilings n (to shift, execute the game for the number of ceilings n). Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to play the game from the morning, and the ability to attract customers at the time of opening the store is reduced. On the other hand, by executing the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on, the clerk can select the gaming machine that clears the RAM without performing troublesome confirmation work, so it is possible to efficiently prepare for opening the store and from the opening of the store. Since there is a possibility of immediately shifting to the chance mode (chance mode triggered by the arrival of the number of ceilings n) even if the game is played, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the ability to attract customers at the time of opening the store.

The ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on may be started before the end of the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, or may be started at the end of the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode. Alternatively, it may be started after the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends.
Further, the ceiling suggestion effect at power-on may be executed only when the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect (described above) is satisfied, or when the power is turned on regardless of whether the execution condition of the ceiling suggestion effect is satisfied. It may always be executed (including when the power is turned on with RAM clear).
Further, when the current time is earlier than the predetermined time, the ceiling suggestion effect may be executed when the power is turned on. The current time can be determined based on the information from RTC338. Thereby, for example, it is possible to configure the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on so as not to be executed after the opening time. With this configuration, even if a power failure occurs during business hours, the ceiling suggestion effect will not be executed when the power is turned on when the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing the remaining number of revolutions up to n). Further, the predetermined time may be set (changed) for each game store.

Further, it is preferable that the effect of suggesting the ceiling when the power is turned on can be grasped even when the player is away from the gaming machine. For example, when the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on is the ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 106 (a)) that causes the effect device to emit light, the clerk is arranged along the aisle just by looking from the end of the island aisle. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the ceiling suggestion effect is executed when the power is turned on and the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on for each of the plurality of gaming machines, it is possible to easily determine the game machine that clears the RAM. Can be found and preferred.

Further, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), for example, the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on may be determined based on the remaining number of rotations (the number of times corresponding to the countdown) up to the number of times the ceiling is n. In this case, the effect control device 300 may calculate the remaining number of rotations up to the number of ceilings n from the number of times indicated by the normal probability fluctuation number command transmitted in steps X42 and X46 (normal probability fluctuation number), or the step. The number of times the information based on the normal probability fluctuation number command transmitted by X42 and X46 is stored in the game execution number area and then stored in the game execution number area (game execution number (number of times corresponding to count-up) or normal probability). It may be calculated from the number of fluctuations (the number of times corresponding to the countdown). Alternatively, when the game execution count area is provided in FeRAM 323, the number of times stored in the game execution count area at the time of power-on (including when the power is turned on with RAM clear) (that is, stored before the power is cut off). The number of times the game is executed. Specifically, it may be calculated from the number of times the game is executed (the number of times corresponding to the count-up) or the number of times the normal probability fluctuates (the number of times corresponding to the count-down).

Further, the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on may be the same as or different from the ceiling suggestion effect executed during the special figure variation display game or while waiting for customers. That is, for example, when the ceiling suggestion effect (FIG. 106 (a)) that causes the effect device to emit light is executed as the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on, the ceiling suggestion effect executed during the special figure variation display game or while waiting for customers is produced. It may be a ceiling suggestion effect that causes the device to emit light, or it may be a ceiling suggestion effect other than that. In addition, in the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on, information on the number of times the game is executed (such as the number of times the game is executed and the number of remaining rotations up to the number of times the ceiling is n) is clearly suggested, and the game is executed during the special figure variation display game or while waiting for customers. In the ceiling suggestion effect, information regarding the number of times the game is executed (such as the number of times the game is executed and the number of remaining rotations up to the number of times the ceiling is n) may be vaguely suggested.
Further, the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on may be the same as the effect other than the ceiling suggestion effect. Specifically, for example, the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on may be an effect mode that is also used as the jackpot expectation suggestion effect that suggests the jackpot expectation. Further, in this case, the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect at the time of turning on the power is more likely to be selected when the number of game executions at the time of turning on the power is larger (that is, the smaller the number of remaining rotations up to the number of ceilings n is) and the expectation of big hit is high. You may use the production mode of the jackpot expectation suggestion effect.

Further, the effect time of the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on may be the same regardless of the effect mode, or may be different depending on the effect mode as shown in FIG. 112 (b), for example.
In the example shown in FIG. 112 (b), the smaller the number of rotations remaining up to the number of ceilings n, the longer the time (light emission time) for the effect device to emit light for the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on. That is, the smaller the number of remaining rotations up to the number of ceilings n, the longer the effect time of the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on.
A gaming machine having a relatively small number of remaining rotations up to the number of ceilings n is more likely to be selected as a gaming machine that clears RAM than a gaming machine having a relatively large number of remaining rotations up to the number of ceilings n. For example, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), the effect time of the ceiling suggestion effect at power-on, which is executed when the remaining rotation speed up to the ceiling number n is relatively small, is set so that the remaining rotation speed up to the ceiling number n is relatively small. By making it longer than the effect time of the ceiling suggestion effect at power-on, which is executed when there are many, the effect device ends the ceiling suggestion effect at power-on in a gaming machine with a relatively large number of remaining rotations up to the number of ceilings n. Even if it returns to normal light emission (light emission different from the light emission for ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on), the effect device continues the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on in a gaming machine with a relatively small number of rotations remaining up to the number of ceilings n. Therefore, it is easy to find a gaming machine with a relatively small number of remaining rotations up to the number of ceilings n.

Further, the production time of the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on may be set (changed) for each game store.
By making it possible to change the production time of the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on, for example, the game store can select whether to end the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on before the opening of the game store or after the opening of the store. Is possible.
For example, by setting the effect time of the ceiling suggestion effect at power-on so that the game ends after the opening of the game store, the player can also obtain information on the number of times the game is executed (game execution number) from the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect at power-on. And the number of remaining rotations up to the number of ceilings n) can be acquired. Therefore, for example, if the ratio of the number of RAM-cleared gaming machines to the number of gaming machines that have executed the ceiling suggestion effect at power-on is smaller than usual, the ceiling at power-on will end after the opening of the gaming store. By setting the effect time of the suggestion effect, it is possible to appeal that there are many gaming machines (for example, a game machine in which the RAM is not cleared even though the ceiling suggestion effect is executed when the power is turned on) with a small number of remaining rotations up to the number of ceilings n. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game from the morning, and the operation rate is improved.

On the other hand, by setting the production time of the ceiling suggestion effect at power-on so that it ends before the opening of the game store, the player can perform the ceiling suggestion effect at power-on and the gaming machine that executed the ceiling suggestion effect at power-on. Since it is not possible to distinguish between a gaming machine that is not running, a gaming machine that has cleared RAM, and a gaming machine that has not cleared RAM, a gaming machine that has a small number of remaining rotations up to the number of ceilings n from among multiple gaming machines (for example, a power supply). It is possible to give the player the pleasure of selecting a gaming machine (a gaming machine whose RAM is not cleared even though the ceiling suggestion effect is executed at the time of throwing in), and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 112 (b), the ceiling suggestion effect is executed when the power is turned on when the remaining rotation speed up to the ceiling number n is 300 times or less, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example. Regardless of the number of rotations remaining up to the number of ceilings n, the ceiling suggestion effect may be always executed when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on with RAM clearing).
In addition, the effect mode of the power-on ceiling suggestion effect to be executed when the number of game executions at power-on is a specific number, and the power-on ceiling to be executed when the number of game executions at power-on is other than the specific number. The production mode of the suggestion effect may be different from that of the production mode. Specifically, for example, when the number of times the game is executed at the time of turning on the power is 0 (that is, when the number of remaining rotations up to the number of times of ceiling n matches the number of times of ceiling n), the effect of suggesting the ceiling at the time of turning on the power is performed. A mode, an effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect at power-on, which is executed when the number of times the game is executed at power-on is 1 or more (that is, when the remaining number of rotations up to the ceiling number n does not match the ceiling number n). May be different. As a result, the clerk of the game store can check, for example, the game machine whose RAM has been cleared after the store was closed the day before or the game machine whose settings have been changed before the store opens on the day.

Further, when the number of transitions to the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the ceiling number n in a predetermined period (for example, the period from the time when the RAM is cleared last to the present time) is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the ceiling number n is reached. Since it can be said that the gaming machine can easily shift to the chance mode as an opportunity, the ceiling suggestion effect may be always executed when the power is turned on so that the gaming machine is selected as the gaming machine that clears the RAM. The predetermined number of times here may be once or may be a plurality of times.
Further, the number of transitions to the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the ceiling number n in a predetermined period (for example, the period from the time when the RAM is cleared last to the present time) is suggested by the effect mode of the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on. You can do it. When performing a ceiling suggestion effect that causes the effect device to emit light as a ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on, for example, the emission color suggests the remaining number of rotations up to the ceiling number n, and the presence or absence of blinking and the blinking pattern indicate the number of transitions. You may do so.

From the above, it is possible to execute a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and to generate a special game state that gives the player a game value when the result of the game becomes a special result. In a game machine, a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling a game effect, and a normal variable winning device in which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball. 37, and the game control means generates a normal game state, a specific game state (Public support) in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal game state, and a special game state. It is possible, and when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of ceilings n), a specific game state can be generated without generating a special game state, and the effect control means can generate the game when the power is turned on. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on) that suggests information on the number of executions (game execution number, remaining number of rotations up to the ceiling number n, etc.).

Therefore, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times the ceiling is n), a specific game state (Public electricity support) can be generated, so that the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since it is possible to perform a suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on) when the power is turned on, it is possible to efficiently prepare for the opening of the amusement store and suppress a decrease in the ability to attract customers when the store is opened. It becomes.
The ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on is not limited to the ceiling suggestion effect that causes the effect device to emit light, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the ceiling suggestion effect that displays the remaining rotation number image G4 (FIG. 106 (f)). You may.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can end the suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on) when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the effect time of the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on has elapsed). be.
Therefore, the suggestion effect performed when the power is turned on (the ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on) ends when a predetermined condition is satisfied, which is preferable.

The suggestion effect performed when the power is turned on (ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on) may not be completed. That is, the ceiling suggestion effect may be continuously executed when the power is turned on until the power is turned off.
Further, in the above embodiment, the predetermined condition, that is, the end condition of the ceiling suggestion effect at power-on is set to "the effect time of the ceiling suggestion effect at power-on has elapsed", but the end condition is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. For example, "a predetermined operating means has been operated" or the like. Further, the predetermined operating means here may be an operating means arranged at a position where the player cannot operate, or may be an operating means arranged at a position where the player can also operate.

In addition, in a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state in which a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a starting condition and a gaming value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. , A game control means for controlling a game (game control device 100), an effect control means for controlling a game effect (effect control device 300), and a normal variable winning device 37 for which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball. The game control means can generate a normal game state, a specific game state (Public power support) in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal game state, and a special game state. , When the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times the ceiling is n), a specific game state can be generated without generating a special game state, and the effect control means relates to the number of times the game is executed when the power is turned on. It is possible to execute the first suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on) that suggests information (game execution count, remaining number of rotations up to ceiling count n, etc.), and the result of the game is special during game execution. The second suggestion effect (big hit expectation suggestion effect) that suggests the expected degree as a result can be configured to be feasible.

Even in this configuration, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times the ceiling is n), a specific game state (Public electricity support) can be generated, so that the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since it is possible to perform a suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on) when the power is turned on, it is possible to efficiently prepare for the opening of the amusement store and suppress a decrease in the ability to attract customers when the store is opened. It becomes.
Further, it is possible to configure the production mode of the first suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on) to be the same as the effect mode of the second suggestion effect (big hit expectation suggestion effect). When configured, the production mode can be shared between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, so that the amount of data can be reduced, the development cost can be reduced, and the like.

In addition, in a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state in which a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a starting condition and a gaming value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. , A game control means for controlling a game (game control device 100), an effect control means for controlling a game effect (effect control device 300), and a normal variable winning device 37 for which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball. The game control means can generate a normal game state, a specific game state (Public power support) in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal game state, and a special game state. , When the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times the ceiling is n), a specific game state can be generated without generating a special game state, and the effect control means relates to the number of times the game is executed when the power is turned on. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect at power-on) that suggests information (game execution count, remaining number of rotations up to ceiling count n, etc.), and the number of game executions at power-on is a specific number of times (for example, 0 times). ) And other cases, the mode of suggestion effect can be configured to be different.

Even in this configuration, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times the ceiling is n), a specific game state (Public electricity support) can be generated, so that the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since it is possible to perform a suggestion effect (ceiling suggestion effect when the power is turned on) when the power is turned on, it is possible to efficiently prepare for the opening of the amusement store and suppress a decrease in the ability to attract customers when the store is opened. It becomes. In addition, when the specific number of times is 0, the clerk of the game store can check, for example, the game machine whose RAM has been cleared after the store was closed the day before or the game machine whose settings have been changed before the store opens on the day. ..

For example, the game machine 10 may be a game machine that executes the special figure 2 variable display game with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and the game machine 10 may play the special figure 1 variable display game. It may be a game machine that executes the special figure 2 variable display game with priority over the special figure 2 variable display game, or may be a game machine that executes the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the order of winning. FIG. 1 may be a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a gaming machine that does not simultaneously display the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory on the display device 41. .. That is, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory may be simultaneously displayed on the display device 41.

Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a gaming machine having a specific region (probability variation operating region). That is, instead of generating a high probability state based on the fact that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (the specific area switch 38d has detected the game ball), the result of the special figure variation display game is a probabilistic jackpot. Based on the fact, a high probability state may be generated.
Further, the gaming machine 10 includes a sub-information display device (fourth symbol LED) that displays a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variation display game in addition to the decorative special figure variation display game displayed by the display device 41. You may be. Further, this sub-information display device may display the number of start storages and the like in addition to the display of the fourth symbol.

FIG. 113 shows another example of the ceiling suggestion effect.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 113A, by changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a and the running memory display 84a, the ceiling is reached in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory. I try to perform a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests the possibility. Further, by changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a and the running memory display 84a, the look-ahead effect of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is performed.
The ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect can be performed in a common display mode, making it difficult for the player to determine which effect is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 113 (b), the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a and the running memory display 84a in this example is a display mode in which colors are displayed in blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow colors. Or, a display mode in which the form is the shape of a character, such as character 1 or character 2, is included. In the figure, the colors are expressed by letters. Further, the decorative special figure start memory display 83a on which the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect are not executed is displayed in a white round shape.

These display modes include those commonly used in the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect. For example, in the blue display mode, the expectation of the ceiling is 10% when used in the ceiling suggestion effect, and the expectation of a big hit is 5% when used in the look-ahead effect.
In addition, the rainbow color does not have a function as a ceiling suggestion effect and deterministically notifies that it will be a big hit, and the character 1 displaying the first character is not used for the start memory to reach the ceiling. It definitely notifies that it will be a big hit.
Further, the character 2 that displays the second character is used only in the start memory that the result is out of order and reaches the ceiling.

That is, the look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state that is the first gaming state, and the ceiling suggestion effect is that the gaming state shifts to the time saving state that is the second gaming state. Make a suggestive effect.
Then, the first character has a display mode for notifying the transition to the first gaming state, and the second character and the rainbow-colored display mode have a display mode for notifying the transition to the second gaming state.
Further, the blue, green, red, and gold display modes form a display mode for notifying the transition to the first gaming state or the transition to the second display mode.

Further, in the green display mode, the expectation of the ceiling when used in the ceiling suggestion effect is 40%, and the expectation of a big hit when used in the look-ahead effect is 20%. The red display mode has a ceiling expectation of 20% when used in the ceiling suggestion effect, and a jackpot expectation of 40% when used in the look-ahead effect.
That is, the expectation level in the ceiling suggestion effect is higher in the order of blue, red, green, and gold, while the expectation level in the look-ahead effect is higher in the order of blue, green, red, and gold.
In this way, by changing the order of expectations of each color between the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect, the effect can be changed and the fun of the game can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 113 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display 83a corresponding to the third digested start memory is displayed in green.
The gaming machine executes either the ceiling suggestion effect or the look-ahead effect, but the player can determine whether the effect on the decorative special figure start memory display 83a is the ceiling suggestion effect or the look-ahead effect. Can not. Therefore, for the player, the expectation that the special figure variation display game based on the start memory will be the ceiling is 40%, and the expectation that the special figure variation display game based on the start memory will be a big hit is 20%. You would expect both to be.

The ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect can be started at any time after the generation of the target start memory.
Further, the display mode can be further changed at any timing. For example, from the state shown in FIG. 113 (b), the display mode can be changed based on the fact that the next special figure variation display game is started and the start memory is digested as shown in FIG. 113 (c).
Further, as shown in FIGS. 113 (d) and 113 (e), it is also possible to change the display mode when the running memory display 84a is changed with the start of the special figure variation display game based on the target start memory. Is.

In the cases of FIGS. 113 (d) and 113 (e), the ceiling is reached and the time saving state is started with the start of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory.
In this case, when the execution memory display 84a changes to the character 2 as shown in FIG. 113 (d), it indicates that the character 2 is the result of the detachment, so that the effect at this point reaches the ceiling. It becomes clear that it is a notification of what to do.
When the executing memory display 84a is a display mode in which the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect are used at the same time as shown in FIG. 113 (e), it is still difficult to determine which effect is being executed.

By using a common display mode for the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect as described above, it is possible to have both expectations for the ceiling and expectations for the jackpot, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.
In particular, by performing the ceiling suggestion effect on the decorative special figure start memory display 83a, it is possible to suggest the arrival of the ceiling in an easy-to-understand manner, increase the interest in the start memory, and improve the interest of the game.

In the above example, the look-ahead effect suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, but it may be an effect based on the look-ahead result of the start memory, and may suggest a variation pattern to be executed.
Further, the ceiling suggestion effect, the first look-ahead effect suggesting a big hit, and the second look-ahead effect suggesting a fluctuation pattern can be executed, and a common display mode may be used in each effect. In addition to this, a common display mode may be used for an effect that suggests that points for the effect are given.
That is, it suffices as long as it is possible to use a common display mode for the effects suggesting two or more different events. Further, since the ceiling suggestion effect is not based on the look-ahead result, it can be said that a common display mode can be used between the effect not based on the look-ahead result and the effect based on the look-ahead result.

Further, although it is assumed that either the ceiling suggestion effect or the look-ahead effect is executed, the decorative special figure start memory display 83a or the execution hold display 84a may be changed to the other effect while one effect is being executed. Further, the ceiling suggestion effect may be executed on the decorative special figure start memory display 83a, and the look-ahead effect may be performed on the running memory display 84a.

Further, which of the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect can be arbitrarily selected can be arbitrarily selected, but which one to be selected may be determined depending on the conditions.
For example, for the start memory in which the result is a big hit and the start memory for executing a specific fluctuation pattern such as SP reach, the look-ahead effect may be executed with priority over the ceiling suggestion effect.
Further, as for the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game reaching the ceiling, the ceiling suggestion effect may be executed with priority over the look-ahead effect.
Further, in the case of a big hit in the special figure variation display game reaching the ceiling, the start memory for executing the special figure variation display game may be executed with priority given to the look-ahead effect, or the ceiling may be reached. The production may be prioritized and executed. Alternatively, the ceiling suggestion effect may be executed on the decorative special figure start memory display 83a, and the look-ahead effect may be performed on the running memory display 84a.

Further, it may be possible to select whether to execute the ceiling suggestion effect or the look-ahead effect based on the number of normal probability fluctuations that manage the number of games until reaching the ceiling. For example, as the number of games remaining until reaching the ceiling increases, the ratio of selecting the look-ahead effect may be increased.
In addition, the period until the normal probability fluctuation number is reset for the first time after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the period after the normal probability fluctuation number is reset due to a big hit or reaching the ceiling, are used for the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect. The selection ratio may be different.

In the period after the normal probability fluctuation number is reset, the number of games displayed on the display provided above the gaming machine is also reset at the same time, so that the number of games displayed on the display reaches the ceiling. The player can grasp the timing. Therefore, the look-ahead effect is more effective than the ceiling suggestion effect.
On the other hand, the period until the normal probability fluctuation number is reset for the first time after the power of the gaming machine is turned on is counted by taking over the normal probability fluctuation number before the power is cut off unless the RAM of the game control device 100 is cleared. do. Since the number of games displayed on the display provided above the gaming machine is the number of games since the power is turned on, it is a value that does not correspond to the number of normal probability fluctuations, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the arrival timing to the ceiling. .. Therefore, the ceiling suggestion effect is also an effective effect.
Therefore, the period until the normal probability fluctuation number is reset for the first time after the power of the gaming machine is turned on should be higher than the period after the normal probability variation number is reset. It becomes possible to carry out an effective production.

Further, if there is a start memory that becomes a big hit before the start memory that reaches the ceiling, the ceiling suggestion effect may not be performed for the start memory that reaches the ceiling. In this case, since the number of normal probability fluctuations is reset due to the occurrence of a big hit, it is possible to prevent the contradictory ceiling suggestion effect from being executed.

Further, if there is a start memory that reaches the ceiling before the start memory that becomes a big hit, the ceiling suggestion effect may be executed. In this case, the pre-reading effect for the start memory, which is a big hit, may be performed, but in the case of a gaming machine that gives priority to the special figure 2 variable display game, the pre-reading effect may not be performed. When the ceiling is reached, the time is shortened, and the special figure 2 start memory is preferentially digested and the special figure 1 start memory is delayed, so that the start memory with the look-ahead effect may not be digested for a long period of time. Because.

Further, although it is assumed that either the ceiling suggestion effect or the look-ahead effect is executed, both may be executed at the same time. That is, the first information and the second information different from the first information may be suggested at the same time by one display mode of the start memory display.
For example, among the display modes shown in FIG. 113 (b), the green display mode suggests that the expectation of the ceiling is 40%, and at the same time, the expectation of the jackpot is 20%. To do.
By doing so, the suggestion of the first information and the suggestion of the second information can be efficiently performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.
Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the state in which both the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect are executed at the same time may be changed to the state in which one of the effects is executed, or the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect may be executed. The state in which one of the effects is being executed may be changed to the state in which both effects are being executed at the same time.
Further, it may be possible to suggest three or more plurality of information at the same time by one display mode of the start memory display.

Further, in the above example, the time saving state is set from the start of the 900th special figure variation display game reaching the ceiling, but the time saving state is started from the end of the 900th special figure variation display game reaching the ceiling. You may do so.
When the time saving state is started from the start of the 900th special figure variation display game that reaches the ceiling, the 899th special figure variation display game is executed to display the character 2 that definitely notifies that the ceiling is reached. It may be displayed in the start memory, or may be displayed in the start memory for executing the 900th special figure variation display game.
When the time saving state is started from the end of the 900th special figure variation display game that reaches the ceiling, the 900th special figure variation display game is executed to display the character 2 that definitely notifies that the ceiling is reached. It may be displayed in the start memory, or may be displayed in the start memory for executing the 901st special figure variation display game.

FIG. 114 shows a modified example of the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect described above.
Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, it may be possible to determine whether the ceiling suggestion effect or the look-ahead effect is being executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), a display G10 indicating that the ceiling suggestion effect is being executed is added, and as shown in FIG. 114 (b), a display indicating that the look-ahead effect is being executed is added. As G11 is added, it may be possible to discriminate by the additional display.
Further, when the ceiling suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the display is a pentagon, and when the look-ahead effect is executed as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the display is a hexagon. As described above, it may be possible to discriminate by the difference in shape.

Further, the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect may be executed separately at the same time. As shown in FIG. 114 (e), the upper tier may be displayed as a ceiling suggestion effect, and the lower tier may be displayed as a look-ahead effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (f), the inside may be a ceiling suggestion effect and the outside may be a look-ahead effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 114 (g) to 114 (i), one of the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect may be displayed as the main effect G12 and the other as the sub effect G13. In this case, only the main effect is an effective effect during the period when the main effect is being executed, and the sub effect is an effective effect after the main effect is completed. In addition, the sub-effects can be visually recognized even during the execution of the main effect, so that there is a sense of expectation for the end of the main effect.

In the state of FIG. 114 (g), the main effect G12 is executed, and the main effect is an effective effect. Here, the main effect is a ceiling suggestion effect, and the display mode is blue. The sub-effect G13 is not an effective effect, but it can be visually recognized through the main effect. Here, the sub-effect is a look-ahead effect, and the green display mode is visible through the blue main effect. In this state, only the ceiling suggestion effect, which is the main effect, is effective, and the look-ahead effect, which is the sub effect, is visible but not effective.

When the main effect ends, the main effect is split as shown in FIG. 114 (h), and the sub effect becomes clearly visible as shown in FIG. 114 (i). As a result, the look-ahead effect that forms the sub effect becomes an effective effect.
It is also possible to change the execution mode of the sub-effect during the execution of the main effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the feeling of expectation when the main production is completed.

Further, in the above example, the effects of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a and the running memory display 84a are shown, but the ceiling suggestion effect (suggestion of transition to the second gaming state) and the look-ahead effect are also shown in other effects. (Suggestion of transition to the first gaming state) can be executed using a common display mode.
That is, in the predetermined effect displayed on the display device 41, the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect can be executed using a common display mode. Further, in a predetermined effect performed by a device different from the display device 41, the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect can be executed by using a common display mode.

For example, in a timer effect that suggests the time until the occurrence of a specific event, a common display mode is a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests the time to reach the ceiling and a look-ahead effect that suggests the time until the jackpot occurs. It is feasible with. In this case, in order to make it possible to distinguish between the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect, the display color of the timer display may be different, or a display for making the distinction possible may be added.
Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81, the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect may be performed by making a specific outlier result mode appear. In this case, in addition to the deviation result mode common to the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect, the loss result mode used only in each of the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect may be provided.

Further, in the stock production in which the right to execute a predetermined effect is stocked and the predetermined effect is executed based on the stock when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect are common execution modes as the predetermined effect. You may execute it with. In this case, the ceiling suggestion effect may be executed with the number of stocks smaller or larger than the look-ahead effect, or the stock may be displayed only for each of the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect. Then, it may be possible to determine which effect is reserved and which effect is being executed.

Further, in the point effect in which the predetermined effect is executed when the points reach a predetermined value, the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect may be executed as a predetermined effect in a common execution mode. In this case, the ceiling suggestion effect may be executed with fewer or more points than the look-ahead effect, or there may be a point addition value that is executed only in each of the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect. , It may be possible to determine which effect is being held and which effect is being executed.

Further, the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect may be executed by using the LED or the movable accessory provided on the front frame 12 or the game board 30. In this case, the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect may be executed in a common execution mode. Further, it may be possible to determine which effect is being executed by making it possible to have an execution mode that is executed only in each of the ceiling suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect.

From the above, the production control that controls the production of the game in the game machine that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. Means (effect control device 300), display means (display device 41) capable of displaying information about the game, start winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) in which the game ball can be won, and starting winning. A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories, which is the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball to the area, is provided, and the effect control means presents the start memory. A start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display 83a) for showing can be displayed on the display means, and the first information and the second information different from the first information are different depending on the display mode of the start memory display. Can be suggested, and a common display can be used in the display mode that suggests the first information and the display mode that suggests the second information.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by guessing which of the suggestion of the first information and the suggestion of the second information is being performed.

Further, the effect control means can suggest game information based on the start memory as the first information, and can suggest information on the change in the game state based on executing the game a predetermined number of times as the second information. There will be.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by guessing which of the suggestions of this information is being performed.

Further, it can be converted into a game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and an open state in which the game ball can win a prize. The game control means includes a normal variable winning device 37, and the game control means sets the state of the normal variable winning device 37 in either a first state or a second state in which winning is easier than the first state. It is possible to set the second state based on controlling and executing the game a predetermined number of times without deriving a special result, and the effect control means executes the game a predetermined number of times as the second information. Therefore, it is possible to suggest information about the second state based on the above, and therefore it is possible to suggest that the second state is to be set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result, the effect control means (effect) for controlling the effect of the game in the game machine that generates a state advantageous to the player. The control device 300), the display means (display device 41) capable of displaying information related to the game, the start winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) in which the game ball can be won, and the starting winning area. A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories, which is the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball, is provided, and the effect control means is for indicating the existence of the start memory. The start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display 83a) can be displayed on the display means, and depending on one display mode of the start memory display, the first information and the second information different from the first information can be displayed. , Can be suggested at the same time.
Therefore, the suggestion of the first information and the suggestion of the second information can be efficiently performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result, a production control means (effect) for controlling the production of the game in a game machine that generates a state advantageous to the player. The control device 300), the display means (display device 41) capable of displaying information related to the game, the start winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) in which the game ball can be won, and the starting winning area. A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories, which is the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball, is provided, and the effect control means is for indicating the existence of the start memory. The start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display 83a) can be displayed on the display means, and the suggestion of transition to the first game state is different from the first game state depending on the display mode of the start memory display. It is possible to suggest the transition to the second gaming state and to execute.
Therefore, the suggestion of the transition to the first gaming state and the suggestion of the transition to the second gaming state can be efficiently performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, it can be converted into a game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and an open state in which the game ball can win a prize. A normal variable winning device 37 is provided, and the game control means sets the state of the normal variable winning device 37 in either a first state or a second state in which winning is easier than the first state. It is possible to set the second state based on controlling and executing the game a predetermined number of times without deriving the special result, and the first game state is a special game that shifts based on the special result. It is a state, and the second gaming state is a time-saving state in which a transition is made based on executing a predetermined number of games without deriving a special result.
Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suggest a transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a common display can be used between the display mode suggesting the transition to the first gaming state and the display mode suggesting the transition to the second gaming state.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by guessing which of these game states the suggestion of the transition is being made.

Further, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, an effect control means for controlling the effect of the game. The effect control means includes a display means capable of displaying information related to the game, and the effect control means indicates a transition to the first game state and the first game state according to the display mode of the predetermined effect displayed on the display means. Is a suggestion of transition to a different second gaming state, and is feasible.
Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suggest a transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 115 shows another example of the ceiling suggestion effect.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), the ceiling suggestion effect is performed by the light emitting effect device 641 having an LED built-in and capable of executing the effect of emitting light, and the level meter 642 displayed on the display device 41. ing.

The meter value of the level meter 642 rises when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the meter display 642a corresponding to the meter value rises. Here, the meter value rises based on the fact that the out-of-order result is derived through the reach state. As a result, the disappointment caused by the detachment can be dispelled by the expectation of approaching the ceiling, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, the meter value is also when the last two digits of the value of the game execution count area stored based on the normal probability fluctuation number that manages the number of games until reaching the ceiling is 99 and the result is out of order. It is supposed to rise. In this case, the meter value is added so as to reach the upper limit value of the level meter 642. In this embodiment, since the number of ceilings is 900, the level meter 642 reaches the upper limit in the special figure fluctuation display game before reaching the ceiling, and the level meter 642 can suggest reaching the ceiling. ..

The predetermined condition for increasing the meter value is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the predetermined condition may be satisfied only when the SP reach is out of order, or the special condition executed by the pseudo-continuous fluctuation Figure The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display game occurs a predetermined number of times as an out-of-order result. That is, it is preferable that the predetermined conditions are satisfied when the player feels discouraged.
Of course, other conditions may be used, and for example, a specific effect may be executed or the player may operate the effect button 25.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), the meter value is increased based on the result of deviation from the reach state. The added value of the meter values of the level meter 642 may be the same value each time, or may be different values. For example, the added value may be different between the loss in the normal reach and the loss in the SP reach.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115 (c), when the last two digits of the value of the game execution count area stored based on the normal probability fluctuation number that manages the number of games until reaching the ceiling is 99, the result is 99. The meter value is rising based on the fact that it was out of order. The meter value rises here so as to reach the upper limit value of the level meter 642.
When the meter value reaches the upper limit, the effect display 643 is displayed around the level meter 642 as shown in FIG. 115 (d), and it is emphasized that the upper limit is reached.

Then, when the next special figure variation display game is started, if the ceiling is reached and the time saving state is started, the light emitting effect device 641 emits light as shown in FIG. 115 (e), and the light emitting effect is produced. An effect display 644 is displayed around the device 641 to notify that the ceiling has been reached. That is, in this case, the special figure variation display game of FIG. 115 (e) is the 900th special figure variation display game, which is the number of games reaching the ceiling.
The level meter 641 is then reset during the execution of this game.

In addition, based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, the light emitting effect device 641 may emit light and the effect display 644 may be displayed around the light emitting effect device 641 to notify that the ceiling has been reached.
In this case, the display of the "chance mode" indicating that the time is shortened due to reaching the ceiling is started after the light emitting effect device 641 or the effect display 644 notifies that the ceiling has been reached. ..

Further, when the next special figure fluctuation display game is started, if the ceiling is not reached in the special figure fluctuation display game, the light emitting effect device 641 does not emit light and the level is as shown in FIG. 115 (f). The meter value of the meter 642 is reset. That is, the meter value of the level meter 642 is reset when the last two digits of the value of the game execution number region stored based on the normal probability fluctuation number of times for managing the number of games until reaching the ceiling becomes 01.
In this way, the level meter 642 may reach the upper limit value even when the ceiling is not reached, so that the interest of the game can be improved even if the level meter 642 does not reach the ceiling.

As described above, the level meter 642 suggests reaching the ceiling to improve the interest of the game, and the level meter 642 makes it possible to visually recognize the possibility of reaching the ceiling, and the game is stopped halfway. It can be made difficult and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased.

FIG. 116 shows another example of the ceiling suggestion effect.
In this example, in the chance zone performed over a predetermined period, it is suggested that the higher the number of times the predetermined effect is executed, the higher the possibility of reaching the ceiling.

First, the chance zone is started as shown in FIG. 116 (b) based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied.
Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), one point is given by executing the predetermined effect once in the chance zone, and the awarding of points is notified. Further, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), the light emitting effect device 641 is lit in a light emitting color corresponding to the cumulative value of the points. In FIG. 116 (c), since the cumulative number of points is 1, the light is emitted in white. After that, the acquisition of points progresses, and as shown in FIG. 116 (e), when the cumulative number of points exceeds 4, the emission color of the emission effect device 641 changes to blue.

Further, in this example, the maximum number of predetermined effects that can be executed in one chance zone is 10, and when the maximum number of predetermined effects is executed, the arrival at the ceiling is deterministically notified. It is designed to do. In this case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect device 641 is also a light emitting color (here, red) that deterministically notifies the arrival at the ceiling.

If the ceiling is reached at the end of the chance zone, the light emitting effect device 641 emits light in rainbow colors as shown in FIG. 116 (f), and the effect display 644 is displayed around the light emitting effect device 641. It is notified that it has reached the ceiling.
If the ceiling has not been reached at the end of the chance zone, the light emitting effect device 641 is turned off as shown in FIG. 116 (g).

As described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by suggesting the arrival at the ceiling by shifting to the chance zone, and at the same time, the possibility of reaching the ceiling can be visually recognized by the chance zone, and the game can be played in the middle. It can be made difficult to stop and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased.

Although the start condition of the chance zone can be set arbitrarily, it is preferable to always start the game with a predetermined number of games before reaching the ceiling (for example, 20 games before). For example, the game may be started based on the last two digits of the value of the game execution number area stored based on the normal probability variation number of times for managing the number of games until the ceiling is reached to be 80.
The end condition of the chance zone can be set arbitrarily, but it is preferable to end the game before reaching the ceiling. For example, the game may be terminated when the last two digits of the value of the game execution count area stored based on the normal probability fluctuation number of times for managing the number of games until reaching the ceiling is 99.

Further, although it is assumed here that 1 point is given each time a predetermined effect is executed, an arbitrary point may be given and the possibility of reaching the ceiling may be suggested by the number of points acquired. .. For example, the points given may differ depending on the type of effect to be executed.
Further, in this example, the predetermined effect is the appearance of the character, but other effects may be used. For example, the decorative special figure start memory display 83a and the running memory display 84a have changed to a predetermined display mode, and the result or fluctuation pattern of the special figure variation display game has been in a predetermined mode.

FIG. 117 shows another example of the ceiling suggestion effect.
In this example, the first effect based on the number of games counted by the game control device 100 and the second effect based on the number of games counted by the effect control device 300 are executed.

In this example, based on the information from the game control device 100, the stage transition effect is performed as the first effect. This stage shift is performed based on the fact that the value of the game execution number region stored based on the normal probability variation number for managing the arrival at the ceiling in the game control device 100 reaches a predetermined number.

In the first effect, the stage is shifted from the special figure variation display game in which the last two digits of the value of the game execution count area are 81 to the chance zone. In addition, the chance zone ends when the special figure variation display game in which the last two digits of the value of the game execution count area is 99 ends.
In this example, the ceiling is 900 times, so there is a possibility that the ceiling will be reached in the next special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the last two digits of the value of the game execution count area are 99, and the chance zone. There is a possibility that the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling will start with the end of.
In other words, the chance zone is a stage that suggests that it may reach the ceiling.

Further, in this example, the effect of giving points as the second effect is performed based on the information managed only by the effect control device 300.
As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the display area is provided with a point number display unit 645 indicating the current number of points. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 117 (b) and 117 (c), 10 points are given each time the special figure variation display game ends.
It should be noted that points are given only in the special figure fluctuation display game in which the number of normal probability fluctuations for managing the arrival at the ceiling is updated.

This number of points is not based on the value of the game execution number region stored based on the normal probability fluctuation number managed by the game control device 100 to manage the number of games until reaching the ceiling, but is not based on the effect control device 300. It is managed based on the number of execution games for point management that is counted only by.
This number of execution games for point management is reset to 0 when a big hit occurs or reaches the ceiling, and since the effect control device 300 does not have a backup function when the power is cut off, when the power is cut off. Is also reset to 0. Also, +1 is added each time the game is executed. The number of points is set to be 10 times the number of points management games.
That is, the numerical value excluding the last digit of the number of points represents the number of executed games from the occurrence of a big hit or the arrival at the ceiling, or the number of executed games from the time when the power is turned on.

The example shown in FIG. 117 is an example after a big hit has already occurred or the ceiling has been reached after the power was turned on.
When a big hit occurs or the ceiling is reached, the value of the normal probability fluctuation number managed by the game control device 100, the value of the game execution number area based on this, and the point management managed only by the effect control device 300. The number of running games is reset.
Therefore, in the subsequent progress of the game, the value of the game execution number area and the number of points management execution games are in the same state.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 117 (e), in the special figure variation display game in which the last two digits of the value of the game execution count area are 81, the last three digits of the number of points are 810, and the stage from this special figure variation display game. Moves to the chance zone.
As shown in FIG. 117 (f), the game in the chance zone progresses, and as shown in FIG. 117 (g), the chance zone ends when the special figure variation display game in which the last three digits of the points are 990 ends. It has become. In the next special figure variation display game in which the chance zone is completed, the ceiling may be reached, but since it has not reached here, the stage returns to the normal stage as shown in FIG. 117 (g).
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117 (h), after the game in the chance zone progresses, the special figure fluctuation display game in which the last three digits of the points are 990 ends, and the chance zone ends, the next special figure change When the ceiling is reached in the display game, the time saving state based on the arrival at the ceiling is started as shown in FIG. 117 (i).

Here, as described above, the number of points is managed by the effect control device 300 that does not have a backup function when the power is cut off, and is reset to 0 when the power is cut off.
On the other hand, the number of normal probability fluctuations managed by the game control device 100 having a backup function when the power is cut off is counted by taking over the value before the power is cut off unless the RAM is cleared. The stage transition that is performed based on the number of probability fluctuations is also performed by taking over the timing before the power is cut off.

Therefore, if the RAM of the game control device 100 is not cleared, the player shifts to the chance zone at a timing when the last three digits of the number of points are not 810 when a big hit has not yet occurred or the ceiling has not been reached since the power was turned on. It will be.
On the other hand, when the RAM of the game control device 100 is cleared, the chance zone is entered at the timing when the last three digits of the number of points become 810 when a big hit has not yet occurred or the ceiling has not been reached since the power was turned on. It will be migrated.

This makes it possible for the player to determine whether or not the RAM has been cleared from the number of points at the time of stage transition. If the RAM is not cleared, it can be understood that the number of games until reaching the ceiling is less than the initial value, so that the interest in selecting a gaming machine at the time of opening can be increased.
Further, when the probability set value is changed, the RAM is cleared, so that it is possible to infer the possibility that the probability set value has been changed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above example, the display of the number of points is managed by the effect control device 300, and the stage transition is managed by the game control device 100, thereby suggesting the possibility of clearing the RAM from the discrepancy between the two. The content of the production is not limited to this. Any effect may be used as long as the effect managed by the effect control device 300 and the effect managed by the game control device 100 are simultaneously executed and the discrepancy between the two suggests the possibility of clearing the RAM.
For example, if the value of the game execution count area reaches a specific value, some effect is performed, and if the number of points management games also reaches a specific value, some effect is performed. It is possible to suggest the possibility of clearing the RAM depending on whether or not the above are performed at the same time.

In addition, the number of points is limited to 10 points for each execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, but it is not limited to this, and is determined based on the result and fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, a separate lottery result, and the like. The number of points may be given. In this case as well, it is preferable to give points so that the timing can be recognized at the stage transition timing that occurs periodically. For example, at the timing when the last two digits of the value become 81 from the reset of the number of points management games, it is preferable that the last three digits of the number of points become 810.

In addition, the game may be announced when the number of points exceeds a certain number, which normally does not exceed. For example, in this embodiment, since the ceiling is 900 times, the number of points does not exceed 9000, but when points are given such that the number of points exceeds 9000, the occurrence of a big hit is announced. You may.
Further, although the number of points is displayed in this example, the total number of games may be displayed or the countdown may be displayed from the number of games until the ceiling is reached. That is, any display may be used as long as the number of points management games can be grasped by the player.

Further, although the number of points is reset by shutting off the power supply, the number of points corresponding to the number of normal probability fluctuations managed by the game control device 100 is displayed based on the normal probability fluctuation number command received after the power is turned on. You may do so.

FIG. 118 shows another example of the ceiling suggestion effect shown in FIG. 117.
In this example, the transition rate to the chance zone differs depending on the probability setting value. By doing so, the player can guess the probability set value from the presence or absence of the transition to the chance zone, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As mentioned above, it is possible to determine whether or not the RAM has been cleared from the number of points when the stage shifts, but after the big hit has already occurred or the ceiling has been reached after the power was turned on, the stage The relationship between the number of points at the time of transition is always constant, and it becomes clear that the ceiling will be reached when the number of points reaches 9000 points.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118, by providing a function of estimating the probability set value, the relationship between the stage transition and the number of points is used for determining the RAM clear at the time of opening the store, and then used for determining the probability set value. It is possible to have an interest and improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that when the timing at which there is a possibility of stage transition shown in FIG. 118 is reached for the first time after the power is turned on, that is, when the special figure variation display game in which the last two digits of the value of the game execution count area is 81 is reached. May always shift the stage regardless of the ratio shown in FIG. 118. By doing so, if the special figure fluctuation display game is executed a certain number of times (81 times in this case) after the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the number of points and the stage transition timing are different, and whether the RAM is cleared. Can be determined.

It is also possible to combine the ceiling suggestion effect shown in FIG. 117 with the ceiling suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 115 and 116.
For example, when the ceiling suggestion effect shown in FIG. 115 is used, the meter value of the level meter 642 is added up to the upper limit value when the last two digits of the number of points management games are 80 and the result is incorrect. To be done. Then, depending on whether or not the level meter 642 reaches the upper limit value and becomes a chance zone in the next special figure fluctuation display game, it is possible to determine whether or not the RAM has been cleared and to estimate the probability set value. You can do it.
When the ceiling suggestion effect shown in FIG. 116 is used, the ceiling suggestion effect shown in FIG. 116 is performed in the chance zone in the ceiling suggestion effect shown in FIG. 117.
In addition to this, it is also possible to combine the ceiling suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 110, and it is also possible to combine three or more ceiling suggestion effects.

From the above, a game in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a game in which a state advantageous to the player is generated, the game is comprehensively controlled. The game control means includes a control means (game control device 100) and an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect based on information from the game control means, and the game control means stores data stored even when the power is cut off. It can be held, and the held data can be discarded by performing a predetermined operation. The effect control means includes a first effect based on the number of game executions counted by the game control means being a specific number of times. It is possible to simultaneously execute the second effect based on the number of times the game is executed, which is counted by the effect control means, to be a specific number of times.
Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to determine whether or not the RAM has been cleared, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the starting winning area (starting winning opening, normal variable winning device 37) that can generate the right to execute the game by winning the game ball, the starting winning area, the closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and the game ball The game control means includes a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a winning open state, and the game control means can change the state of the normal variable winning device 37 to the first state and the first state, which is easier to win. It is possible to control in any of the second states, count the number of games until a special result is derived, and set the second state based on the count result being a predetermined number of times. Data including the counting result can be retained even in the shutoff state, and the retained data can be discarded by performing a predetermined operation. The specific number of times includes a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined number from the predetermined number of times. Will be.
Therefore, it is possible to foretell the transition to the second state by the first effect and the second effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the game control means can select the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit, RAM initialization switch 112). The game control means and the effect control means clear the counted number of game executions based on the derivation of the special result, and the effect control means counts the number of game executions counted by the game control means as a specific number of times. Based on the above, the first effect can be executed according to the selection rate set according to the probability setting value.
Therefore, the probability set value can be estimated from the execution mode of the first effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as a game control means for comprehensively controlling a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. , A production control means that controls the production based on information from the game control means, and the game control means counts the number of games until a specific condition is satisfied, and data including the counting result even when the power is cut off. It is possible to discard the retained data by performing a predetermined operation, and the effect control means can execute a predetermined effect based on the result of counting by the game control means being a specific number of times. It will be.
The specific conditions are that a special result is derived and that the ceiling is reached. Of course, other events may be used as conditions. Further, the number of games may be simply counted by the game control device 100 without setting specific conditions. The counted number of games is reset by clearing the RAM.

This makes it possible for the player to determine whether or not the RAM has been cleared depending on whether or not the predetermined effect is performed when the number of games has reached a specific number of times since the store opened, improving the interest of the game. can do.
In this case, the specific number of times is set as a predetermined value so that the player can grasp the specific number of times, the specific number of times itself is notified by the display of the display device 41 or the like, and the power is turned on by the effect control device 300. By counting the number of games from the game and notifying when the counting result reaches a specific number of times, the player may be able to more clearly determine whether or not the RAM is cleared.

Next, a board box for storing the board will be described.
As shown in FIG. 119, from the game control device 100 that comprehensively controls the game, the effect control device 300 that controls the effect based on the information from the game control device 100, and the game control device 100 on the back surface side of the game machine. A payout control device 200 that controls payout of game balls based on the above information is provided.
The boards of the game control device 100, the effect control device 300, the payout control device 200, and the like are housed in a board box in order to prevent fraudulent activities. This board box is made of a material that can transmit light so that the housed board can be visually recognized.

FIG. 120 shows the game control device 100.
The game control device 100 is a transparent game control board 101 (board) for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game by controlling the operation of the game machine 10 and the like, and a transparent game control board 101 for accommodating the game control board 101 inside. It is configured to include a board box 102. The board box 102 is composed of a first case member 160 and a second case member 170, and the game control board 101 is stored in a storage space formed by the first case member 160 and the second case member 170, and in this state. It is sealed. In the present embodiment, both the first case member 160 and the second case member 170 are formed of transparent members, but at least the first case member 160 may be transparent.

The left and right ends of the first case member 160 and the second case member 170 are provided with caulking portions 161, 162 and caulking receiving portions 171 and 172, respectively, for connecting them with a one-way screw 180 in a non-destructive and unopenable manner. .. Further, after the first case member 160 and the second case member 170 are connected, a sealing cap 181 is attached to the head of the one-way screw 180 in order to prevent fraudulent acts on the one-way screw 180. ..

The game control board 101 is a printed wiring board having a rectangular outer shape, which will be described in detail later. That is, the game control board 101 is a board that is long in one direction (left-right direction), and printed wiring is formed on the game control board 101, and electronic components such as a CPU 111 and a connector that form a game control circuit on the surface thereof. (Connector terminal) 103 is mounted.

Further, an electronic tag sticker 184 having an electronic tag chip 183 capable of transmitting identification information unique to the game control device 100 stored in advance can be attached to the first case member 160 and the second case member 170 constituting the board box 102. The tag cover member 185 is attached to the sticker attachment portions 163 and 173 to which the electronic tag seal 184 is attached, and the tag cover member 185 can be fixed by the one-way screw 186. ..

The game control device 100 is attached to the back surface of the game board 30, and the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 12, so that the game control device 100 is exposed rearward from the opening provided in the front frame 12 and is visually recognized from the back side of the game machine 10. Arranged as possible.
In this state, the second case member 170 faces the front side of the gaming machine, the first case member 160 faces the back side of the gaming machine, and the first case member 160 is seen through from the back side of the gaming machine. The game control board 101 can be visually recognized.

FIG. 121 shows the details of the game control board 101.
The surface of the game control board 101 shown in FIG. 121 is a surface that faces the back surface side of the game machine when the game control device 100 is attached to the game machine, and is a surface that can be visually recognized from the back surface side of the game machine.

Various electronic components are attached to the game control board 101, and a wiring pattern (signal wiring and power supply line) made of a conductive layer such as copper is formed on the surface (surface and layers when the board has a laminated structure). It is formed. As electronic components, for example, a connector 103, a CPU 111, an IC 104, a resistor 105, a resistor array 106, a capacitor 107, a transistor 108, and the like are attached.

An identification code consisting of characters or symbols is described on the IC 104 to identify the IC 104. The identification code of the IC 104 is written on a surface parallel to the plate surface of the game control board 101.
Further, the CPU 111 also describes an identification code composed of characters and symbols. The identification code of the CPU 111 is written on the upper surface when the game control device 100 is attached to the game machine.
Further, the transistor 108 also has an identification code composed of characters and symbols. The identification code of the transistor 108 is described in the flat portion (the right side surface in FIG. 121).
Further, the resistance array 106 also has an identification code composed of characters and symbols. The identification code of the resistor array 106 is written on the side surface of the long side (lower side surface in FIG. 121).
An identification code composed of letters and symbols may also be described on the resistor 105 and the capacitor 106.

Further, on the game control board 101, a designated display for designating the electronic component to be attached is described adjacent to the portion to which the electronic component is attached. This designated display is formed by an etching process for forming a wiring pattern, engraving by irradiation with a laser beam, silk printing, or the like. The designated display is a display that combines the types of parts and their numbers. For example, IC * (* is a number) for CPU 111 and IC 104, R * for resistor 105, and RA for resistor array 106. *, C * in the case of the capacitor 107, and C * in the case of the transistor 108. Of course, the notation format is not limited to this.

In this designated display, there are a description along the longitudinal direction of the game control board 101 and a description along the short side direction of the game control board 101.
Each of the descriptions along the longitudinal direction is described in the same direction, and in FIG. 121, only the reading direction is from left to right. Further, each of the descriptions along the short side direction is also described in the same direction, and in FIG. 121, only the direction of reading from the bottom to the top is shown.
That is, the description of the designated display is only in two directions. As a result, if the description is confirmed from two directions, all the designated displays can be read, and the work efficiency can be improved.

Further, the designated display described adjacent to the IC 104 is described so that the characters are lined up along the longitudinal direction of the IC 104. Further, the reading direction is the same as that of the identification code written on the IC 104.
Further, the designated display described adjacent to the transistor 108 is described along a surface (upper surface in FIG. 121) different from the surface (the right side surface in FIG. 121) on which the identification code is described in the transistor 108. Has been done.
Further, the designated display written adjacent to the resistor array 106 is displayed on a surface (upper surface in FIG. 121) different from the surface (lower side surface in FIG. 121) on which the identification code is described in the resistor array 106. It is described along.
The identification code written on these electronic components and the designated display written on the game control board 101 form the predetermined first information written on the game control board 101.

FIG. 122 shows a portion of the first case member 160 facing the game control board 101 shown in FIG. 121.
A connector through hole 164 is formed at a position facing the connector 103 so that the connector 103 can penetrate and be exposed to the outside. Further, in order to eliminate a gap with the surface of the game control board 101 around the connector through hole 164 and prevent an illegal member from being inserted from the connector through hole 164, the game control board 101 is formed rather than the central portion. It is formed so that it is close to each other. Therefore, a step portion 165 formed substantially vertically so as to face the game control board 101 side is provided around this portion.
Further, the periphery of the sticker sticking portion 163 is also a step portion 165.

Further, the first case member 160 is provided with a material display 166 indicating the material of the first case member 160. The material display 166 is formed by the unevenness of the resin.
Further, the first case member 160 is formed with a gate mark 167 which is a portion where resin is injected when the first case member 160 is injection-molded. The gate mark 167 has unevenness of resin.
Further, the first case member 160 is formed with a date mark 168 indicating the time when the first case member 160 was manufactured. The date mark 168 is formed by the unevenness of the resin.

Further, the first case member 160 is provided with a two-dimensional code 169 including information about the game control device 100. This two-dimensional code 169 is printed or a sticker attached to the first case member 160.
Further, the first case member 160 is provided with a product display 190 that displays the manufacturer, model name, and the like of the game control device 100. This product display 190 is printed or a sticker affixed to the first case member 160.
The material display 166, the date mark 168, the two-dimensional code 169, and the product display 190 form the predetermined second information described in the board box 102.

FIG. 123 shows an overlapping portion between the game control board 101 and the first case member 160 in a state where the game control board 101 shown in FIG. 121 is housed in the board box 102. That is, FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 overlap each other and the game control board 101 can be visually recognized through the first case member 160.

The reading direction of the character or symbol written on the first case member 160 is not parallel to the reading direction of the character or symbol described on the game control board 101 located at a position facing the character or symbol. ..
For example, the reading direction of the material display 166 of the first case member 160 (from left to right in FIG. 123), the designated display described on the game control board 101 at a position facing the material display 166, and the identification code of the IC 104. The reading direction (from bottom to top in FIG. 123) is not parallel, but is orthogonal here.

Further, the reading direction of the product display 190 provided on the first case member 160 (from left to right in FIG. 123) and the reading direction of the designated display described on the game control board 101 at a position facing the product display 190. (From bottom to top in FIG. 123) is not parallel, but orthogonal here.
Further, among the date marks 168 provided on the first case member 160, the reading direction with the designated display (character C1 in FIG. 123) described on the game control board 101 and the character overlapping with the designated display (FIG. 123). The reading direction of the letters 8 and 9 in the lower display indicating the month of manufacture) is not parallel.

As described above, the reading direction of the character or symbol (second information) described on the first case member 160 and the character or symbol (first information) described on the game control board 101 at a position facing the character or symbol. By preventing the reading direction of (1) from being parallel to each other, it is possible to make it easier to recognize each character even if they appear to overlap.

Further, the alignment direction of the two date marks 168 provided on the first case member 160 (vertical direction in FIG. 123) and the designated display written on the game control board 101 at a position facing the date mark 168 are read. The directions (from left to right of the letter C1 in FIG. 123) are not parallel, but orthogonal here.
That is, by making sure that the vertical direction in which the two date marks 168 are sequentially confirmed and the reading direction of the designated display are not parallel to each other, it is easy to recognize each of them even if they appear to overlap. Can be done.

Further, the designation display and the identification code such as the IC 104, the resistor array 106, and the transistor 108 are not positioned at the positions of the game control board 101 facing the gate trace 167 formed on the first case member 160.
The gate mark 167 has irregularities of resin, and when the gate mark 167 is seen through, the gate mark 167 looks distorted and it becomes difficult to recognize the characters and symbols. Therefore, the characters and symbols are not positioned at this position.

Similarly, the designation display and the identification codes such as the IC 104, the resistor array 106, and the transistor 108 are not positioned at the positions of the game control board 101 facing the step portion 165 formed on the first case member 160.
The step portion 165 has a thick resin, and when viewed through the step portion 165, it looks distorted and it becomes difficult to recognize the characters and symbols. Therefore, the characters and symbols are not positioned at this position.

The date mark 168 is also formed by the unevenness of the resin so that the designation display and the identification code such as the IC 104, the resistor array 106, and the transistor 108 are not located at the position of the game control board 101 facing the date mark 168. You may.
In addition to the ones shown here, if there are parts that hinder the visibility of the material display 166, other parts where the unevenness of the resin is formed, the two-dimensional code 169, the product display 190, etc., these are used. The designation display, the IC 104, the resistance array 106, the transistor 108, and other identification codes may not be located at the positions of the opposite game control boards 101.

Further, the electronic components may not be arranged at the position of the game control board 101 facing the gate mark 167 or the step portion 165. By doing so, it becomes possible to reliably confirm the electronic components. Of course, the electronic components may not be arranged at the positions of the material display 166, the date mark 168, other parts where the unevenness of the resin is formed, the two-dimensional code 169, and the game control board 101 facing the product display 190.

That is, in the first case member 160, the step portion 165, the material indication 166, the gate mark 167, the date mark 168, the portion where the unevenness of the resin is formed, the portion where the two-dimensional code 169 and the product indication 190 exist are present. , The visibility is lower than the part where these do not exist. That is, the portion of the first case member 160 in which these are not present forms a highly visible portion that makes the housed substrate visible with a predetermined visibility, and the portion in which these are present is more visible than the predetermined visibility of the substrate. It forms a low visibility part with low visibility.

Then, a substrate (game control substrate 101) on which electronic components (CPU 111, IC 104, resistor 105, resistor array 106, capacitor 107, transistor 108, etc.) are mounted on the surface, and a transparent substrate for accommodating the substrate inside. In a gaming machine provided with a box 102, the board box 102 has a high-visibility portion that enables the housed substrate to be visually recognized with a predetermined visibility, and a low-visibility portion in which the visibility of the substrate is lower than the predetermined visibility. There is a sex portion, and the first information may not be described at a position facing the low visibility portion. Further, the electronic component may not be arranged at a position facing the low visibility portion.

FIG. 124 shows the relationship between the CPU 111 and the one provided on the first case member 160 that hinders visual recognition.
As shown in FIG. 124, a step portion 165, a material display 166, a gate mark 167, a date mark 168, a two-dimensional code 169, a product display 190 and others are located at and around the position of the first case member 160 facing the CPU 111. The part that obstructs the visibility, such as the part where the unevenness of the resin is formed, is not positioned.
The periphery of the CPU 111 is at least the range up to the electronic components arranged adjacent to the periphery of the CPU 111, as shown by the dotted line. In this example, there is no obstacle to the visibility in a range wider than this range.
Further, the periphery of the CPU 111 may be a range up to the designated display corresponding to the electronic components arranged so as to be adjacent to the periphery of the CPU 111.

Further, as shown by the broken line, the upper and lower ranges of the first case member 160 along the left and right width of the CPU 111 are wider on the upper side than on the lower side of the CPU 111.
An identification code consisting of characters and symbols is written on the surface of the CPU 111 facing upward, and the identification code is wider on the side of this surface than on the other surface because there is no position where something that obstructs visibility is not located. Can be seen reliably.
In particular, the position of the game control device 100 attached to the game machine is located below the line of sight of the clerk of the game store, so that the identification code can be reliably seen by ensuring visibility from above. Become.

FIG. 125 (a) shows a schematic view of the portion of the CPU 111 viewed from the side surface on the left side in FIG. 124. As shown in FIG. 125 (a), with respect to the upper side of the CPU 111 having the surface on which the identification code is written, the contact point between the CPU 111 and the game control board 101 and the first case member 160 side of the electronic component adjacent to the upper side of the CPU 111. A virtual line a1 connecting the end portions is formed so that the first case member 160 does not obstruct the visual recognition of the area between the virtual line and the virtual line a2 parallel to the upper surface of the CPU 111. There is.
By doing so, the entire upper side of the CPU 111 can be reliably visually recognized, and it is possible to confirm that an illegal member is attached.
As for the lower side of the CPU 111 and both the left and right sides, the first case member 160 may be free from hindrance in the same range.

FIGS. 125 (b) and 125 (c) show a case where the cover member 191 is provided on the first case member 160. The first case member 160 may be provided with a cover member 191 for covering a keyhole into which a setting key is inserted, and a cover member 191 for covering a RAM initialization switch. Examples of such a cover member 191 include a transparent member that operates in an arc shape as shown in FIG. 125 (b) and a transparent member that slides linearly as shown in FIG. 125 (c).

When such a cover member 191 is provided, the visibility of the game control board 101 may be lowered due to the presence of the cover member 191. Further, the operation of the cover member 191 may cause scratches on the surface of the first case member 160 along the operating direction, and the scratches may reduce the visibility of the game control board 101.
In consideration of such a decrease in visibility of the game control board 101, the reading direction of the designated display and the identification code of the electronic component may be set to a direction different from the operating direction of the cover member 191.

For example, in FIG. 125 (b), the designated display and the identification code are described in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction with respect to the direction along the arc or the direction of the tangent line of the arc, and these are different directions. There is.
Further, in FIG. 125 (c), the description direction of the designated display is the left-right direction with respect to the left-right direction in which the cover member 191 operates, and these are different directions.

The designated display may not be displayed or the electronic component may not be arranged in the portion facing the operating range of the cover member 191.
Further, in the above-described example, although the game control device 100 has been described, it can be applied to other control devices such as the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200.

From the above, a substrate (game control substrate 101) on which electronic components (CPU 111, IC 104, resistor 105, resistor array 106, capacitor 107, transistor 108, etc.) are mounted on the surface, and a substrate for accommodating the substrate inside. In a gaming machine provided with a transparent board box 102, predetermined first information (designated display, identification code) is described on the board, and predetermined second information (material display 166, date) is written on the board box 102. The mark 168, the two-dimensional code 169, and the product display 190) are described, and the direction of reading the first information and the direction of reading the second information written at a position facing the first information are parallel. I try not to become.
Therefore, the first information and the second information can be easily recognized, and the work efficiency can be improved.

The second information is information indicating the material of the substrate box 102.
The first information is information (designated display) written on the board corresponding to the electronic component to be mounted.
The first information is information (identification code) written on the electronic component.
In addition, the electronic components are not arranged at the positions facing the second information. Therefore, the visibility of the electronic component is not hindered.

Further, a substrate (game control substrate 101) on which electronic components (CPU 111, IC 104, resistor 105, resistor array 106, capacitor 107, transistor 108, etc.) are mounted on the surface, and a transparent substrate for accommodating the substrate inside. In the gaming machine provided with the box 102, predetermined first information (designated display, identification code) is described on the substrate, and the substrate box 102 is provided with an operable cover member 191 to provide the first information. This means that the reading direction and the operating direction of the cover member 191 are not parallel to each other.
Therefore, the first information can be easily recognized, and the work efficiency can be improved.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as the gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Pachinko machine 41 Display device (display means)
300 Production control device (Production control means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result.
A production control means that controls the production of the game,
Equipped with a display means that can display information about the game,
The effect control means
Depending on the display mode of the predetermined effect displayed on the display means, the suggestion of the transition to the first gaming state and the suggestion of the transition to the second gaming state different from the first gaming state can be executed. A gaming machine characterized by being.

Images